| all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| manuals | |||||||||
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 |
|
User manual BT rev | Users Manual | 834.70 KiB | / January 08 2005 | |||
| 1 2 |
|
User manual System rev | Users Manual | 3.05 MiB | / January 08 2005 | |||
| 1 2 |
|
User manual WLAN rev | Users Manual | 979.70 KiB | / January 08 2005 | |||
| 1 2 |
|
Users manual BT | Users Manual | 834.35 KiB | / January 08 2005 | |||
| 1 2 |
|
Users manual System | Users Manual | 2.95 MiB | / January 08 2005 | |||
| 1 2 |
|
Users manual WLAN | Users Manual | 1.42 MiB | / January 08 2005 | |||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | External Photos | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Internal Photos | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Operational Description | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Operational Description | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Schematics | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Schematics | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Schematics | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Test Report | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Test Setup Photos | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | RF Exposure Info | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Test Report | / January 08 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 | Test Setup Photos | / January 08 2005 |
| 1 2 | User manual BT rev | Users Manual | 834.70 KiB | / January 08 2005 |
Bluetooth 1.2 USB module
(BM-GP-CS-08) Data Sheet December 2004 Rev 1.4 www.usi.com.tw Introduction The Bluetooth Class 2 Module (model number BM-GP-CS-08) is a small module with 10-way connector that provides a complete 2.4GHz Bluetooth system. This ready-to-use Class2 Bluetooth module provides a fully compliant Bluetooth system V1.2 for data and audio communications. This module also provides the coexistence solution that is critical for Notebook implementation. The coexistence solution includes AFH, and WCS (Wireless Coexistence Solution). Activity Signaling is an option. Feature l Fully Qualified Bluetooth v1.2 system l Enhanced Data Rate(EDR) compliant with v0.9. l Scatternet Support l With small size suitable for compact system integration. Low power consumption, extend the battery life. l 2.40 2 2.2480 GHz frequency band. l Support for 802.11b/g Coexistence including Intel WCS (Wireless Coexistence System). l Integrated Printed Antenna l Easy for integration into mobile and handheld device with flexible system configuration and antenna design. l On board 8 Mbits flash memory for firmware upgrade All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) General Description Features Standards Frequency Band Sensitivity Output Power Integrated Antenna Coverage Temperature Operating Voltage Power Consumption Data Rate Interface Dimensions Weight Operating systems Description Fully compliant with BluetoothTM 1.2 Standard 2.402GHz ~ 2.480GHz
-82 dBm 4 dBm max with power control (Maximum Power measurement is from chip set) Peak Gain @ 2.45GHz: 0.5dBi 10m ~20m (Varies depending on operating environment) Operating temperature: 0 C to +70 C Storage temperature: -40 C to +85 C 3.3V DC +/- 10%
Peak RF current during TX burst: 65 mA Peak RF current during RX burst: 47 mA Asynchronous:723.2kbps/57.6kbps Synchronous:433.9kbps/433.9kbps JST SM10B-SRSS-TB connector Length: 36.0 mm, Width: 13.8 mm, Height: 3.8 mm 2.0 grams +/- 15%
Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP Electrical Connector Pinout Figure 1: Connector pin assignment Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Pin Name GND USB_D+
USB_D-
RSVD BT_Priority / Ch_Clk (PIO4) HW_RADIO_DIS# (Optional) Ch_Data (PIO6)
+3.3V LED GND Description to 802.11b for BT_Active output Ground USB D+
USB D-
Reserved for Co-
Existence. This is optional if you need Activity Signalling scheme. BT Priority and Channel Clock for WCS. Disable radio transmissions when low Channel Data for WCS (Standard). Or, WLAN_Active input from 802.11b for Activity Signalling which is optional. 3.3V power input LED indicator for radio activity Ground Table 2: Connector pin assignment All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 1 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Block Diagram Figure 2: Module Block Diagram Electrical Characteristics Absolute Maximum Ratings Rating Storage Temperature Supply Voltage: VDD Recommended Operating Conditions Operating Condition Operating Temperature Range*
Supply Voltage: VDD Min
-40 C
-0.40V Min 0 C
+3.0V Max
+85 C
+3.60V Max
+70 C
+3.60V All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 2 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Input/Output Terminal Characteristics Digital Terminals Input Voltage VIL input logic level low (VDD=3.0V) VIH input logic level high Output Voltage VOL output logic level low, (lO = 4.0mA), VDD=3.0V VOH output logic level high, (lO = -4.0mA), VDD=3.0V USB Terminals Input threshold VIL input logic level low VIH input logic level high Input leakage current VSS < VIN< VDD CI Input capacitance Output levels to correctly terminated USB Cable VOL output logic level low VOH output logic level high Typ
-
-
-
Min
-0.4 0.7VDD
-
VDD-0.2 Min Typ
-
-
1
-
-
-
-
0.7VDD
-1 2.5 0 2.8 Max
+0.8 VDD+0.4 0.2
-
Max 0.3VDD
-
5 10 0.2 VDD Unit V V V V Unit V V A pF V V Average Current Consumption VDD=3.3V Temperature = 20C Mode ACL data transfer 1Mbps USB (Slave) ACL data transfer 1Mbps USB (Master) Standby Mode (Connected to host, no RF activity) Deep Sleep Typ Unit 50 58 10 380 mA mA mA uA Peak Current Consumption VDD=3.3V Temperature = 20C Mode Peak RF current during TX burst (+4 dBm , CW mode) Peak RF current during TX burst (0 dBm , CW mode) Peak RF current during RX burst (-82 dBm) Typ 55.0 52.0 44.0 Unit mA mA mA All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 3 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Radio Characteristics Radio Characteristics, VDD = 3.3V Temperature = +20C Receiver Frequency
(GHz) Min Typ Max Sensitivity at 0.1% BER Maximum received signal at 0.1% BER Transmitter RF transmit power Initial carrier frequency tolerance RF power control range 20dB bandwidth for modulated carrier Drift ( five slot packet) Drift Rate
?f1avg Maximum Modulation
?f2max Minimum Modulation 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.402 2.441 2.480
-
-
-
0 0 0
-82
-84
-84
-
-
-
-78
-80
-80
-
-
-
Frequency
(GHz) Min Typ Max 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.402 2.441 2.480
-3
-3
-3
-
-
-
25
-
-
-
Frequency
(GHz) Min 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.402 2.441 2.480 140 140 140 115 115 115 4 4 4 10 10 10 35 820 15 250 Typ 165 165 165 140 140 140
-
-
-
35 35 35
-
1000 25 400 Max 175 175 175
-
-
-
Notes:
Results shown are referenced to input of the RF Balanced-Filter. Bluetooth Specification 70
-20 Bluetooth Specification
-6 ?to +4(4) 75 16 1000 25 400 Bluetooth Specification 140 f1avg1 75 115 Unit dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm Unit dBm dBm dBm kHz kHz kHz dB kHz kHz Hz/s Unit kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 4
-
Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Radio Characteristics, C/I and Adjacent Channel Power VDD = 3.3V Temperature = +20C Frequency = 2441 MHz Receiver C/I co-channel Adjacent channel selectivity C/I F=F0+1MHz Adjacent channel selectivity C/I F=F0-1MHz Adjacent channel selectivity C/I F=F0+2MHz Adjacent channel selectivity C/I F=F0-2MHz Adjacent channel selectivity C/I F=F0+3MHz Adjacent channel selectivity C/I F=FImage Adjacent channel selectivity C/I F=F0-4MHz Transmitter Min Typ Max Bluetooth Specification Unit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
9
-4
-4
-35
-21
-45
-18
-25 11 0 0
-30
-20
-40
-9
-20 11 0 0
-30
-20
-40
-9
-20 Min Typ Max Bluetooth Specification dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Unit dBm dBm Adjacent channel transmit power F=F02MHz Adjacent channel transmit power F=F03MHz
-
-
-35
-45
-20
-40
-20
-40 All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 5 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Mounting Guide for Antenna Radiation In order to achieve longest communication range, please keep the area surrounding antenna free of grounding or metal housing. All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 6 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Impedance Matching of Antenna BM-GP-CS-08 utilizes a meander line printed antenna for radiate communication. Application environments, such as notebooks, PDAs, headsets or other handheld devices, both have plastic housings, different motherboards and other mechanism structures. These factors will cause the deviation of antenna resonant frequency. Therefore, impedance matching of antenna should be optimized for various applications to achieve longest communication range. Please consult USI for further information. All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 7 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Mechanical Drawing All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 8 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Laser Marking Legend:
1. USI MMYY: MMYY is the date code. MM stands for month while YY stands for the last 2 digits of the year. 2. P/N: BM-GP-CS-08 is the the standard USI model number. This part number can be customize to your specific part number. 3. MAC: MAC address. All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 9 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Packaging For Additional information, please contact the following:
Universal Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Headquarters 141, Lane 351, Taiping Road, Sec. 1, Tsao-Tuen , Taiwan, Http://www.usi.com.tw Tel: + 886-49-2350876, 2325876 Fax: +886-49-3439561, 2337360, 2351093 E-mail:usi@ms.usi.com.tw All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 10
| 1 2 | User manual System rev | Users Manual | 3.05 MiB | / January 08 2005 |
MOTION COMPUTING LE1600 TABLET PC MICROSOFT WINDOWS XP TABLET PC EDITION 2005 USER GUIDE Copyright Information Acrobat is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Atheros. the Atheros logo, Super G, Super A/G, Wake-on-Wireless, and Wake-on-Theft are registered trademarks of Atheros Communications, Inc. AuthenTec is a registered trademark of AuthenTec, Inc. BLUETOOTH is a registered trademark owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. and licensed to Motion Computing, Inc. Intel, Intel Inside, the Intel Inside logo, Pentium, and PROSet are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Knowles and IntelliSonic are trademarks or registered trademarks of Knowles Acoustics, Inc. Microsoft Windows, Windows XP, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition, and Windows Journal are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/
or other countries. Motion Computing, Speak Anywhere, and View Anywhere are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motion Computing, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. OmniPass is a trademark of Softex, Inc. Realtek is a trademark of Realtek Semiconductor Corporation. SigmaTel is a registered trademark and Universal Jacks is a trademark of SigmaTel Corporation. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Motion Computing, Inc. has made every effort to identify trademarked properties and owners on this page. All brands and product names used in this document are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. PATENTS: The Motion Computing products and services may be covered by one or more of the following protected inventions. Additional patents may also be pending. US PATENTS: D480,730. OTHER PATENTS: GB3009545, BG3009546, AUS154529, CAN101617, J1188539. For more information, see www.motioncomputing.com/info/patents. NOTICE: The information in this publication is subject to change without notice. MOTION COMPUTING, INC. SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN NOR FOR ACCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE, OR USE OF THIS MATERIAL. The information contained in this document is provided as is without warranty of any kind and is subject to change without notice. The warranties for Motion Products are set forth in the express limited warranty statements accompanying such products. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. This publication contains information protected by copyright. No part of this publication may be photocopied or reproduced in any form without prior written consent from Motion Computing, Inc. 2005 Motion Computing, Inc. (February 2005) P/N 024-02-0061 Rev. A00 Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide ii About This User Guide CAUTIONS, WARNINGS AND NOTICES The following notices are found in this User Guide:
WARNING: Text set off in this way indicates that failure to follow directions in the warning could result in bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: Text set off in this way indicates that failure to follow directions in the CAUTION could result in damage to the equipment or loss of information. MENU ITEMS, BUTTONS, ICONS WRITING ON THE DISPLAY INK REFERENCES TO USING THE PEN AND PEN FUNCTION BUTTON IMPORTANT: Text set off in this way presents information or instructions that should be followed or information of particular interest. NOTE: Text set off in this way presents information or instructions. Menu items, icons, and instructions found in the procedures in this User Guide are set apart by capitalizing them exactly as shown on screen. Examples are the Start menu, Dashboard, Tablet and Pen Settings icon, and Apply buttons. Writing on the Motion Tablet PC digitizer display in this User Guide refers to any handwritten input using the specially-designed Motion digitizer pen, that is provided. The display responds only to this pen and not to any other type of pen or to a stylus or other device such as those used with personal digital assistants (PDAs). The display surface may be damaged by ink pens or other pointed objects. The term ink refers to digital ink, i.e., hand-drawn or handwritten input and that can be displayed or converted into text. Notations for using the Motion Digitizer Pen, which are found throughout this User Guide, are described below:
Tap Firmly tap the pen on the Tablet PC display, without pressing the function button on the pen; a tap equals a mouse left-click Double-tap Tap the pen twice on the display, without pressing the function button on the pen Right-click Press the function button on the pen and tap the pen on the display (equals a mouse right-click) Press and hold Press and hold the tip of the pen to the display with-
out pressing the pen function button (equals a mouse right-click) Tap and drag Tap and drag the pen on the display Select/Highlight Tap on the item on the display to activate the func-
tion: to select a line of text, tap, hold down the button, and drag the pen across the text to highlight it TASK BAR/
SYSTEM TRAY The Microsoft Windows task bar is on the lower-left of the display; the system tray (or notification area) is on the lower right, near the clock. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide iii Table of Contents Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Features Overview . 1 Quick Start Instructions . 2 Using the Motion Digitizer Pen . 2 Helpful Hints: Pen and Ink . 3 Complete the Microsoft Tablet PC Tutorials . 4 Review Using Your Motion Tablet and User Guide . 4 Open the Motion Dashboard . 4 Visit the Microsoft Help and Support Center . 5 Hardware Overview . 6 Tablet PC Display . 7 Fingerprint Reader . 7 Motion AC Adapter . 7 Motion Battery Pack . 7 Tablet PC Buttons, Connectors, and Indicators . 10 Front Panel Buttons . 10 Front Panel LEDs . 11 Battery Status LEDs . 11 Ports, Slots and Connectors . 12 Software Overview . 14 Using Your Motion Tablet . 14 Motion Dashboard . 15 Motion Security Center . 18 Motion Third-Party Software Solutions . 18 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Pen and Ink . 19 Configuring Tablet and Pen Settings . 19 Calibrating and Using Your Digital Pen . 20 Using the Tablet PC Input Panel . 22 Helpful Hints: Using the TIP Window . 26 Audio and Video . 26 Motion Dashboard Audio System Controls . 26 Adjusting Display Settings and Screen Brightness . 26 Creating Schemes for External Monitors . 30 Helpful Hints: Mirrored and Extended Modes . 31 Power Management . 31 Configuring Your Power Management Settings . 31 Using Your Batteries . 34 Helpful Hints: Battery and Power Management . 36 Security Features and Settings . 37 Motion Security Center . 37 Motion OmniPass and Fingerprint Reader . 38 Helpful Hints: Successful Fingerprint Captures . 41 Capturing a Fingerprint . 41 Capturing a Second Fingerprint Later . 44 Configuring Advanced OmniPass Features . 44 Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide v Logging Onto a Remembered Site . 46 Configuring Strong Logon Security . 46 Infineon Trusted Platform Module . 47 Windows Security System Components Overview . 47 Speech . 51 Introduction to Speech . 51 Motion Speak Anywhere Technology . 51 Speech Recognition . 52 Helpful Hints: Dictating and Recording . 55 Ports, Slots and Connectors . 56 PC Cards . 56 SD Cards . 56 IrDA (infrared) Port. 56 USB Ports . 56 Speaker Port . 56 Microphone Port . 56 DVI-D Connector . 57 VGA Connector . 57 Docking Connector . 57 Wireless Networking . 57 Wi-Fi (802.11) Wireless Connections . 57 Bluetooth Wireless Connections . 59 Using the Bluetooth Application . 60 Helpful Hints: Bluetooth Wireless . 65 Using Infrared Wireless Connections . 65 Configuring Buttons . 68 Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance Caring for Your Tablet PC and Its Accessories . 69 General Care . 69 Caring for the Standard and View Anywhere Displays . 70 Caring for the Motion Digitizer Pen . 70 Ordering New Pens . 71 Traveling With our Tablet PC . 71 Traveling by Air . 71 Other Travel Hints . 72 System Repair/Recovery Procedure . 72 Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support Solutions To Common Problems . 75 Frequently Asked Questions . 81 Motion Warranties . 82 Standard and Extended Warranty and Insurance Programs 82 Motion Computing Support . 82 Appendix B Motion Tablet PC Specification . 83 Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide vi Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC The Tablet PC from Motion Computing combines the best features of desktop and notebook computing with the unique mobility and versatility found only in a Tablet PC. This chapter provides a quick start overview of the hardware and software features of the Tablet PC. Specific details on how to set up and use the Tablet PC are provided in Chapter 2. The Care and Maintenance of your new Tablet PC is detailed in Chapter 3. Appendix A is a summary of common problems and the steps to take if those problems occur. Appendix B is a reference to where you can find the Tablet PC Specifications. It is not necessary to read this document from cover to cover. If you are already familiar with personal computers, you may feel comfortable proceeding to the instructions in the next chapter. If there are certain things you want to learn about your new Tablet PC, look in the Table of Contents or search for that topic. The Motion Tablet PC includes these key features:
Microsoft Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 operating system that contains a Tablet PC Input Panel (TIP) with ink-to-text and word recogni-
tion functionality, and an improved security infrastructure that helps defend against viruses, worms, and hackers Optional View AnywhereTM display which optimizes the display for both outdoor and indoor viewing, providing the same wide viewing angles as the standard display while significantly improving the sunlight contrast ratio and significantly reducing unwanted reflection and glare Ambient Light Sensor (ALS) to automatically optimize display perfor-
mance and battery life Integrated 802.11 Wi-Fi wireless technology Integrated Bluetooth wireless technology for pairing with Bluetooth devices Fingerprint reader for convenient, secure biometric password manage-
ment; combined with Motion OmniPass software to manage settings Speak AnywhereTM technology that combines user-configurable acous-
tics software with integrated array microphones to optimize the audio capabilities of your Tablet PC Motion Dashboard for convenient access to Tablet PC controls High speed USB ports Front panel status LEDs and function buttons Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 1 FEATURES OVERVIEW Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Screen rotation Handwriting and voice recognition PC Card slot for memory expansion, or accessory connections Secure Digital (SD) Card slot to support SD storage devices User-configurable power-saving schemes Additional I/O ports Two audio jacks (designated as microphone/audio in and headphone/audio out) Two USB 2.0 ports External VGA monitor port RJ-45 (Gigabit Ethernet network) DVI-D (Digital Video Interface) port Infrared (IrDA) transceiver DC power-in port Motion Digitizer Pen/Eraser for ink input, with a pen storage bay and a pen tether anchor built into the Tablet PC Universal security lock slot QUICK START INSTRUCTIONS Start the Tablet PC by sliding the power switch. The power LED turns blue and the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) LED intermittently flashes blue (these are the top two LEDs on the upper right corner). Then Windows XP launches. When you start the Tablet PC, the Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 Tutorials screen appears. NOTE: If you do not want this screen to continue to appear, check Do not show me this again. We recommend that you complete the Microsoft tutorials, which take a few min-
utes. It you do not want to run the tutorials now, you can return to them by tapping Start > Using Your Motion Tablet PC. Using the Motion Digitizer Pen Function Button Tip Eraser The Motion Digitizer Pen contains internal electronics that let you enter digital ink on the Tablet PC display. The pen is a sensitive, electronic, data-entry device designed in conjunction with the display. The pen includes a user-
replaceable tip; the other end of the pen serves as an eraser in applications that support an eraser. The pen contains no batteries and requires no external power. The pen contains a pen function button, used for right-clicking (like a mouse) and a small opening at one end for attaching a pen tether cord. Using the pen tether
(provided) helps prevent pen loss; attach it to the built-in pen tether post on the upper right edge of the Tablet PC. The pen also comes with replacement pen tips and a replacement tool. For information about replacing the pen tips, refer to the Care and Maintenance information in Chapter 3. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 2 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Pen Usage. Think of the pen as your mouse; review the following information about how it works in conjunction with tapping, pressing, and the function button. Tap Firmly tap the pen on the Tablet PC display, without pressing the function button on the pen; a tap equals a mouse left-click Double-tap Tap the pen twice on the display, without pressing the function button on the pen Right-click Press the function button on the pen and tap the pen on the display (equals a mouse right-click) Press and hold Press and hold the tip of the pen to the display with-
out pressing the pen function button (equals a mouse right-click) Tap and drag Tap and drag the pen on the display Select/Highlight Tap on the item on the display to activate the func-
tion: to select a line of text, tap, hold down the button, and drag the pen across the text to highlight it NOTE: For best results, we recommend that you calibrate your pen before using it for the first time. For information about this and other pen procedures, refer to Calibrating and Using Your Digital Pen on page 20. Helpful Hints: Pen and Ink Here are some additional hints about working with the digital pen. For more information about the pen and Tablet PC settings refer to Configuring Tablet and Pen Settings on page 19. When you write with the pen, you can rest your hand or arm anywhere without disturbing any open programs or damaging the display. Watch the cursor instead of the pen tip when you write. The cursor is a guide for your pen movements. If it does not align with the pen tip, you should recalibrate the pen. Practice writing and learn how firmly and where to tap on the Tablet PC display. You need these skills for activating programs, menus, or other Tablet PC functions. The pen can be held like any other writing tool. Learn how to hold it and when and how to press the function button on the pen, which activates right-click options (such as pop-up menus). You can also activate the right-click options by pressing and holding the pen tip on the surface of the display. Change pen tips every 90 days in a clean environment. Change pen tips every 30 days if you use the pen in an environment with airborne or sur-
face debris (sand, dust, etc.) or if you drop it on a rough surface. Any of these or similar situations could damage the pen tip or embed debris in it. You may not notice the damage or debris until it is too late. Damaged pen tips could scratch the display. Perform the following steps to familiarize yourself with the Tablet PC. Complete the Microsoft Tablet PC Tutorials Read the Motion Resources Page and review the User Guide Open the Motion Dashboard Go to the Microsoft Help and Resources Page for more information Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 3 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Complete the Microsoft Tablet PC Tutorials When you start your Tablet PC, several tutorials are offered to help you learn to use various features, such as the Tablet PC Input Panel (TIP) and speech recognition. The tutorials are short, quick, and informative and are an excellent place to begin a successful Tablet PC experience. NOTE: Microsoft Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 provides several tutorials. One set ap-
pears each time you start the Tablet PC (unless you deactivate this option). Others can be found by tapping the Using Your Motion Tablet icon on your desktop. If you are new to the Tablet PC world, taking the tutorials is a great way to get started and learn quickly. Review Using Your Motion Tablet and User Guide Tap the shortcut Using Your Motion Tablet icon on your desktop to open the Using Your Motion Tablet page. Instructions for using the pen, the Motion Dashboard, and links to other applications, are included. Also, you can tap the Motion User Guide icon on your desktop to open the online Motion Tablet PC User Guide at any time. Open the Motion Dashboard The Motion Dashboard is an exclusive Motion Computing application that you can use to access programs and functions as well as configure your Tablet PC. To open the Motion Dashboard, press the Dashboard (Hot Key #1) button on the Tablet PC front panel or select Start > All Programs > Motion Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 4 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Resources > Motion Dashboard. (Refer to Tablet PC Buttons, Connectors, and Indicators on page 9 for a description of the Tablet PC buttons and indicators). The Motion Dashboard can be used to monitor and set some of the most commonly used control panel items for the Tablet PC. For more information, refer to Motion Dashboard on page 15. Visit the Microsoft Help and Support Center You can find additional information about your Tablet PC and the Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 operating system in the Microsoft Help and Support Center. Access help by selecting Start > Help and Support. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 5 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC HARDWARE OVERVIEW Whenever you open the Help and Support Center while your Tablet PC is connected to the Internet, the "Did You Know" section checks for updates from Microsoft and Motion Computing, such as system-use hints, or notices from Motion Computing about your Tablet PC. If this is your first experience with the Windows XP operating system, taking the Microsoft tour is a good way to get started. Select Start > Help and Support > Whats new in Windows XP > Taking a tour or tutorial. Tablet PC Display The Motion Tablet PC includes a 12.1-inch display with wide viewing angles. The Tablet PC standard display incorporates the following features:
A highly-readable, liquid-crystal display (LCD) A protective layer that offers a firm writing surface and minimizes glare A digitizer panel underlying the display that enables handwritten entry with a specially-designed Motion Digitizer Pen and the TIP A wide viewing angle display that provides bright, clear viewing at up to 180 degrees, plus a high contrast ratio, fast response time, and authen-
tic color at any angle A digitizer that responds to the Motion Digitizer Pen, but not to a plastic stylus or to finger touches A display surface that lets you touch or rest your hand on it without affecting open programs or data input NOTE: For information about display care, see Chapter 3 of this User Guide. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 6 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Tablet PC View AnywhereTM Display Option. The View Anywhere display option was designed to enhance indoor viewing and to improve outdoor viewing while retaining all the standard display features. The bright 12.1-
inch XGA TFT display was developed from a proprietary optical enhancement process based on technology initially developed for high-end military aviation and marine applications. The View Anywhere display includes all the features of the standard display plus the following components:
A protective layer that improves the sunlight contrast ratio and signifi-
cantly reduces reflection and glare Improved sunlight contrast ratio, which enhances viewability at wide viewing angles even further than the standard display Enhanced optical display technology with a significant reduction in unwanted reflection and glare and improved light pass-through effi-
ciency Fingerprint Reader The fingerprint reader lets you scan your fingerprint and associate it with passwords. This feature offers a quick and convenient way to log on to your Tablet PC, provides global password management, and protects your Tablet PC data from unauthorized access. The fingerprint reader also serves as a scrolling device; you can move your finger vertically (from top to bottom) to scroll the cursor within the active application window. Motion AC Adapter The Motion AC Adapter has three components:
AC power adapter Power cord AC mini-plug with folding prongs that can be used instead of the long cord when traveling CAUTION: Use the Motion AC Adapter with your Mo-
tion Tablet PC. This adapter should not be used to power any other electronic devices. If you do so, you may damage the accessory or the other device. Motion Battery Pack Each Motion Tablet PC ships with a Lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery mounted and latched at the top edge of the Tablet PC. Extra batteries are available from Motion Computing. An optional Extended Battery is available that provides additional hours of continuous operation. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 7 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC WARNING: To avoid personal injury, handle the bat-
tery with care. Do not open, puncture, short, or expose it to fire or water. Keep the battery in an ambient tem-
perature of less than +104F (+40C); for example, do not leave it in a closed car in hot weather for an ex-
tended time. For additional safety information, see the Safety and Regulatory Guide packaged with your Tablet PC. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 8 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC TABLET PC BUTTONS, CONNECTORS, AND INDICATORS The following shows the buttons, connectors, and other components on the Tablet PC. While there are no controls on the back side of the Tablet PC, there is a sliding panel that covers the Extended Battery connector. This panel must be open before connecting the optional Extended Battery. The connector panel should be closed when not being used. Tablet PC LEDs, Buttons, Connectors, and Other Components Wireless On/Off Pen bay Power LED Battery LED Hard drive LED Wireless LED Escape button Function button Five-way directional control button Dashboard (Hot Key
#1) or Windows Journal (with Function) Alternately turns wireless on and off; makes it easy to disable wireless on airplanes (button must be pressed and held for 1/2 second to take affect) Storage area for the Motion digitizer pen; located at upper right edge. A pen tether attachment point is located directly above the pen bay. Displays power status; lights blue when power is on, blinks blue on low battery Displays battery status; lights amber when battery is charging; blinks blue when in stand by state Displays hard disk drive (HDD) activity - blinks blue Displays wireless 802.11 and Bluetooth activity; white for 802.11, blue for Bluetooth Primary function: Escape; secondary function: Alt+Tab Press this button then another to activate Secondary button functions Primary functions: Scrolls Up/Down/Right/Left + Enter Secondary functions: Left arrowShift+Tab; Right arrowTab; Up arrowPage Up; Down arrowPage Down Primary function: Opens the Motion Dashboard; programmable Secondary function: Opens the Windows Journal application Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 9 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Rotate Display (Hot Key #2)/TIP (Tablet PC input panel) SAS button Microphones PC card slot SD card Slot Infrared (IrDA) transceiver Power switch DVI-D connector AC power port RJ-45/LAN VGA connector Docking connector USB ports (2) Primary function: Changes the Tablet PC display orientation; programmable Secondary function: Opens the Tablet PC Input Panel Primary function: Ctrl-Alt-Del; Secondary function: None Work at a natural distance; disabled when an external microphone is plugged in Holds one Type-II PC Card for memory expansion, Smart Card Holds one SD-type card, for memory expansion (SDIO compatible) An infrared transceiver built into the Tablet PC. Allows communication with other devices compliant with the IrDA standard. Effective range is approximately 3 feet Turns the Tablet PC on and off; can be configured to activate Hibernate or Stand By mode A digital video interface digital connector for attachment to a digital video interface monitor. An optional DVI-D cable is available from Motion Computing. To use a digital video interface monitor you must use this cable with your Tablet PC. AC point of connection for the AC adapter Standard RJ-45 connector for a 10/100/1000 Mbps network A standard DB-15 monitor connector for an external monitor, projector, or other VGA device Connects the Tablet PC with the Motion FlexDock for the LE series (not pictured in the illustration) Universal Serial Bus; a port for connecting USB 2.0 devices, such as a storage device, mouse, printer, digital camera, or optical disk drives Audio input/output (2) Microphone and headset plug; 3.5 mm plug Speakers (2) Integrated speakers that are muted when you connect a headset or external speakers Swipe-type sensor for scanning fingerprints; used for password management and security; also serves as a scroll device in active application window Fingerprint reader Ambient Light Sensor Measures the background light and automatically balances display brightness Active cooling system vent, dissipates heat from the Tablet PC (side and back) Air vent
(not pictured in the illustration) An external battery connector is included on the backside of the Tablet PC. It is located under a sliding panel in the upper center of the chassis. The sliding panel must be opened before attempting to attach the Extended Battery. External battery connector Front Panel Buttons The front panel of the Motion Tablet PC contains six buttons. Most of these buttons have both primary and secondary functions. In addition, some may be re-programmed for other functions. The SAS (security) button is located at the top left corner of the Tablet PC. Front Panel LEDs The Tablet PC front panel (shown in the illustration) contains status LEDs for the following:
Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 10 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Power On and Off Battery Hard Disk Drive Wireless The front panel LEDs are described in the following table. Power Battery Hard Disk Drive Wireless (white is 802.11, blue is Bluetooth) LED Power/Stand By Battery Status Hard Disk Drive Wireless Activity Front Panel Status LEDs Status Description Tablet PC is on Steady blue Flashing blue Tablet PC is in Stand By See Front Panel Battery Status LED below Flashing/On Off Independently flashing white and blue Off Some HDD activity No HDD activity Wireless is on:
White=802.11 Blue=Bluetooth Wireless is off Battery Status LEDs Your Motion Tablet PC is equipped with a smart battery that provides information about its power status. CAUTION: To avoid personal injury, or the risk of fire or explosion if the battery is overheated, wait until the battery cools to room temperature before recharging or replacing it. NOTE: If the unit is operating on battery power, you can move the pen over the Power/Battery icon
(shown here and found in the system tray at the Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 11 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC lower-right corner of the Tablet PC display) to see the number of hours of battery life and the percentage of battery charge remaining. Battery LED Steady blue Power Amber Front Panel Battery Status LED Battery Status Action Battery charged
(AC plugged in) Battery charging (AC plugged in) None None Battery Hard Disk Drive Wireless NOTE: When the remaining battery charge is 10%, your Tablet PC issues a Low Battery alarm message in addition to the LED warning. For information about modifying this alarm (you can set it to display a message or to produce an audible warning), refer to Configuring Your Power Management Settings on page 31. The Tablet PC issues a Fast-flashing amber Critical Battery alarm and
(lasts only a few automatically goes into seconds) Hibernate mode. 3% battery charge remaining
(AC unplugged) Slow-flashing amber The battery is too hot to charge Move the Tablet PC/ battery to a cooler environment until the temperature is closer to normal. NOTE: Hibernate mode attempts to save data in any open programs to your hard disk drive. When you restart the Tablet PC, it should return to the same system status as before hibernation. Off Tablet PC is unplugged from AC power and the system is running on battery power. Plug the Tablet PC into AC power if you want to preserve battery power. Refer to Power Management on page 31 for more information about your battery and power settings. PORTS, SLOTS AND CONNECTORS The Motion Tablet PC contains a number of ports and connectors that you can use to attach to input/output and networking devices. The following illustration shows the ports, slots, and connectors that are on the left side of the LE1600 Tablet PC. Wireless On/Off Audio In/Out VGA Lock Slot Power USB Connectors DVI-D LAN Connector Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 12 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC USB Connectors. Two USB connectors are included. These can be used to connect any USB device to the Tablet PC. Audio In/Out Connectors. The connectors are marked for microphone input and speaker output connections. DVI-D Connector. The Digital Video Interface(DVI-D) connector can be used to attach a third-party Digital Video Interface enabled monitor to the Tablet PC. An optional DVI-D cable is offered by Motion Computing for this purpose. Refer to Mirroring or Extending Your Display on page 28 about how to set up video that is displayed on an attached external display/
monitor. VGA Connector. The VGA connector can be used to attach a third-party VGA capable display/monitor to the Tablet PC. Motion Computing does not provide a VGA cable; refer to the information that came with your display for the type of cable to use. LAN Connector. This is a Gigabit Ethernet LAN (RJ-45) connector that can be used to connect to a network, cable modem, or xDSL; it contains two status LEDs. The following illustration shows the ports, slots, and connectors that are on the right side of the LE1600 Tablet PC. AC Power SD Card Slot Pen Bay Pen Tether PC Card Slot IrDA Transceiver Air Vent The right side of the Tablet PC contains:
AC Power port SD Card slot for expanded accessory options (SDIO compatible) PCMCIA card slot for third-party type-II PC cards Infrared (IrDA) transceiver for short distance network connections with another IrDA compliant device Pen Bay for the Motion Digitizer Pen Pen Tether post for attaching the Motion Digitizer Pen The following illustration shows the connectors and attachment points on the bottom edge of the Tablet PC. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 13 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC FlexDock Connector Convertible Keyboard/FlexDock Attachment Motion Accessory Port SOFTWARE OVERVIEW FlexDock Connector. There is a FlexDock connector at the bottom edge of the Tablet PC. This connector mates with the corresponding connector on the FlexDock for the LE Series to provide the required signal connections when the Tablet PC is docked. Refer to the Installation Guide provided with the FlexDock for the LE series unit for more information. Motion Accessory Port. The Motion Accessory port is for connecting input/output devices directly to the Motion Tablet PC, or to the FlexDock for the LE Series when the Tablet PC is mated to the FlexDock. For example, this is the port for attaching the optional external DVD/CD-RW Drive to the Tablet PC - all power to the drive is provided through this port. Convertible Keyboard. There are two attachment points for mating the Tablet PC to the Motion Convertible Keyboard. When the Tablet PC is attached to the keyboard, the Tablet PC can be angled to provide a comfortable viewing angle. Your new Motion Tablet PC ships with the standard Motion software, Motion Security Center, Motion Dashboard, and Motion CDs. In addition, it contains the Microsoft Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 Operating System with a Tablet PC Input Panel (TIP) that includes enhanced ink-to-
text experience and word recognition, and an improved security infrastructure that helps defend against viruses, worms, and hackers. All the software options you ordered have been pre-loaded on your Tablet PC. Software installation files are in the directory c:\windows\motion. Using Your Motion Tablet When you start your Tablet PC and go to Start > Using Your Motion Tablet, you will find pages that describe software applications and utilities to help you personalize and make the most of your system. These pages are opened by your default internet browser. Most of the links on those pages do not require an internet connection; however, you may need an active internet connection to access some of the information. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 14 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Motion Dashboard The Motion Dashboard puts many operations at your fingertips for convenient access and control. To open the Motion Dashboard, press the Dashboard button (Hot Key #1). NOTE: The Motion Dashboard does not include an Apply button. When you change a setting, the change occurs imme-
diately. Tapping OK on the Motion Dashboard closes the window. Also, if you disable your wireless connection from the Motion Dashboard, it may still appear to be working for a short time. The wireless/Bluetooth LED may continue to blink for a few seconds. This is a timing delay; the connection will end short-
ly. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 15 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Feature Display Brightness Motion Dashboard Features Description The built-in Ambient Light Sensor (ALS) detects light in the environment and automatically adjusts the display brightness. Available settings:
Off Blanks the display to save power Fixed Maintains a fixed brightness level on the display that remains constant under varying light conditions Dynamic Uses ALS to maintain a relative brightness level on the display in varying light conditions NOTE: For optimal battery life benefits and view-
ability from ALS, set the brightness scale to the mid-point or slightly above. If the setting is higher than this, you lose some of the battery-saving benefits while gaining minimal improvement in viewability. External Monitor The Tablet PC has a dual-head video controller that can mirror the Tablet PC display or extend it to a second monitor or external device, such as a data projector. This feature is disabled by default. Audio -
Speaker Volume Available settings:
Mirror Display Clones or duplicates the Tablet PC display on another monitor or projector Extend Display Enlarges the overall desktop work space to include both the external monitor and the Tablet PC display Disable Disables the External Monitor feature Available settings:
Mute the speaker sound; sliding the scale changes the speaker volume Multimedia Optimized Best equalization setting for sound reproduction from the Tablet PC for a CD player, DVD, or sound recorder Voice Optimized Best setting for voice reproduction from External Speakers Best setting for external speakers or the Tablet PC speakers headphones Properties Access advanced operating system controls to configure your audio experience. Tap Volume Control >
Options > Properties to set Playback and Recording for a selected device. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 16 Audio -
Microphones Pen and Digitizer Wireless Power Management Motion Security Center Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Available settings:
Mute Sliding scale changes microphone volume Narrow Angle Best setting for dictation, Voice over IP
(VoIP), or voice noisy environments Medium Angle Best setting for small group, conference table, or voice quiet environments; the microphone detects sounds from a larger area Wide Angle Best setting for an open meeting room Calibrate Trains the microphones to focus on sounds from a particular location or angle Available Options:
Calibrates the pen to the display Pen and Button Options Changes Tablet PC, pen, and but-
ton properties, such as hot-key assignments, right/left handed-
ness, or the right-click function; enable the eraser for applications that support an eraser. Available Settings:
Enables/disables the 802.11 (Wi-Fi) and/or Bluetooth wireless radio Disables either or both wireless devices at Tablet PC start up
(useful in environments where policy prohibits wireless opera-
tions) The physical wireless button (not on the Motion Dashboard) is intended for situations where you want to shut wireless down quickly and reliably. Lets you set power schemes and power button options; also displays remaining battery power. You can select from an extensive list of power schemes or you can create custom power schemes to fit your environment. Opens the Motion Security Center where you can do the following:
Access Motion OmniPass; refer to Motion OmniPass and Fin-
gerprint Reader on page 38 Review or modify Trusted Platform Module settings; refer to Infineon Trusted Platform Module on page 47 Open the Microsoft Security Center to review or modify Win-
dows security settings; refer to Using Windows Security on page 48 Stand By Help Puts the Tablet PC in a low-power Stand By state for a temporary suspension from which you can quickly resume a Windows session. Displays Motion Dashboard Help application Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 17 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Motion Security Center The Motion Security Center consolidates the tablet security applications into one single security management dashboard. It provides the ability to manage the security applications and settings from a single point. You can also find quick links for help with various security-related tasks. Motion Security Center provides access to the Motion OmniPass, Infineon TPM, and Microsoft Security Center applications. Motion Third-Party Software Solutions Visit the Motion website at www.motioncomputing.com/products and select Software. You will find links to software solutions to purchase as well as free downloads from Motion software and service partners. All Motion Tablet PCs come packaged with CDs for the repair and recovery of the operating system and utilities and drivers. Separate application CDs, including the Motion Pak and Microsoft Office Pak software, are optional at the time of purchase. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 18 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC This chapter is divided into the following sections:
Pen and Ink on page 19 Audio and Video on page 26 Power Management on page 31 Security Features and Settings on page 37 Speech on page 51 Ports, Slots and Connectors on page 56 Wireless Networking on page 57 Configuring Buttons on page 67 Each of these sections includes a brief introduction to the topic, and information on how to access and use the feature or function. Other than a brief introduction to these topics in Chapter 1; all other information regarding the topic, including set up, operating procedures, and helpful hints, is in this chapter. A significant difference between using a standard personal computer or a laptop and your Tablet PC is the use of pen and ink in software applications. Some software applications are designed specifically for pen and ink while others may be ink enabled to improve their suitability with ink input. Be aware that you need to turn on the ink in Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel to be able to write over what is being displayed. You can also use the TIP to enter text directly. Configuring Tablet and Pen Settings The Tablet and Pen Settings window is accessed by tapping the Pen and Button Options button in the Pen and Digitizer area of the Motion Dashboard. Refer to Tablet PC Buttons, Connectors, and Indicators on page 9 for a description of the Tablet PC buttons and their default behavior. You can make selections to set up the following from the various sub-
windows of the Tablet and Pen Settings window:
Settings Tab Select right-handed or left-handed to improve handwriting recognition Set the menu location for right-handed or left-handed display Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 19 PEN AND INK Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Set the calibration for each orientation Change the rotation sequence Set the display screen brightness Display Tab Select and preview the primary screen orientation Change the rotation sequence Set the screen brightness for each power setting Tablet Buttons Tab Set up the front panel buttons Set same for all orientations, or Set different for each orientation Pen Options Tab Set up the pen and equivalent mouse actions Set up the pen buttons and enable the eraser (application dependent) Click on each tab and practice setting different options. The default settings may be perfect for your work situation, but if not, the Tablet and Pen Settings window lets you set up your Tablet PC according to your unique needs. The following illustration is a sample Tablet and Pen Settings window - this window includes a checkbox to enable the eraser - if your eraser is not functioning properly, make sure this box is checked. Also, availability of the eraser is application dependent; not all software applications allow the top of the pen to be used as an eraser. Refer to the Microsoft Help application for more information about these features (tap the HELP button). Calibrating and Using Your Digital Pen Be sure to calibrate your pen in both portrait and landscape orientations the first time you start your Tablet PC, then again at other times if the cursor does not seem to line up with the pen tip. Calibration ensures the accuracy Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 20 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC of the pen and adjusts the input angle for each person who uses it. The Tablet PC stores calibration data and settings on a per-user basis. 1. Open the Motion Dashboard and tap Calibrate Digitizer. Or double-tap the Tablet and Pen Settings icon in the system tray, located in the lower right-hand corner of the display window. This opens the Tablet and Pen Settings window. NOTE: This icon may be hidden in the system tray. Tap the system tray left-arrow to open all hidden icons. 2. Hold the pen naturally, angled as if you are writing with a pen, and tap the pen point in the center of each of the four calibration crosshairs as they appear. During calibration, try to position the Tablet PC as close to the way you will use it as possible, whether holding it in portrait or landscape orientation or using it in a FlexDock for the LE Series or with a Convertible Keyboard. Changing the pen or display angles affects the calibration. 3. If you change the orientation, you may need to calibrate the pen again. When using the pen as a cursor, you can determine if you are in the right place to select a menu item. For example, look at the position of the pointer on the screen, not where the pen touches the display. CAUTION: Do not write on the Tablet PC display with ink pens or other sharp objects that could dam-
age it. Do not use markers that could also damage the display. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 21 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Refer to the following to compare mouse and pen actions:
Mouse versus Pen Actions With a Mouse With the Digitizer Pen Point and click Point and tap the pen on the display. Double-click Double-tap the pen on the display. Click-and-drag Tap-and-drag the pen on the display. Right-click Press the pen button while tapping, or press and hold the pen on the display. Deactivating Pen Button to End Accidental Right-Clicks. If you find that you accidentally press the pen button when you write, you may want to deactivate this option. (You will still be able to open right-click menus by pressing and holding the pen against the display surface.) Using the Tablet PC Input Panel The Tablet PC Input Panel (TIP) is the primary tool for entering text and provides several text correction and control options. The TIP also includes buttons for activating speech recognition and voice command capabilities. It is opened by tapping the TIP icon in the Windows task bar. In some applications, a small TIP icon floats nearby. As you move your pen close to the display; tap that icon to open the TIP. TIP icon: Tap the icon to open the Tablet PC Input panel (TIP). Using the TIP. The following example shows how the TIP icon appears in a Save As window; you can tap the icon to open the TIP panel to use handwriting or the On Screen Keyboard to enter the name of the New Folder. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 22 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC When you tap this icon, the Writing Pad opens. As you write, the recognition software interprets the writing and displays a text equivalent below the line. You can change from the Writing Pad to a Character Writing Pad or On Screen Keyboard at any time by tapping the appropriate icon on the left side of the TIP panel. On the right side of the TIP panel there are icons for Tools and Options and for TIP Help. Tap the Tools and Options (small gear) icon to access the following selections:
Tools and Options icon Speech - If this is the first time you selected Speech, a Speech Recog-
nition Enrollment window is shown. You must adjust the microphones
(using the Motion Dashboard) and train for your voice before speech recognition is functional. This can take several minutes. After training, tapping Speech shows that Dictation and Command icons have been added to the TIP panel. Tapping either Dictation or Command opens a voice input window. For more information about Speech, refer to Motion Speak Anywhere Technology on page 51. Dock at Top of Screen. Moves and locks the TIP at the top of the screen. Dock at Bottom of Screen. Moves and locks the TIP at the bottom of the screen. Undock. Closes the TIP if shown; allows it to float undocked the next time it is opened. Options. Opens the Options window, where you can change many of the finer aspects of the pen and its usage in the TIP. There is also a link to Help that is specifically for the Tablet PC TIP. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 23 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Using the Writing Pad. As you write, the software selects the best match for a word from its dictionary of words and displays it on screen. Tap on a word to select it. In the following example, either handwrite directly over the incorrect character or tap the character to open a list of alternatives (as shown here:
O, 0, a, 6). You can erase a word you have just written, by rapidly scratching back and forth over it. The Writing Pad expands to show Numbers (Num) or Symbols (Sym) toolbars, whose symbols are inserted immediately in the text entry area as you select them. Then, when you begin to handwrite on the Writing Pad, the Num or Sym toolbar closes. Using the Character Writing Pad. Use the Character Writing Pad for acronyms, equations, or other entries that require individual letters, numbers, or symbols that the writing pad may interpret incorrectly. Some examples include the following: ~<!<@<#<$<%<^ and*()_+<>{}[] \ /. Symbols/letters are displayed in a text equivalent that you can individually correct by:
Handwriting over the text equivalent in each character space Clicking on the arrow under the letter and selecting an alternative from the drop-down menu Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 24 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC The writing pad expands vertically when you get near the end of the panel. Using the On Screen Keyboard. You can use the On Screen Keyboard to type words, letters, numbers, and characters from keyboard using your pen. For improved security and accuracy, you may want to enter passwords with the On Screen Keyboard instead of handwritten text. NOTE: When using the On Screen Keyboard, be sure to place your cursor where you want to enter text in the text entry box before you tap Insert. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 25 AUDIO AND VIDEO Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Helpful Hints: Using the TIP Window Move the TIP panel on your desktop using the bar on the right - only available when the TIP panel is not docked/locked at the top or bottom of the screen. When it is docked at the top or bot-
tom, it cannot be moved. Customizing Select Tools and Options (the gear icon) then Options... from the TIP window to open the Options window at the General tab. You can customize many features in the TIP. Select one or more of the tabs and set the desired options. Refer to the Help and the Tutorials that are provided as part of the Windows Operating System. Or refer to the Help information that is provided in the Options window. In some applications, you may need to double tap to enable pen and ink functions. The Audio and Video controls are in the Motion Dashboard in the Audio and Display sections. You will find additional information regarding audio settings and acceptance angles in the Speech section of this chapter, refer to Speech on page 51. Motion Dashboard Audio System Controls The Motion Dashboard contains volume and directional controls for both speech recognition and recording functions. You should perform this procedure before you train your Tablet PC for speech recognition or voice commands. Speaker Volume. While the noise suppression software removes most background noise, in some cases speaker playback (such as background music or intermittent audio messages) can affect recording. In general, reducing speaker volume will eliminate these extraneous noises. Microphone Volume. The default volume setting for the microphones is at roughly two-thirds of the sliding scale. When recording, dictating, or using voice commands, you may need to adjust this setting until you achieve the desired results. Adjusting Display Settings and Screen Brightness The Display settings on the Motion Dashboard are used to set the brightness level of the LCD display. These settings are used in conjunction with the Ambient Light Sensor (ALS) to maintain a level of brightness and contrast in all lighting conditions. The built-in light sensor located on the Tablet PC front panel measures the ambient light in the environment. The system then automatically balances the brightness of the Tablet PC display in relation to the surroundings. You Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 26 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC can set brightness modes from the Motion Dashboard (note: you can also turn the display off). Fixed Sets the display brightness to a fixed level (ALS is off); use the slider to adjust the display to the desired brightness level Dynamic Sets the display so that the system adjusts the brightness to the preferred level under changing lighting conditions while maintaining viewability (ALS is on) Setting Dynamic Display Brightness: ALS On. When you turn on the ALS, the display will automatically brighten if you move from dim to bright light (within the range supported by the hardware), or automatically dim if you move to an environment with a lower level of lighting. You may not be able to visibly detect the adjustment. Using ALS also helps to reduce power consumption when possible. 1. Open the Motion Dashboard. 2. Under Display, tap the radio button beside Dynamic. 3. Move the slider until the Tablet PC display is at the preferred brightness level. The system will then auto-
matically adjust the display brightness to changes in lighting. Move slider to preferred brightness level. Setting Fixed Display Brightness: ALS Off. 1. Open the Motion Dashboard. 2. Under Display, tap the radio button beside Fixed. 3. Move the slider until the brightness is at the desired level. The system will keep the same brightness level at all times; that is, it will not adjust the display brightness to changes in lighting. NOTE: In low-light settings, the Fixed brightness setting may keep the display brighter than is needed for good view-
ability. Keeping the brightness always at the same level may also use more battery power than necessary. Turning the Display On and Off. 1. Open the Motion Dashboard. 2. Tap Off in the Brightness area of the Display settings. NOTE: To turn the display back on, wave your pen over the display or press any key on the keyboard. When the display comes on, the Fixed/Dynamic setting remains selected as it was. Changing Display Orientation. An interesting and useful feature of the Tablet PC is the ability to change the screen orientation from landscape to portrait by pressing a button. Also, you can rotate the screen in 90-degree increments. The Tablet PC flexibility in changing the screen orientation allows you to set the view to suit your purpose. You may be using an Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 27 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC application where it is more advantageous to have a portrait (vertical) view of the screen. You may be filling out a form that is longer than the standard screen view. At other times you may want to view a wider than normal page;
in this instance you would use landscape view. The Tablet PC provides several ways to change the display orientation quickly:
The quickest way to rotate the screen is to press the Rotate button (Hot Key #2). Be aware that changing the screen orientation may require you to recalibrate the pen; refer to Calibrating and Using Your Digital Pen on page 20. Use the pull-down menu to see the other orientation settings. You can also change the sequence for rotating from one orientation to another. Mirroring or Extending Your Display. The Tablet PC has a Dual Head Video Controller that lets you run a presentation from your Tablet PC on an external monitor or data projector while taking notes in ink. You can also move applications onto a second monitor to create additional work space. How To Connect the Tablet PC and a Monitor or Projector Example. 1. Plug the VGA monitor cable into the VGA port on the Tablet PC or Motion FlexDock for the LE Series. 2. Connect the external monitor or data projector to a power outlet and turn it on. The software recognizes the external monitor or data pro-
jector and searches for a driver. 3. If necessary, install the driver from the CD supplied by the monitors 4. Set up the mirrored desktop or external display, using the steps in manufacturer. the following sections. IMPORTANT: Be sure to drag any application window back to the Tablet PC display before shutting down the external data projector or monitor. Otherwise, you cannot access the appli-
cation(s) to shut it down. If you do leave an application open on the extended display, you can disable it from the Windows Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 28 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Control Panel Display Properties or from the Motion Dashboard. Setting Up a Mirrored Display. Use this feature to connect an external projector for presentations or an extra display on your desk. This example shows a Word document (1) displayed (mirrored) on both the Tablet PC (2) and an external monitor (3). Mirrored Display Example: (1) Word document; (2) Tablet PC display; (3) external monitor NOTE: The resolution and orientation of the external monitor will be the same as the Tablet PC display. To Mirror the Tablet PC Display, Do the Following:
1. Open the Motion Dashboard. 2. Select the Mirror Display radio button under External Monitor. This setting automatically creates an identical display on the exter-
nal monitor. NOTE: You can also tap the icon for the Intel Graphics Media Accelerator Driver for Mobile, in the system tray at the bottom right of the Tablet PC display (or found in the Windows Control Panel) to set up this feature from the Graphics Media pop-up menu. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 29 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Setting Up an Extended Display. Use this feature when you want to simultaneously open applications on two monitors and significantly expand your workspace without hiding open documents under layers of other work. This example shows the Tablet PC (1) and an external monitor (2) with an Excel spreadsheet extended across both. It also shows a Word document
(4) on the Tablet PC and e-mail (5) on the extended desktop. Extended Desktop Example: (1) Tablet PC display; (2) external monitor; (3) spreadsheet; (4) Word document; (5) email message To Extend the Tablet PC Display, do the following:
1. Open the Motion Dashboard. 2. Tap the Extend Display radio button under External Monitor. This setting automatically extends the Tablet PC display to the external monitor. NOTE: You can also tap the icon for the Intel Graphics Media Accelerator Driver for Mobile in the system tray at the bottom right of the Tablet PC display (or found in the Windows Control Panel as Intel GMA Driver for Mobile) to set up this feature from the pop-up menu, or tabbed window respectively. Creating Schemes for External Monitors To create a special screen resolution scheme. This feature can be used to create named schemes for one or more external monitors. After creating and saving the scheme, you can access it by right-clicking on the operating system desktop and selecting the scheme name from the pop-up menu that is shown. 1. Tap the Intel Graphics Media Accelerator Driver for Mobile icon in the system tray, located at the bottom-right corner of the display;
then select Graphics Options > Graphics Properties. 2. This example illustrates the Mobile Intel 915GM/GMS, 910GML Express Chipset Family window. From that window, select the Schemes tab. The current Video Mode is displayed. (The default mode is 1024 x 768 True Color (60 Hz). 3. Select the desired video mode for the new scheme 4. Tap the New... button in this window. 5. Type in a name for the new scheme. Tap OK to save the scheme. 6. Highlight this new scheme in the Schemes window. 7. Add or change the parameters for this scheme. 8. Tap Save. Right-click on the desktop, select Display Mode and the new scheme name will be displayed. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 30 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Helpful Hints: Mirrored and Extended Modes Use a mouse pointing device and keyboard to operate in these modes. The pen does not work in the external monitor space of the extended mode. Refer to Mobile Intel Help for more information about creating schemes for external monitors. POWER MANAGEMENT The Tablet PC provides access to a comprehensive suite of power management functions by using the buttons and controls on the Motion Dashboard. Configuring Your Power Management Settings The following power-related settings can be accessed, monitored or controlled from the Motion Dashboard. Power schemes Alarms for low and critical battery Power meter readings for up to two batteries Advanced power settings Hibernation settings Tapping the Properties button in the Power area of the Motion Dashboard opens the Power Options Properties window. Each of the power options is represented by a tab in this window. Tapping one of the tabs shows the various properties for that aspect of the Tablet PC power management feature. The following example shows the window open at the Power Schemes tab; it illustrates the various power schemes properties that can be set for the Tablet PC. The remaining option properties windows are described, but illustrations to show the various options are not included in this User Guide. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 31 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Power Schemes. Tap the Power Schemes tab to show the Power Schemes window. You can select from a set of pre-defined power schemes that apply to a wide variety of home and work environments. Try it yourself by selecting one of the options from the pull-down menu and seeing how your choice affects the power settings. This operation also gives you the flexibility to define your own scheme and keep the same name or rename it to something that makes more sense to you. Alarms. The Alarms tab shows the Alarms window. This option lets you specify the point at which battery alarms are activated for both the low and critically low battery level states. You also define the action that the Tablet PC should take when that battery level is reached. For example, you may choose to have the Tablet PC sound an alarm, or you may prefer to receive a text message. Power Meter. The Power Meter tab shows the Power Meter window and shows a visual indication of the Battery Status for battery #1 and #2 (if present and attached to the Tablet PC). The icon shows the remaining battery level and the text shows the percentage remaining. You can click on a battery icon to open a detailed information window for that battery. Advanced. The Advanced tab shows the Advanced window where you specify the power settings options that you want to use. You can also specify what you want the Tablet PC to do when you press the Power switch. Your choices include everything from doing nothing, going into standby mode, to hibernation, or to performing a shut down of your computer. Hibernate. The Hibernate tab opens the HIbernate window where you enable or disable hibernation by using the Hibernation checkbox. This window also shows information about the hard drive space on your computer and details the amount of hard disk drive space required for safe Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 32 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC hibernation. Selecting Hibernate has the following advantages over placing your Tablet PC in the Stand By state:
Hibernate saves the state of the desktop and applications Hibernate consumes no battery power When you return from the Hibernate state, you return to where you were when you entered hibernation. Checking Your Battery Power Level. There are several ways to see how much battery power is left on your Tablet PC. You can determine the remaining battery power by doing any of the following:
Reading Battery Power from the Tablet PC Display To check the power level while you are on battery power, move the pen over the Power Meter icon, shown here, in the system tray at the bottom-right corner of the Tablet PC display. This displays the number of hours of battery power and the percentage of battery power left. (Also, the blue area on the battery icon gets smaller as the battery discharges.) Reading Battery Power from the Battery Gauge (requires battery removal) Ensure that AC power is plugged into the Tablet PC, or that the Tablet PC is turned off. Turn the system over so that you are looking at the back and remove the battery from the top of the tablet. The gauge is mounted on the backside of the standard battery. Press the button and look at the LEDs. Each LED represents approximately 20% of the total available charge. (If the optional Extended Battery is attached, the battery gauge is located on the backside of the Extended Battery and can be checked without removal.). Spring-Loaded Latch Locking Latch Slide latches toward center to open Extended Battery Connector Under Sliding Panel (must be open to install Extended Battery) Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 33 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Caution: When you replace the standard battery, make sure that the locking latch is in the correct position, moved fully to the right to lock the battery in place, and that the battery is firmly installed. Reading Battery Power from Motion Dashboard The Motion Dashboard also has a battery power gauge that displays the percent of remaining battery charge. If a Standard Battery and a Extended Battery are both attached, the power reading is the cumulative amount of both batteries. Reading Battery Power from the Power Meter Right-click on the Power Meter icon in the system tray, located in the lower right-hand corner of the display window (only visible if you are running on the battery). To see remaining power, tap Power Meter; or tap Adjust Power Properties > Power Meter tab. From the Windows Control Panel (in Classic view), double-click Power Options. Or (in Category View), tap Performance and Maintenance, then tap Power Options. Using Your Batteries This section describes how to use your Tablet PC battery. The Standard Battery is located at the top of the Tablet PC. There is an optional Extended Battery that can be attached to the back of the Tablet PC. The upper center area of the back of the system includes a small sliding panel that covers the terminal connections for the Extended Battery. Caution: Ensure that the sliding panel is open before attempting to attach the Extended Battery. Otherwise, there may be damage to the Extended Battery connector. Both batteries are designed to be re-charged by using the AC adapter when attached to the Tablet PC. Charging the Battery. When you connect the Tablet PC to AC power with a battery attached, the system automatically charges the battery until it reaches full charge. If two batteries are attached, the primary battery charges first, followed by the secondary battery. The charging sequence is staggered to ensure that both batteries become fully charged at nearly the same time. The standard battery charges to the 80% level, followed by the Extended Battery charging to the 80% level. Then each battery charges for a short interval until both reach 100%. The Battery Status LED is on the Tablet PC flashes amber when the battery is at a critically low level and changes to solid amber while charging. When the battery is fully charged, the Battery Status LED is solid blue. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 34 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC WARNING: To avoid injury, keep the battery within the recommended temperature range when charg-
ing it. Wait until it cools to room temperature before recharging it in the Tablet PC or the battery charger. For more information, see the Safety and Regulatory Guide shipped with your Tablet PC or the documen-
tation that came with the battery charger. Or go to www.motioncomputing.com/support to view these documents. To charge the battery:
1. Plug the AC adapter into the Tablet PC, then into a wall outlet or power strip. (Completely recharging the battery may take up to two hours, although the battery reaches an 80% charge in much less time.) Swapping the Battery. You can swap the Standard Battery while the system is powered on, with or without having the Tablet PC plugged into an AC power outlet. 1. If the Tablet PC is running, open the Motion Dashboard and tap Stand By. The Tablet PC immediately goes into the Stand By state. 2. Alternatively, go to Start > Turn Off Computer. 3. Do one of the following:
If you are logged on to a domain: When the Turn Off Computer window appears, tap Stand By or Hibernate from the drop-down list. If you are not logged on to a domain: Press the Shift key on your external keyboard or tap Shift on the TIP On Screen Keyboard to change the option from Stand By to Hibernate. NOTE: Here are some key differences between putting the Tablet PC in Stand By or Hibernate mode to swap the battery:
If you choose Stand By, the Tablet PC is designed to maintain your system for up to 30 seconds while you swap the battery. However, you may have less than 30 seconds if you are running a number of programs that drain power faster. You should save any data before putting the system in Stand By to swap the battery. Choosing Hibernate gives you more time to swap the battery. Hibernate saves the status of the Tablet PC to your hard drive. 4. Tap Hibernate or Stand By. The Tablet PC opens a dialog box stating that it is preparing to standby or hibernate. 5. Wait until the system shuts down. In Hibernate, all LEDs are off; in Stand By, the Power LED flashes. 6. Slide the battery release latches on the back of the Tablet PC toward the center and lift the battery upward to remove it. 7. Insert the new battery until you hear the left latch click, which ensures the new battery is correctly seated. Slide the right latch fur-
Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 35 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC ther to the right to lock it in place. Check to make sure the latches are fully seated. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the Tablet PC, install only Motion Computing batteries, which are specially designed for the Tablet PC. Disposing of Used Batteries. The Tablet PC contains a Lithium-ion (Li-
ion) battery that should be disposed of at a hazardous materials recycling center when it is no longer serviceable. Do not throw it in a waste receptacle where it will be sent to a landfill. Helpful Hints: Battery and Power Management Use AC power when available to lengthen the batterys usable life. The battery will charge automatically as you run on AC power, so leave the battery in the Tablet PC while you are working. Use AC power when installing software or writing to a CD, and for opti-
mal battery life, when using a CD or DVD player. When using battery power, if you leave the Tablet PC unattended, place the system in Stand By or Hibernate. Keep in mind that the display, processor, PC Cards, SD cards, wireless cards, and accessory drives all draw on the battery, so adjust properties and disable unused accessories and PC Cards when operating on bat-
tery power. When using battery power, adjust the power mode and display bright-
ness to lower settings to prolong the battery life. Turn off all wireless devices through the Motion Dashboard when not being used. Enable the Ambient Light Sensor (ALS) through Motion Dashboard. See the section Adjusting Display Settings and Screen Brightness on page 26. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 36 SECURITY FEATURES AND SETTINGS Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Motion Computing has strongly embraced the need for enhanced platform-
based security for the Tablet PC. The result of that commitment has been to provide an out-of-box, safe computing environment that enables strong security protection and that will serve as the foundation for complementary add-on security technologies. These core security features include password-protected Phoenix TrustedCore BIOS with HDD locking and networking control, a universal security lock slot, the Motion Security Center, a built-in fingerprint reader, a Trusted Computing Group Trusted Platform Module (TPM), and a Smart Card-ready platform. The Motion Computing Tablet PC includes a comprehensive security solution that is designed to protect the hardware platform, the operating system, and any information stored on the Tablet PC from most potential outside threats. The Motion Security Center includes the following:
Motion OmniPass Infineon TPM Microsoft Security Center Motion Security Center The Motion Security Center consolidates the tablet security applications into one single security management dashboard. It provides the ability to comprehensively manage the security applications and settings from a single point. You can also find quick links for help with various security-
related tasks. Motion Security Center provides access to Motion OmniPass, Infineon TPM, and Microsoft Security Center. Click on those headings to launch the respective application. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 37 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Motion OmniPass and Fingerprint Reader The Motion OmniPass Control Center and the Fingerprint Reader are vital elements of the Motion Security Center. Using this application and the Fingerprint Reader, you can define the security and convenience features of your Tablet PC. When implemented within the security policies of your work environment, the OmniPass authentication tools add another layer of security for your passwords, files, and other logons. The OmniPass application can be opened by tapping the OmniPass icon (shown at right) in the System tray. Or, you can open the application by opening the Motion Dashboard then Motion Security Center > Motion OmniPass. The OmniPass Control Center window is shown below. There is extensive help supporting the Motion OmniPass Control Center. To get help on a specific topic, tap the Help button in the Motion OmniPass Actions panel, and use the Search or Index function. At this point you can choose from the following options:
Manage OmniPass Users and Settings to add users Change OmniPass System Settings Manage Your Passwords Protect Your Files Also, notice that there are three selection areas, an action panel and two information panels, at the left side of the window. These areas allow actions or show specific information. Action panel Log Off Current User Switch User Identity Password Information Help Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 38 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC User Information panel Shows current user information Version Detail panel Shows version and build Information Manage OmniPass Users and Settings. When you select this action you are presented with the following options:
Add a new user to OmniPass Remove a user from OmniPass Import a new user into OmniPass Export an OmniPass profile These are advanced operations and may not be part of your typical work flow. If you need more information about this aspect of the Motion OmniPass application, refer to the OmniPass Help by tapping Help in the Action panel. Other OmniPass Set Up Functions. You can also tap the Change User Settings icon; the Change User Settings window is opened where you can select from the following operations:
Audio Settings Taskbar Tips Encrypt/Decrypt Enrollment Use radio buttons to set the desired audio setting Use radio buttons to set the desired taskbar tip level Select digital certificate or select an algorithm for encryption Use the enrollment wizard to create a user account or to enroll new authentication devices (e.g., fingerprint reader, digital certificates) Manage Your Passwords Opens the User Name/Domain dialog where you enter the password and domain information to authenticate the user for access to the password vault. There you can change your password. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 39 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Protect Your Files Browse to select files to be encrypted Browse to select encrypted files to decrypt Fingerprint Reader. The built-in fingerprint reader lets you scan your fingerprint and associate it with a password. This offers a quick and convenient way to log on to your Tablet PC, provides global password management, and helps protect your Tablet PC data from unauthorized access. The illustration at the right shows the bi-directional scan of a fingerprint. You can move your selected finger from left-to-right or right-to-left. Refer to Helpful Hints: Successful Fingerprint Captures on page 41 for more information about obtaining a successful fingerprint capture. The fingerprint reader also functions as a scrolling device; you can move your finger vertically (vertical in relation to the orientation of the Tablet PC) across the scanner to scroll the Tablet PC application within the window. NOTE: The scroll function is disabled while scanning a finger-
print. Using Motion OmniPass Security and the Fingerprint Reader. The fingerprint reader built into your Motion Tablet PC lets you scan your fingerprint to log onto your Tablet PC and perform other functions such as accessing email, e-banking, paying bills online, or accessing network resources. The OmniPass software offers a secure and convenient system for managing your passwords and providing confidentiality for your sensitive data through file encryption. The procedures for setting up the fingerprint reader are divided into basic and advanced options. For a more successful experience, start with the basic set up before setting the more advanced features. Basic setup includes:
Enrolling (your username and password) Selecting a finger Capturing a fingerprint Capturing a second fingerprint Advanced OmniPass setup features include:
User management User settings System settings You can modify the OmniPass startup options You can enable Strong Logon Security to authenticate with a specific security device before showing the windows desktop Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 40 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Vault management The vault is a storage area for passwords and dialogs that you have associated with web sites and applications. Encrypting and decrypting files You can encrypt any file on your Tablet PC except for system files. Only an authenticated user can decrypt files that have been encrypted. Descriptions of these features may be found in the OmniPass Help section
(open Motion Dashboard then Motion Security Center > Motion OmniPass and tap the Help icon in that window). Helpful Hints: Successful Fingerprint Captures Be consistent. Hold your finger and scan at the same angle each time. For example, if you enroll your finger with your hand open (or closed), hold your hand this way each time you scan. If you enroll your thumb while holding the edge of the Tablet PC while scanning, you need to scan like this each time. The scanner is bi-directional; you can move your finger from right-to-left or left-to-right. Read the prompts carefully and make sure you are waiting to be prompted before each swipe. Swiping too fast or too slow can make a capture unsuccessful. Change the swipe speed until you learn what speed works best. When scanning, press hard enough to fully contact both the nickel-col-
ored ring and the sensor; you do not have to press hard. Rub your fingers together to stimulate the natural skin oils so your fin-
gerprint is easier for the sensor to detect. Conversely, wipe your finger off so nothing interferes with the scan. If you are repeatedly having trouble getting a good scan, you may need to clean the sensor. First, power down the Tablet PC and remove the battery. Then, clean the sensor using a cotton swab sprayed with a win-
dow-type cleaner (no bleach, solvents, or abrasives); then dry the sen-
sor. Do not spray, pour, or otherwise dispense any liquid directly on the sensor. If you are having trouble enrolling a specific finger, enroll a different fin-
ger. Typically, you will get the best results by scanning an index finger, thumb, middle finger, ring finger, and little finger in that order. Capturing a Fingerprint 1. Tap Motion Dashboard then Motion Security Center > Motion OmniPass > Manage OmniPass Users and Settings > Add a new user to OmniPass. This step enrolls a new user; you decide on the authentication method (e.g., fingerprint, digital certificate, TPM, etc.). 2. Type in the User Name, Domain, and the Password (if you have one set up) for this OmniPass account. (This may default to the user name you logged on with and the password associated with it.) 3. Tap Next to take you to Selecting a Finger and Practicing Finger-
print Capture. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 41 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC 4. When the Choose Finger window appears, tap the dotted area above the finger you want to enroll. A red arrow appears above the selected finger. IMPORTANT: To get a feel for finger position and swipe speed, tap Practice. Practice takes you through all the en-
rollment steps and helps you get a successful fingerprint scan. You are asked to scan the same finger three times. 5. After you have practiced, you will be asked to scan one more time for verification. After the verification is successful, tap Next to scan your finger again, this time for real (not practice). 6. Place the selected finger over the nickel-colored ring and slowly, with moderate pressure, drag your finger across the sensor from right-to-left or left-to-right. Make sure your entire fingerprint (i.e., your fingertip, not your whole finger) touches both the nickel-colored ring and the sensor surface. NOTE: If the capture is successful, you will see a green fin-
gerprint image in the capture area. If the capture is unsuc-
cessful, an information message appears, such as Scan too slow/too fast... and the green fingerprint will not appear. Swipe your finger across the sensor again as many times as required for a successful scan. 7. After the first scan is successful (and a green fingerprint image appears), OmniPass prompts you to scan your fingerprint additional times. Wait until the green fingerprint disappears from the display and the fingerprint image area is blank before swiping your finger again. After OmniPass successfully captures three fingerprints, the Verify Fingerprint window appears. Swipe your finger one more time to complete the enrollment. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 42 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC When the messages The selected finger has been enrolled in OmniPass and Verification Successful! and a green fingerprint image appear, enrollment is successful and complete. IMPORTANT: During the verification process, you may get red fingerprint images or the message Verification Failed. If this happens, tap the Back button and try again. You can have as many tries as you need for enrollment and verification. 8. Tap Next. When you are asked if you would like to enroll a second fingerprint, tap Yes. IMPORTANT: We recommend that you enroll a second finger-
print. A finger injury could prevent authentication and block access to your accounts. 9. Repeat Steps 6-8 to enroll a second fingerprint. 10. Tap Next. The Audio and Taskbar Settings window appears. You can leave the defaults or change the settings, as desired. 11. Tap Next. The Congratulations window appears. OmniPass recom-
mends that you Export (backup or make a copy of) your user pro-
file so you can restore a lost or corrupted OmniPass configuration or encryption keys. See the section Exporting Your User Profile on page 46 for more information. NOTE: You can export your profile at any time, but this may not be the best time since you are a new user and your profile has little information associated with it. You should backup your profile later and on a routine basis to protect your config-
uration and any stored passwords and encryption keys. 12. Tap Done. 13. Tap Yes to log yourself on as a new user. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 43 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Capturing a Second Fingerprint Later Capturing a second fingerprint is a good practice to follow. While it is easier to do this at the time of the initial enrollment, it is possible to capture a sec-
ond fingerprint later. To do so, open the Motion Dashboard, then tap the following: Motion Security Center > Motion OmniPass > Manage OmniPass Users and Settings > Change User Settings > Enroll Authentication Devices (e.g. enroll a new finger). Then follow the procedure to enroll. Configuring Advanced OmniPass Features OmniPass offers a number of advanced features that provide additional password management for your Tablet PC beyond the basic convenience of logging on. CAUTION: Before configuring advanced features, please read the Motion OmniPass Help, including any cautions or warnings about features. Activating some features (specifical-
ly Strong Logon Security) may, as a normal part of the Om-
niPass operation, change the way your Tablet PC starts up and/or the start-up options that are available. Before using ad-
vanced features, back up your user profile using the feature provided. To access these advanced features, tap the OmniPass icon in the system tray and open the OmniPass Control Center, or open the Motion Dashboard then Motion Security Center > Motion OmniPass. The following is an overview of these features. For further information, refer to the OmniPass Help. Motion OmniPass > Manage OmniPass Users and Settings Add/remove users Import a new user Export OmniPass user profiles; user profiles are stored as .opi
(OmniPass Import/Export) files IMPORTANT: To restore a lost or corrupted OmniPass config-
uration and encryption keys, back up and store a copy of your user profile(s) in a safe place. Motion OmniPass > Change User Settings Change user audio settings Change taskbar tips Modify file encryption settings Enroll authentication devices Set authentication rules and policies NOTE: For instructions for setting up passwords, refer to Re-
placing Password Logons on page 45. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 44 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Change System Settings Startup options for Windows Strong Logon Security Vault Management Password management for websites, applications, or any password-protected resource Encrypt/Decrypt Settings for authenticating encrypted/decrypted files Checking Logon Status. Move your pen over the OmniPass key icon in the system tray to check. A pop-up window shows who is logged on. Open the Motion Dashboard, tap Motion Security Center > Motion OmniPass or tap the OmniPass key icon and open the OmniPass Control Center and look at the Current User/Domain information in the second panel on the left. See the OmniPass Control Center illustration for an example of this window. Replacing Password Logons. OmniPass lets you replace the password logons at websites or anywhere you are prompted to provide your credentials, such as Internet email, ftp logons, client logons, or any restricted-access network resource. Once OmniPass registers your logon credentials, you can conveniently access any of these restricted areas with your fingerprint. You can also access these sites with your password. Perform the following steps. 1. Go to a site that requires a log on (username and password), but do not log on yet. 2. At the site logon prompt, enter your username and password in the fields provided, but do not tap Enter, Submit, OK, or Logon or any other method that accesses the site. 3. Right-click the yellow OmniPass key icon that appears in the system tray at the bottom of the screen. 4. Tap Remember Password. The Windows arrow cursor will change to the OmniPass golden key cursor. 5. Drag this OmniPass cursor to the area on the site where you would normally enter your username and password to log on, but do not tap Logon or Submit yet. (You will complete the logon in Step 9.) 6. If a Friendly Name window appears, enter a name that reminds you of the website. OmniPass associates this name with this web-
site. NOTE: Verify that the Settings for this Password Site are set the way you want the site authenticated:
Automatically enter ... Instantly accesses the site without requiring a password or fingerprint scan. If you are logged in to OmniPass and you access a secure website, OmniPass will automatically submit your user name and password without prompting for verification. If you leave your system unattended and unlocked, this website can be viewed by anyone who has access to your Tablet PC. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 45 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC
(Default) Automatically click ... Prompts you for your OmniPass/Windows password or fingerprint scan when you access the site. 7. If needed, swipe your fingerprint or enter your master password to authenticate these settings. 8. Tap OK, Submit, Sign In, or Logon to access the site. 9. Tap Finish to complete the Remember Password procedure. The site location, the credentials to access the site, and the OmniPass authentication settings for the site are now stored in the OmniPass secure database. Logging Onto a Remembered Site 1. Open a website where you have set up the OmniPass logon (that is, 2. Swipe your finger when you are prompted for a fingerprint/master a Remembered Site). password authentication. NOTE: You can remove a remembered site through the OmniPass Control Center > Vault Management >
Manage Passwords option. Exporting Your User Profile. The OmniPass Help application contains information about exporting your user profile. Go to Motion Dashboard then Motion Security Center > Motion OmniPass, and tap Help in the Action panel. Configuring Strong Logon Security Strong logon security can be configured to require authentication before showing the Windows desktop. Be aware that enabling strong logon security will force you to authenticate with a specific security device (e.g., the fingerprint reader, a Smart Card) before allowing access to the Windows desktop. Once enabled, the Windows XP Welcome screen and Windows fast switching will not be available on this Tablet PC. 1. To enable Strong Logon Security, open the Motion Dashboard, tap Motion Security Center then Motion OmniPass to open the OmniPass Control Center. 2. Tap Change OmniPass System Settings 3. Tap Enable strong logon security. The Enable strong logon security window is shown. 4. Tap the checkbox: Enable strong logon security. 5. Tap the checkbox: Save all changes. A dialog box tells you that you have made changes that require you to restart your computer. 6. Tap OK and restart your computer. During logon you will be required to use the specified authentication device. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 46 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Infineon Trusted Platform Module The Infineon Trusted Security Platform Solution is a comprehensive set of tools provided with your Tablet PC. Together, these tools and the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) result in the one of the most secure computing environments now available on a Tablet PC. With this application it is now possible to create and manage digital certificates for user and platform authentication. The Infineon TPM is not automatically enabled at startup and requires system administrator action to enable the feature. More Information About the Infineon Security Solution. Ask your system administrator for more information or learn more about the Infineon Security Solution by opening the Motion Dashboard then Motion Security Center > Infineon TPM > Getting Started Guide. Windows Security System Components Overview Among the new security features, the Microsoft Windows Security Center automatically sets up a Windows Firewall on your Tablet PC to block unwanted access to your system over the internet and from other networks. The Security Center system provides security alerts during startup and messages while running Internet Explorer. These messages are a normal part of the operating system. Microsoft provides information with these alerts to help you decide what action to take. In addition, you can set up the firewall to block all outside sources from connecting to your system (recommended) or can make exceptions to allow communications with a certain program. Within these settings, you can change the scope to specify a set of computers for which this port or program is unblocked. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 47 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Microsoft Security Center Lets you check security settings and learn more about improving security. Access is via open Motion Dashboard > Motion Security Center. Windows Firewall On by default; helps protect your Tablet PC against viruses and other security threats, such as intruders who might try access over the Internet or a network. Tap the Windows Firewall icon on the Control Panel (Classic view) or the Security Center > Windows Firewall icon (Category view). From here, you can add exceptions to bypass selected programs and services. If a program or service needs to open the firewall to perform, it notifies you and lets you decide whether to open the firewall and allow access. Automatic Updates Checks for the latest important updates and installs them automatically. Configure from the Microsoft Security Center. Internet Explorer Provides security settings to warn you about viruses and other security threats that can spread over the Internet or other types of networks; blocks certain website features and gives you a warning, so you can decide whether it is safe to proceed. Access from Internet Explorer Tools > Internet Options > Security. You can always bypass the settings for sites of your choice by changing the options for that site. Pop-up blocker in Internet Explorer. Stops most browser windows from popping up without your permission, giving you more control over your Web browsing experience. Access from Internet Explorer Tools > Internet Options > Security. You can always bypass the settings for sites of your choice by changing the options for that site. Microsoft Security Center. The Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 Operating System provides new security features that help defend against viruses, worms, and hackers. To learn more about these features, go to Motion Dashboard then Motion Security Center > Microsoft Security Center or tap the Windows Security Alerts icon in the system tray (this icon only remains active for a short time on your desktop). Using Windows Security. Passwords protect your Tablet PC from unauthorized access. Passwords can create different levels of protection for your Tablet PC and its data. Operating system passwords Secure the files on your Tablet PC from other users BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) passwords Secure the software routines that test hardware at startup, start the operating system, and support the transfer of data among hardware devices System password Locks access to the BIOS set up Boot password Locks access to the system Hard Disk Drive (HDD) password Secures your data so the HDD cannot be accessed by removing it and connecting it to another Tablet PC Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 48 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Setting the Windows Operating System Password. Be aware that the following advanced procedures require you to make changes in Windows BIOS. You should not perform this procedure unless you are comfortable with the following cautionary information. You can set up a Windows operating system password going to Start > Control Panel > User Accounts > Create a new account... (Classic View) Setting BIOS Passwords. CAUTION: We strongly recommend that you read the information in this section carefully to understand the implications of setting up a BIOS system password. If you set up a BIOS System password and enter it in-
correctly several times, you will be locked out of the system. If you become locked out, you can restart the Tablet PC and retry the password again. You can restart the Tablet PC and re-enter the password as many times as you need to. Howev-
er, if you are unsuccessful in entering the password, you will not be able to access your Tablet PC. If this happens, contact Motion Computing Technical Support at www.motioncomputing.com/support for assistance. Have your Tablet PC serial number available (on the label on the back of the system). The level of security you want on your Tablet PC helps determine what BIOS password(s) you set. Setting a BIOS System Password. Perform these steps to set up a password to access the PhoenixBIOSTM Set Up Utility on the Tablet PC:
NOTE: These procedures describe using the pen to enter information; you can also attach an external keyboard if you prefer. 1. Start the Tablet PC. 2. When the Motion Computing splash screen appears, quickly press Hot Key #2. If you miss the splash screen, turn the Tablet PC off then back on and try this step again. 3. From the PhoenixBIOS Set Up Utility, tap Security on the menu bar. 4. To set up a System password, double-tap Enter next to Set System Password. 5. Type in a System Password using the On Screen Keyboard. 6. Tap Enter. 7. Type in the password again to confirm it. 8. Tap Enter. The system returns to the Security screen and the Sys-
tem Password reads Set. A password is now required to enter the PhoenixBIOS Set Up Utility. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 49 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC 9. To set up a Password on boot, tap Disabled next to Password on boot until Enabled is highlighted. You will not be prompted to type in another password because Password on boot uses the System password. NOTE: You cannot set up Password on boot until you set up a System password. 10.If you have finished setting up a password, tap Exit or press the Esc key on the Tablet PC to exit the PhoenixBIOS Set Up Utility. 11. When you exit, you are asked to select from the following options:
Exit Saving Changes Exit Discarding Changes Load Set Up Defaults Discard Changes Save Changes 12. Select the desired action. 13. Confirm the selection by tapping Yes. Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Password. To set up a password to start the Tablet PC (so no one can access the information on the HDD of your Tablet PC even if it is removed and installed in another Tablet PC without the proxy password):
1. Start the Tablet PC. 2. When the Motion Computing splash screen appears, quickly press Hot Key #2. If you miss the splash screen, turn the Tablet PC off then back on and try this step again. 3. From the PhoenixBIOS Set Up Utility, tap Security on the menu bar. 4. To set the HDD password, double-tap Enter next to Set Hard Disk Password. 5. Type in a New Password. 6. Tap Enter. 7. Type in the password to confirm it. 8. Tap Enter. The system returns to the Security screen and the HDD Password is Set. (When you exit then re-enter the PhoenixBIOS setup, the HDD Password is Locked.) 9. If you have finished setting up a password, tap Exit or press the Esc key on the Tablet PC to exit the PhoenixBIOS Set Up Utility. 10. When you exit, you are prompted to select from the following options:
Exit Saving Changes Exit Discarding Changes Load Set Up Defaults Discard Changes Save Changes 11. Select the desired action. 12. Confirm the selection by tapping Yes. Clearing Tablet PC Security. To clear the Tablet PC PhoenixBIOS security:
1. Start the Tablet PC. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 50 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC 2. When the Motion Computing splash screen appears, quickly press Hot Key #2. If you miss the splash screen, turn the Tablet PC off then back on and try this step again. 3. From the PhoenixBIOS Set Up Utility, tap Security on the menu bar. If you have rebooted, you will be prompted to enter the password(s) you have set up. 4. To clear the System and Password on boot passwords, double-tap Enter next to Set System Password. 5. Type in the Current Password. 6. Leave the space blank next to Enter New Password. 7. Tap Enter. 8. Leave the space blank to Confirm New Password. 9. Tap Enter. 10. When the Security screen appears, the System Password should be Clear and the Password on boot Disabled. 11. To clear the HDD password, double-tap Enter next to Set Hard Disk Password. 12. Type in the Current Password. 13. Leave the space blank next to Enter New Password. 14. Tap Enter. 15. Leave the space blank to Confirm New Password. 16. Tap Enter. 17. When the Security screen appears, the HDD Password should now display Clear. SPEECH Introduction to Speech The speech recognition capability in the Tablet PC provides two distinct operations; there is a Voice Command mode and a Dictation mode. These selections are visible as buttons in the Tablet PC Input Panel (TIP). The following steps lead to success in setting up the speech feature. View the tutorial on speech recognition Set acceptance angle and the skew using the Motion Dashboard Adjust microphone volume Go through training Dictation mode requires additional training and results in converting your spoken words into typewritten text. The Voice Command and Dictation modes are described in this section. Motion Speak Anywhere Technology The Motion Speak AnywhereTM audio system combines the Knowles Acoustics IntelliSonicTM software application with integrated microphones to let you record audio, dictate notes, and use voice commands without the need for a microphone headset. These capabilities make the Motion Tablet PC with Speak Anywhere technology a valuable tool for mobile users in a variety of work settings, including small or large groups, or for individual dictation or voice commands. Integrated microphones, two of the three are used at one time The integrated microphones help optimize the sound capturing capabilities of Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 51 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC the Tablet PC for speech recognition and voice recording. The locations of the microphones have been carefully designed to let the system detect sound input from a specific angle, rejecting sounds from outside that angle. There are three microphones; the software determines which two of the three provide the best results. Knowles Acoustics IntelliSonic software This software lets you direct sounds coming from a specific direction to the microphones, while can-
celing interfering noise from other directions, thus minimizing the effects of environmental noise and eliminating acoustic echo feedback. It is based on the following audio technologies:
Array Processing or beam forming software Removes all sound outside a software-defined angle of acceptance Noise Suppression Removes background and ambient noise Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) Removes echo caused by the microphone picking up the systems speaker output, thus preventing feedback Speech Recognition Speech recognition lets you convert spoken words into typed text or into voice commands, you can use speech to correct errors, format text, or control programs. This is sometimes quicker than typing or writing text. Before you can use speech recognition, you must first train the system for your voice, pronunciation, speaking pace, and inflection. These adjustments are made through the Speech utility on the TIP window. Speech recognition, including dictation and voice commands is available through the TIP window. Tap the Tools and Options icon in the TIP. If this is the first time you have activated Speech, you will be asked to complete the Voice Training application. The more training you do, the better the speech recognition. Tap here to activate speech recognition Dictation mode Selected by tapping Dictation. Changes everything you say to text; use to enter text directly into any document or text box when you do not want to use the pen or keyboard Voice command mode Selected by tapping Command. Listens for specific words that correspond to an existing list of available voice com-
mands; use to quickly switch between programs, for saving documents, etc. NOTE: To turn off speech, tap the button for Dictation or Com-
mand (whichever you are using). Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 52 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC For additional information about setting up speech recognition, you can tap Help (the Question mark in the circle) on the TIP window and search for speech. Using Motion Dashboard Directional Controls. The Microphone settings in the Motion Dashboard include three radio buttons that define the directional angle that is to be used for speech recording. The selected setting determines the angle of acceptance. The following information is intended to help you understand the differences between the narrow, medium, and wide angles. However, the best reference will be your actual experience in using the technology. There are three microphones, but only two are used at one time. If you are in landscape mode, the microphones along the bottom edge (as viewed in primary landscape mode) of the Tablet PC are used. If you are in portrait mode, the two microphones along the right side are used. Angle of acceptance. Three pre-defined angles of acceptance are part of the Motion Speak Anywhere audio technology:
Narrow Angle Best setting for dictation, Voice over IP, voice noisy environments; the microphones detect sound on a narrow angle near the bottom center (landscape orientation) or top center
(portrait orientation) of the display. If you do not speak within the angle of acceptance, e.g., if you turn your head while dictating or change the angle of the Tablet PC, the sound will not be recorded. Medium Angle (default) Best setting for a small group, conference table, voice quiet environment; microphones detect at a wider angle Wide Angle Widest angle of acceptance. Try starting with this setting (even for dictation) before using a more restricted angle. Change to the Narrow or Medium Angle to eliminate more background noise. 1 Narrow Angle; 2 Medium Angle; 3 Wide Angle; 4 Microphones (only two of the three are shown in the illustration). Skew angle. The pre-set sound detection area is straight in front of the system display. If you want the system to receive sound from Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 53 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC elsewhere, you can skew the receiving direction towards one or the other microphone (keeping the same relative angle of acceptance. Setting up the skew angle:
1. Open the Motion Dashboard. 2. Under Microphone, tap Narrow Angle or Medium Angle. (You can-
not calibrate wide angle.) 3. Move to where you want the microphone to detect your voice. 4. Tap Calibrate. A block of text appears. 5. Read the text aloud, speaking normally towards the Tablet PC micro-
phones. This should take 20-40 seconds. NOTE: In many cases, you will not need to calibrate the microphone because the audio system filters out many unwanted sounds. If you are dictating in an office or recording during a meeting, the audio system may work well with no additional calibration. IMPORTANT: The audio system does not store calibrations. If you change to another angle/position and then return to the previous one, you must re-calibrate the audio system. Enabling Speech Recognition Enrollment. It is necessary to train the system to your voice before you can use the Speech Dictation and Voice Command capabilities of the Tablet PC. The procedure is used to adjust the microphones and train the Tablet PC for the characteristics of your voice. The entire process takes about 10 minutes. It is advisable to move to a quiet environment before starting this procedure. 1. Open the Motion Dashboard and make sure the speakers and microphone are turned on (the default settings). 2. Check that the speaker volume and microphone sound levels on the Motion Dashboard are appropriate for your setting. 3. Tap the TIP icon on the menu bar at the bottom of the Tablet PC dis-
play. The TIP appears. 4. Tap the down-arrow beside Tools to open the Tools options. 5. Tap Speech. The first time you access this function, a Speech Rec-
ognition Enrollment message appears. You must adjust the micro-
phone and train speech recognition before continuing. Until you complete speech training, the speech button is inactive. This takes about 10 minutes. 6. Tap Next and follow the Microphone Wizard. NOTE: To improve speech recognition, run additional speech training sessions. Using Speech Recognition: Setting Up Dictation or Voice Commands. Once you activate speech recognition, depending on your work setting
(single-person office or small or large meeting) and what you plan to do
(dictate, use voice commands), you may want to change the Motion Dashboard microphone angle from Medium (the default) to either Narrow Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 54 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC or Wide. You may then also want to calibrate the direction of the microphones. 1. Open the Motion Dashboard and select the desired angle. 2. (Optional) To use either Medium or Narrow Angle to dictate from a direction other than directly in front of the display, tap Calibrate and read through the calibration script. NOTE: Calibration will skew the angle at which the micro-
phones detect your voice while keeping the same relative an-
gle of acceptance. 3. To start the Speech recognizer, open the TIP window. 4. Select Dictation (to convert spoken words into typed text) or Commands (to use your voice to enter commands, such as Enter, Save, Open). NOTE: For more information about using this feature and for available voice commands, see the Windows Help and Sup-
port Center where you can search for topics about speech recognition and training. Also available are the speech tutori-
als. To find the speech tutorials, select Start > Help; then Support > Welcome to Tablet PC > Tablet PC Tutorials. Helpful Hints: Dictating and Recording You may want to start recording or dictating from the Wide Angle
(Motion Dashboard setting) and change to a more-restricted angle
(Narrow or Medium) if too many outside sounds are recorded. The advantage to the Wide Angle is that no sounds will be lost if you change your location. The disadvantage is that outside sounds may be picked up that interfere with the recording. You MUST recalibrate the microphones if you change from one orienta-
tion (landscape) to another (portrait). This is because the skew angle changes and the sound will no longer be in the angle of acceptance. If necessary, refer to the earlier information on skew angle. Even with the Narrow Angle setting, if a sound is loud enough and within the angle of acceptance (no matter how distant), the sound will be picked up by the microphones. The advantage of the Tablet PC is that it detects fewer extraneous sounds than other audio systems. You can fur-
ther limit the detection of these outside sounds by turning down the microphone volume and speaking louder; this reduces the microphones range and restricts their ability to detect extraneous sounds. The Tablet PC contains pre-installed audio components. If you install a third-party audio device (such as USB or Bluetooth devices), the Motion-
installed audio may not work. If this happens, you must reinstall the Motion-audio components. (The Motion audio components are the Sig-
maTel and Knowles Acoustics audio drivers.) After you install these, if you still have problems recording, contact Motion Technical Support or the Bluetooth or USB manufacturers technical support. To improve speech recognition, run additional speech training sessions. Open the Windows Control Panel and select Speech to perform addi-
Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 55 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC tional speech training. As you do this, speech recognition accuracy will gradually improve. PORTS, SLOTS AND CONNECTORS PC Cards The PC Card slot (also referred to as a PCMCIA card slot), located on the right edge of the Tablet PC, holds one Type-II PC Card for networking, memory expansion, or accessory connection. 1. To install a PC Card, insert it label side up. 2. To remove a PC Card, push the button next to the slot until it pops out. 3. Push it again to eject the PC Card. NOTE: Your Tablet PC ships with a plastic blank card in the PC Card slot. When the slot is not in use, we recommend that you leave the plastic blank in place. SD Cards The SD Card slot, located just above the PC card slot on the right edge of the Tablet PC, holds one SD Card for networking, memory expansion, or accessory connection. 1. To install an SD Card, insert it in the slot, label side up. 2. To remove the SD Card, grip the edge of the card and carefully pull it from the slot. Notice that the edge of the Tablet PC is curved slightly in the area of the SD Card. This makes it easier to grip the edge of the card for insertion and removal. Infrared (IrDA) Port The IrDA port is located on the right edge of the Tablet PC near the SD Card slot. The infrared connection protocol allows transfer of data or digital images from any IrDA enabled device to the specified file location on the Tablet PC. Typically, the devices must be within three feet of each other. USB Ports There are two high speed USB ports on the left edge of the Tablet PC. These can be used to attach any USB device to the Tablet PC. Typically a USB device draws power from the Tablet PC and it is advisable to use AC power when one or more USB devices are attached. Running USB devices while on the battery power will affect your power consumption. Speaker Port The speaker port is on the left edge of the Tablet PC. It is marked with a small headphones symbol and is designed as an audio output channel only. You can attach external speakers or headphones to this port. When headphones or external speakers are attached, the internal speakers are disabled. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 56 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Microphone Port The microphone port is on the left edge of the Tablet PC. It is marked with a small microphone symbol and is designed as an audio input/line in channel only. You can attach an external microphone directly to this port to enhance your audio recording capabilities. When an external microphone is attached, the built-in microphones are disabled. DVI-D Connector The DVI-D (Digital Video Interface) Connector is on the left edge of the Tablet PC and is identified by the DVI-D designation. This connector is provided for the direct attachment of a digital video monitor. An optional DVI-D cable is available from Motion Computing for this purpose. When an external monitor is attached, the Motion Dashboard display settings can be used to set the external display as a mirrored or extended display. VGA Connector The VGA Connector is on the left edge of the Tablet PC. It is intended for use with standard analog video displays. An attachment cable is not provided for this purpose; if you use the Tablet PC with a standard VGA-type display, you will need to purchase a corresponding cable. When an external monitor is attached, the Motion Dashboard display settings can be used to set the external display as a mirrored or extended display. Docking Connector The Docking Connector is at the bottom edge of the Tablet PC. It is designed to integrate the Table PC with the new Motion FlexDock for the LE Series. When the Tablet PC is used with the new FlexDock, the port connections on the Tablet PC are replicated on the FlexDock. For more information about the new FlexDock for the LE Series, contact your Motion sales representative or visit the Motion Computing website at www.motioncomputing.com/accessories. WIRELESS NETWORKING There are three technologies available in the Tablet PC for wireless networking connections. Wi-Fi (802.11) Bluetooth Infrared Wi-Fi (802.11) Wireless Connections IMPORTANT: Since wireless set ups differ widely, the infor-
mation presented here is general and may not cover all the steps required for your wireless configuration. For more infor-
mation about wireless networks, you may need to contact your System Administrator. Or, go to Start > Help and Sup-
port and search for wireless help from Microsoft. Although wireless access is available in public areas, your ability to use the wireless access point depends on the following conditions:
Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 57 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Distance from the access point Ability to connect to the access point Service rights to it (which may require an account fee, user name, pass-
word, an/or network set up through an administrator) The access point is not broadcasting a network name (Check your secu-
rity settings, the SSID may not be broadcasting) The security settings may not be configured properly for wireless net-
working. WARNING: FAA regulations require that you disable any wireless connection when traveling by air. If the Wireless LED on the front of the Tablet PC is off, in-
ternal wireless communications are disabled. Enabling/Setting Up a Wireless Connection Through the Motion Dashboard. 1. Open the Motion Dashboard and make sure that Enable Internal 802.11 Wireless Radio is checked. 2. Under Wireless on the Motion Dashboard, tap Properties. 3. In the Wireless Network Connection Properties window, tap the Wireless Networks tab. 4. In the Wireless Networks window, tap View Wireless Networks to see a list of available networks Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 58 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC 5. Highlight the network you want to connect to and tap Connect. 6. Tap OK. NOTE: If you are on a secure network, you may also need to enter a network key. Bluetooth Wireless Connections The internal Bluetooth wireless radio in the Tablet PC is disabled by default. This setting is found in the Motion Dashboard. Bluetooth software comes pre-installed on your Tablet PC. To begin using Bluetooth, open the Motion Dashboard, and check the box that enables your internal wireless Bluetooth radio. The Bluetooth software completes its installation. How To Access Bluetooth. When you first enable Bluetooth on your Tablet PC, you will see a Bluetooth icon in the system tray. This icon offers shortcuts to the Bluetooth Settings window, the Bluetooth File Transfer Wizard, and the Add New Connection Wizard. Press and hold the pen tip on the Bluetooth icon to open the Bluetooth Settings menu. Bluetooth Device Connection Process. The following process is generally common for connecting most Bluetooth devices (keyboard, mouse, printer, cellular phone, PDA, Tablet PC, notebook PC, etc.). The actual steps may be slightly different for every type and brand of Bluetooth device. Read and follow the installation instructions included with your Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 59 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC specific device. These are the four generic steps for connecting to a Bluetooth device. 1. Discover 2. Search 3. Pair 4. Connect 1. Make the device discoverable. Making a Bluetooth device discoverable makes it visible to other Bluetooth devices. Each Bluetooth device uses a different method (pressing a button or key combination) to make it discoverable; this is generally described in the devices documentation. 2. Search for Bluetooth devices in range. This process will find every Bluetooth device that is discoverable and available for connection within 33 feet (10 meters). 3. Pairing. Using a passkey creates a secure connection (pairing) between the Tablet PC and Bluetooth device. This passkey helps prevent data from being intercepted and interpreted by another device. IMPORTANT: Though the passkey exchange helps to secure your data, Bluetooth wireless technology should not be con-
sidered completely secure. 4. Connect the devices. The first time a Bluetooth device is connected to the Tablet PC the drivers are loaded for that device. After this initial connection, some Bluetooth devices may disconnect when they go into power-saving mode. Most will automatically reconnect when they become active again. Using the Bluetooth Application 1. Make sure that either the Bluetooth LED is flashing or that there is a checkmark beside Enable Internal Bluetooth Wireless Radio
(both indicate that Bluetooth is running) in the Motion Dashboard 2. Using your pen, single tap the Bluetooth Devices icon in the 3. Tap Add New Connection to launch the Bluetooth Add New Con-
system tray. nection Wizard. The Bluetooth Settings window is shown, quickly followed by the Add New Connection Wizard. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 60 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC 4. Place the Bluetooth device (mouse, keyboard, printer, etc.) in dis-
coverable mode. NOTE: Each Bluetooth device may have a different way to make it discoverable. Some have a small button on the back of the mouse or keyboard; others may require that you press a key sequence on the keyboard. Look at the documentation that came with the Bluetooth device or visit the manufactur-
ers website for information. 5. After you make the Bluetooth device discoverable, tap Next. The Searching for Bluetooth devices window is shown. When the Bluetooth device is detected, it is shown in the Add New Connection Wizard Select a device window. If multiple devices are detected, each is shown in the window. Select the device to be connected. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 61 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC 6. Tap Next to add the Bluetooth device.The wizard searches for remote device services. The Wizard will display a message that it is connecting and then the passkey number if authentication is required. NOTE: If required, immediately enter the number shown in the Passkey field and press Enter. Consult your device docu-
mentation for more information. It may take a short time to complete the connection. Please wait. 7. When the Completing the Add Bluetooth Device Wizard window appears, the Bluetooth installation is nearly complete. Tap Finish to complete the installation Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 62 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC 8. Take your device for a spin. You can now begin using your Bluetooth device. Important Steps to Take If the Device Is Not Discovered If the Tablet PC fails to detect the Bluetooth device after what you consider a reasonable number of attempts, try the following:
Make sure the Bluetooth LED is flashing. If not, open the Motion Dashboard and enable the Bluetooth Wireless radio button. Make sure the device you are adding is discoverable. There are several things you need to check:
Install new or fully charged batteries in the Bluetooth device; make sure these are installed correctly For keyboards, mice, printers, etc., read the instructions that came with the device or visit the device manufacturers website for information and other troubleshooting tips. Some devices have a button to press or a series of keys to press to make it discoverable. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 63 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Also with keyboards, mice, printers, etc., be sure that when you go through the Add Bluetooth Device Wizard that you place a checkmark beside My device is set up and ready to be found. For Tablet PCs transferring files, both Tablet PCs must turn on the device transfer wizard, although only the receiving Tablet PC needs to be discoverable. Tap the Bluetooth icon and then either Send a file or Receive a file. When you do this, discovery is automatically turned on for the receiving device. Also for Tablet PCs, you need to enable Allow Bluetooth devices to connect to this computer to connect to keyboards, mice, printers, etc. While this is the default, make sure that this setting has not been changed. You find this by right-clicking the Bluetooth icon > Show Bluetooth Devices > Options. When you open the Bluetooth Devices tab, only the connected devices will be displayed. Other devices are only displayed when you add a device using the Bluetooth Device Wizard. Check to see what Bluetooth devices are connected. Tap the Bluetooth Devices icon > Open Bluetooth Settings. On the Devices window, you should be able to see Bluetooth devices that are currently connected. If the Bluetooth card in the Tablet PC still fails to detect the Bluetooth device, contact the device manufacturer or visit their website for assistance. NOTE: A system reboot is not required. The Bluetooth device is ready to use. If you look at the Blue-
tooth Settings window, the connected device or devices are shown. An example of a Bluetooth Settings window with both a Bluetooth keyboard and a Bluetooth mouse is shown below. Switch to Other Bluetooth Software. Your Tablet PC comes pre-installed with Bluetooth from Toshiba. Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 supports certain Bluetooth devices natively (e.g., keyboards and mice). Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 64 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC If you would prefer to use the Windows XP Tablet PC software, please visit http:\\selfhelp.motioncomputing.com for instructions on switching to the native Bluetooth software. Helpful Hints: Bluetooth Wireless Motion Computing and its Bluetooth partners have worked to ensure a positive experience with this technology, as well as to ensure Bluetooth inter-operability. In doing so, the following operating issues have been found:
When simultaneously operating Bluetooth wireless and 802.11 wireless, interference between these wireless technologies impacts Bluetooth performance. This is most noticeable when you try to transfer large amounts of data, such as file transfers or printing large documents. This may also be noticeable when you try to transfer large or small amounts of data may if several Bluetooth devices are operating simultaneously in an office. Bluetooth audio support is currently based on technology that has not been fully developed for speech recognition. In addition, the Bluetooth software in the Tablet PC does not have a pre-installed Bluetooth head-
set profile. Therefore, for speech recognition, we recommend that you not use a Bluetooth wireless headset. Moreover, the Motion Speak Any-
where technology is designed to record clear audio, dictate notes, and use voice commands without the need for any type of microphone head-
set. Should you attempt to install other wireless headset or other audio driv-
ers (such as Bluetooth or USB) over the Tablet PC audio drivers, a mal-
function of the Tablet PC audio system may occur because the drivers may not be compatible. Because Bluetooth is a relatively new technology, some cross-device compatibility issues may occur. If you are having problems with inter-
pretability of Bluetooth devices, contact the manufacturer of your Blue-
tooth device and check its compatibility with the Bluetooth software installed on your Tablet PC. Do not install Bluetooth software from another manufacturer over the Microsoft Bluetooth software installed on the Tablet PC. This will cause malfunction of the Tablet PC Bluetooth system. Using Infrared Wireless Connections The infrared software is installed by default. You can access the Infrared software by going to the Control Panel and tapping the Wireless Link icon. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 65 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Double-tap the Wireless Link icon to open the Wireless Link window. The following shows the Wireless Link window at the Infrared tab. Tap the desired checkboxes. Accessing Image Transfer. To transfer an image from your camera to your Tablet PC, tap the Image Transfer tab in the Wireless Link window. The Image Transfer window is shown. Specify the destination of the received image(s) and tap OK to begin. For information about the Infrared Port, tap the Hardware tab to open that window. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 66 CONFIGURING BUTTONS Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC This section shows you how to program some of the buttons on the front panel of the Tablet PC. It is not necessary for you to customize the buttons, especially at this point in the learning process. Just be aware that it can be done, and as you become more familiar with the Tablet PC, you may want to customize your buttons. You can configure some of the Tablet PC buttons so they perform the functions that you want them to perform. Escape button (Secondary function is programmable) Function button (not programmable) Five-way directional control buttons (Secondary functions of each key are programmable) Hot Keys 1 and 2 (Primary and Secondary functions are programmable) SAS (Ctrl+Alt+Del) (not programmable) - this button is located on the front panel in the upper left corner (when in primary landscape orienta-
tion) above the key icon and the fingerprint reader. SAS button Esc button Fcn button Five- way directional control Dashboard/Hot key #1 Tablet PC Buttons Rotate/Hot key #2 Button Default and Programmable Functions Button Primary Function Programmable Secondary Function
(Press Fcn button
+ this button) Escape Escape key Function Function + other button activates secondary function Secondary function is programmable Not programmable Alt + Tab No secondary function Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 67 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Secondary functions are programmable Left arrow = Shift
+Tab Right arrow = Tab Up arrow = Page Up Down arrow = Page Down Both primary and secondary functions are programmable Both primary and secondary functions are programmable Not programmable Open Windows Journal Open Tablet PC Input Panel No secondary function Five-way Directional Control Button Dashboard/Hot Key # 1 Rotate/Hot Key
# 2 SAS
(This button is located at the top left corner with a key icon) Works like the arrow keys on a keyboard. The center of the button works like the Enter key. Opens Motion Dashboard Rotates the display Ctrl + Alt + Del
(Windows Task Manager). Also used for domain authentication or logon screen. To change the default button properties:
1. Open Motion Dashboard and tap Pen and Button Options. Or, double-tap the Tablet and Pen Settings icon in the system tray, located in the lower right corner of the display window. 2. Tap Tablet Buttons. 3. Highlight the name of the tablet button you want to reprogram. The button being programmed turns red. 4. Tap Change. 5. On the Change Button Functions window, tap the down-arrow beside Action. This opens the list of actions. 6. Select a new action from the list. NOTE: For some actions, you only need to select the action itself to change the button property. For others, such as to launch a program, you must browse and find the program; or, to set up a key combination, you must press a sequence of keys. You can also tap Reset to return to the button defaults. 7. Tap OK. In the list of Actions, you should see the new action for the button you programmed. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 68 Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance This chapter describes various care and maintenance procedures that you should do on a routine basis with your Motion Tablet PC. CARING FOR YOUR TABLET PC AND ITS ACCESSORIES The Tablet PC display and chassis are designed to be very durable. This section describes the proper care and maintenance that will keep them working and in good condition for a long time. For general information about care of the Tablet PC and its components and accessories, see the Regulatory and Safety Guide packaged with your Tablet PC. CAUTION: Be sure to follow the guidelines listed be-
low when caring for your Tablet PC and its compo-
nents. Improper use may damage the Tablet PC and/
or its components and void the warranty. General Care Protect the Tablet PC from exposure to extreme temperatures, shock, liquids, and strong magnetic fields. Do not open or disassemble the Tablet PC other than to replace memory modules or to replace the battery. Always follow the instructions included with these accessories when performing these procedures. WARNING: To avoid the risk of personal injury or damage to the Tablet PC, when replacing memory modules, turn off your Tablet PC, unplug the AC pow-
er connection, and remove the battery. Ground your-
self by touching a grounded conductive surface, such as a device or appliance with a grounded, three-pronged plug. Avoid touching the pins and leads on the memory and the internal circuitry of the Tablet PC. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 69 Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance When storing the Tablet PC for an extended period of time, unplug AC power and remove the battery after discharging it part way. Do not place heavy objects on top of the Tablet PC. Caring for the Standard and View Anywhere Displays General cleaning of either display Clean fingerprints and most marks from the display surface by wiping it with the soft cloth (provided). Never spray or pour liquids directly onto the display surface itself. Never use an abrasive cleaner on the display. If liquid is spilled on the display, wipe it up immediately. Cleaning the standard display If needed, spray a soft cloth (not directly on the display) with a window-type cleaner and wipe the display. Cleaning the View Anywhere Display If needed, clean with any alcohol-based product recommended for use on anti-reflective glass. Other cleaning products may leave a residue. Avoid using tissues or paper towels to clean the display surface. These contain wood fibers that can scratch the display. Use only the Motion Digitizer Pen on the display. Do not write on the sur-
face with an ink pen or pencil, any pointed or other object that could damage the display surface. Do not place heavy objects on the display surface. Protect the display surface from unnecessary contact by using the Hard-
top Cover or a portfolio when transporting the Tablet PC. Avoid exposing the display to direct sunlight for long periods of time. Caring for the Motion Digitizer Pen Always store the Motion Digitizer Pen in the Tablet PC pen bay or in the portfolio when not in use. Do not store the pen vertically on the tip. Constant tip pressure can affect the pen-to-digitizer interaction. Change the pen tip regularly. See the CAUTION and refer to Replacing the Pen Tips on page 70. The pen contains sensitive electronics. Do not immerse it in liquids. CAUTION: Certain environments may contain parti-
cles or debris that can adhere to the Tablet PC dis-
play or to the pen tip. To avoid damaging the display, clean it frequently with the cleaning cloth, provided with your system. Also, change pen tips regularly, especially if you drop the pen onto a rough surface that could damage the tip or embed debris in it. Dam-
aged pen tips can scratch the display. Consider us-
ing a Motion Slip Case to protect the display and the pen. Replacing the Pen Tips. Normal use eventually wears down the pen tip, so the pen ships with extra tips and a small tip tool for replacing them. 1. Grasp the old tip with the silver ring of the tip replacement tool. Use the notch on the ring to grab the tip. 2. Pull the old tip out of the pen. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 70 TRAVELING WITH YOUR TABLET PC Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance 3. Insert a new tip. 4. Apply slight pressure to push it into place. Ordering New Pens To order additional pens, visit the Motion Computing website at www.motioncomputing.com/accessories. Here are some tips for traveling with your Tablet PC:
Remove all accessories and cables. Remember to pack those you will need while traveling and do not forget to pack at least one Motion digitizer pen. Attach the Hardtop Cover or slip the Tablet PC into a portfolio to protect the display. Protect the pen by keeping it in the Tablet PC pen bay or portfolio case during travel. Pack the Tablet PC securely in a briefcase or hand-carried luggage, and keep it separate from toiletries, liquids, and food. Do not pack it in checked luggage when you travel. Keep the Tablet PC stable during travel; secure it to prevent it from slid-
ing around in overhead bins and car trunks. NOTE: For travel warnings, see the section FAA Wireless Air Travel Requirements in this chapter. Traveling by Air Prepare for airport security by charging the battery in the event Security asks you to start the Tablet PC. Have it hand-inspected or sent through the X-ray scanner, but never carry it through the metal detector. Either turn off or place the Tablet PC in hibernation mode for takeoff and landing. FAA Wireless Air Travel Requirement WARNING: The FAA requires that you suspend wireless operations, such as 802.11 and Bluetooth, before boarding the plane. The easiest way to dis-
able internal wireless operations is by pressing the Wireless on/off button for 1/2 second. You can also uncheck (disable) all wireless devices in the Motion Dashboard. The wireless LED on the Tablet PC front panel, shown here, is off when wireless commu-
nications are disabled. To disable external wireless operations, remove any installed wireless PC Cards. WARNING: Do not transport the Lithium-ion batter-
ies used in your Tablet PC in checked baggage. You may take up to two spare batteries in carry-on lug-
gage in addition to the one in your Tablet PC. Transporting batteries in checked baggage or trans-
porting more than two spare batteries is a violation of transportation regulations. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 71 SYSTEM REPAIR/
RECOVERY PROCEDURE Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance Other Travel Hints Before extended use in the field or long trips away from AC power, adjust the Power properties to maximize battery conservation. Right-
click the Power Meter icon in the system tray to open the Power Options Properties dialog box. Then adjust the options. For more infor-
mation, refer to Helpful Hints: Battery and Power Management on page 36. For international travel, obtain and use the appropriate adapters for your destinations electrical outlets. A current converter is not necessary. You may want to carry proof of ownership or a merchandise passport when traveling internationally. Consult your insurance company and credit card company to learn about emergency travel assistance in the event your Tablet PC becomes lost or disabled. You may never need to perform this procedure, but in the event that your system shows signs of instability or corruption, it may become necessary. In most cases, once initiated, this procedure lets you repair the Tablet PC hard disk drive and retain the original system data, applications, passwords, and settings with no data loss. In those cases where no repair is possible, this procedure overwrites your system data. You can cancel the procedure before the recovery process begins. In this case, you may want to contact your system administrator for assistance. 1. If possible, back up your data files. 2. Turn off your Tablet PC. 3. Insert the Motion Tablet PC Operating System Recovery CD (Win-
dows XP Professional Service Pack 2) into the CD-ROM drive and start the Tablet PC. 4. When prompted, press any key to boot from the CD. 5. On the Set Up screen, select ENTER to set up Windows XP. NOTE: Do not select R=Repair before you accept the End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do, you must exit this procedure, shut down and restart your Tablet PC, then accept the EULA before proceeding. 6. Press F8 to accept the terms of the End User License Agreement. 7. When the next options appear, select from the following:
IMPORTANT: If Windows XP cannot repair your system, this procedure automatically skips to the second option, ESC =
Dont Repair (reformatting):
R = Repair option Installs Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 on your system, preserving your system data, applications, passwords, and settings ESC = Dont Repair (reformatting) option Reformats your hard disk drive. If Windows XP automatically skips to this option (that is, no repair is possible), you must decide whether to reformat now or Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 72 Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance cancel the procedure. If you decide to reformat, select either Format the partition using the NTFS File System or the NTFS File System
(Quick). If you decide not to reformat, select ESC to cancel the procedure. 8. Continue following the on screen instructions. 9. After your operating system has been reinstalled, you will be prompted to insert the Motion Drivers and Utilities Recovery CD. For a repaired system, this process completes quickly. If your system notifies you to reboot, restart your system. For a reformatted system, this process takes some time while the drivers and utilities are reinstalled. Once Win-
dows loads, your settings and drivers begin to install. Your system may reboot several times during this pro-
cess. No action is required. At this point, you may need to install additional software (such as Microsoft Office), as appropriate, from the Motion Application CD. You may also want to restore your personal preferences and settings. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 73 Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance This page is intentionally blank. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 74 Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support All Motion Computing Tablet PCs have passed a rigorous series of performance and quality-control tests, but now and then a problem may occur. If you do not see a solution among the following system and software issues, check the section Support Options in this chapter or go to our website at www.motioncomputing.com/support. SOLUTIONS TO COMMON PROBLEMS PROBLEM POWER The Tablet PC wont start when I slide the Power switch. CAUSE SOLUTION The Power switch hasnt been fully engaged. Fully discharged battery or no battery and no AC power. Slide and hold the power switch for at least a half-second, but no more than three seconds. Connect the AC adapter to operate the Tablet PC and charge the battery. Press the SAS button (small button with a key icon nearby) to start Windows Task Manager and close the application, or Slide and hold the power switch for at least 5 seconds to force a shutdown of the Tablet PC. Enable Hibernation through Power Option Properties. The Tablet PC wont shut down. An application has locked up the Tablet PC. The Tablet PC wont enter Hibernation mode. Hibernation isnt enabled. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 75 Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support The Tablet PC wont come out of Hibernation mode when running on battery power. Fully discharged battery and no AC power. Connect the AC adapter to provide power to the Tablet PC and charge the battery. The display goes black while the Tablet PC is still turned on. The Tablet PC system has gone into stand by after sitting idle for a period of time. (In this state, the power LED flashes blue.) Slide the power switch for about a second to resume operations. BATTERY Data loss during battery swap. The battery seems to run down very quickly (lasting less than three hours after a full charge). System has gone into low-battery Hibernation mode. (In this state, the power LED is off.) 1. Slide the power switch for about a second to resume operations. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the Tablet PC to charge the battery. The unit is designed to maintain the data and settings for up to 30 seconds in stand by while you swap the battery. This time may vary due to your system and the programs youre running. Accessory devices such as a DVD player and applications that make heavy use of the hard drive drain the battery more quickly. The battery is weakening or defective. When you swap the battery with the unit in stand by, be sure to save your data before removing the battery to avoid data loss. Use AC power when possible and/
or turn off the accessory devices. All batteries weaken over time, but if a new battery is needed, visit the Motion website to order a new battery. DISPLAY The desktop is too big for the display I cant see all of the desktop icons. Screen resolution is set higher than the default 1024 x 768 with 32-bit resolution. Decrease the screen resolution by opening the Motion Dashboard, selecting Graphics Properties, then the Schemes tab. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 76 Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support When I disconnected a second monitor from the Tablet PC, the image became too big for the Tablet PC display. The Tablet PC has attempted to spread the image of a window or desktop beyond the screen area of the active monitor. The display looks dim. Brightness is set too low. The screen is unreadable or distorted. Screen resolution and/or color quality are set incorrectly. Display driver has become corrupted or uninstalled. PEN The Tablet PC digitizer screen doesnt respond to the plastic stylus I use on my PDA. Youre using the wrong input device. The Motion Digitizer Pen tip doesnt line up with the arrow-
cursor when I tap on the screen. The pen and display need recalibrating. 1. Tap the Properties button on the Motion Dashboard. 2. Tap Graphics Options, then Graphics Properties... to open the Properties screen. 3. Select Notebook to make the Tablet PC the primary display. Adjust brightness from the Motion Dashboard. Reset resolution to 1024 x 768 and color quality to 32-bit by opening the Motion Dashboard, Graphics Properties, then the Schemes tab. 1. Open the Windows Control Panel, select Performance and Maintenance (Category View). or System (Classic View). 2. Select the Hardware tab. 3. Select Device Manager. 4. Open Display adapters. 5. Double-tap on an adapter. 6. Select the Driver tab. 7. Choose Update Driver... and follow the Installation Wizard. Only the Motion Digitizer Pen lets you write on the Tablet PC display. The Tablet PC doesnt respond to other tablet pens or to a plastic stylus. Open the Motion Dashboard and select Calibrate. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 77 Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support When I write, I unintentionally click the pen function button while Im writing with the pen. Youre pressing the pen button with your thumb or finger when you write or gripping the pen too tightly and accidentally pressing the pen button. This enables the right-click function of the pen. Try these hints:
Readjust how you hold the pen. Place your fingers on either side of the pen function button when you write. Practice using the pen function button with both your index fin-
ger and thumb to see which you prefer. Relax your grip. Only a light touch is needed to write with the pen. Deactivate the pen right-click function through Tablet and Pen Settings. Instead, press and hold the pen to the display sur-
face to right-click. The pen button doesnt work. I cant get it to right-click. The right-click option for the pen button may be deactivated. You may not be correctly timing clicking the pen button and tapping the pen on the display. The buttons on the Tablet PC dont do what I expect them to do. Button functions have been changed. Re-activate the right-click option:
Double-click the Tablet and Pen Settings icon, select Pen Options, and reselect Use pen button to right-click. Select Apply>OK. To right-click, hold the pen button down and then firmly tap on the display. Double-tap the Tablet and Pen Settings icon, then Tablet Buttons. You can reset the buttons to the defaults. NOTE: Button functions are associated with the orientation in which theyre programmed. INTERFACE/PORTS The system doesnt recognize the PC card Ive inserted. The card is incorrectly inserted. The device is not supported. Eject the card and re-insert it with the label side up. Check Windows XP compatibility. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 78 The system doesnt recognize a USB device. The Tablet PC is sitting in the Motion FlexDock for the LE Series, but the system doesnt recognize any accessory devices, such as the external monitor or DVD/CD RW. AUDIO No sound is coming from the built-
in speakers. No sound is coming from any speakers. Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support Windows XP may take a short time to recognize the device. The accessory isnt connected to the Tablet PC correctly. The correct driver isnt built into Windows XP. The Tablet PC isnt fully seated in the Motion FlexDock for the LE Series. Wait until Windows XP recognizes the device. Check the connection cable and be sure it is inserted into the correct port on the Tablet PC and the accessory device. Use the devices installation CD or check the manufacturers website for the correct driver. Reseat the Tablet PC in the Motion FlexDock for the LE Series. Connecting a headset or external speakers mutes the built-in speakers. Audio volume is too low or has been muted. Disconnect the headset or external speakers if not in use. Open the Motion Dashboard and adjust the speaker volume by sliding the volume slider or uncheck the Mute button. Ive forgotten my BIOS password and cant access my system. The Tablet PC will let you enter several passwords incorrectly before it temporarily locks the system. The program Im working in has stopped responding, but the cursor moves and other programs work. The program has crashed. Turn the Tablet PC off and back on and try re-entering your password
(you can do this as many times as needed). If you have forgotten your password, contact Motion Computing Technical Support for information about unlocking your system at www.motioncomputing.com/
support. Press the Security button (small button with a key icon) on the Tablet PC front panel to open the Task Manager and end the non-
responsive program. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 79 Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support The system seems to be operating more slowly than usual. The hard disk drive is full or nearly full. The disk needs defragmenting. COMMUNICATIONS The wireless communication keeps connecting even when I dont want it to. Data doesnt transfer through the wired Ethernet cable. The default setting is On. The Ethernet cable is not connected correctly. Run the Disk Cleanup utility to clear out unnecessary and temporary files. Remove unneeded programs and files. Run Disk Defragmenter to consolidate files and folders on the hard drive. Consult the Performance and Maintenance section of the Microsoft Help and Support Center. Uncheck the wireless checkboxes in the Motion Dashboard. Reconnect and check the activity LEDs next to the LAN (RJ-45) port. They should flash green and amber. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 80 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support Can I make the battery charge last longer?
Change to the Max Battery power scheme (right-click on the Power/Bat-
tery icon in the system traylocated in the lower-right corner of the dis-
play windowand tap Adjust Power Properties; under Power schemes, tap Max Battery). The Tablet PC comes with Motion Computing Opti-
mized as the default power scheme. Turn on the Ambient Light Sensor on the Motion Dashboard. This will dim the display automatically (when possible) and save battery power. Dim the display brightness by opening the Motion Dashboard and mov-
ing the Display Brightness slider. (You can also double-tap on the Tablet and Pen Settings icon in the system tray and choose the Display tab to get this brightness slider.) Disconnect LAN/modem connections and disable wireless communica-
tions when not in use (uncheck the Wireless checkboxes in the Motion Dashboard). Turn off optional and unnecessary background programs and turn off or unplug accessory equipment from the USB ports. What does the Tablet PC need for use in another country?
Just an outlet adapter, which you can find in airports and travel stores. The AC adapter will adjust automatically to different voltages when plugged into the correct location-appropriate power adapter. Whats the best way to clean the standard display screen?
To clean the acrylic display screen, wipe it with a soft cloth (like the one supplied) onto which you have sprayed a window-type cleaner. Do not spray cleaners, spray/pour any liquid, nor wipe any abrasive cleaner on the screen nor any surface of the Tablet PC. Do not use tissues or paper towels to clean the screen. They contain wood fibers and may scratch the surface. How should I clean the View Anywhere display screen?
To clean the View Anywhere display screen, wipe it with a soft cloth (like the one supplied). If needed, clean with any alcohol-based product recommended for use on anti-reflective glass. Other cleaning products may leave a residue. Do not spray cleaners, spray/pour any liquid, nor wipe any abrasive cleaner on the screen nor any surface of the Tablet PC. Do not use tissues or paper towels to clean the screen. They contain wood fibers and may scratch the surface. Will scratches affect the display/digitizers performance?
Testing has not found appreciable loss of performance on a scratched display. How sensitive is the screen to various elements?
As with any computer or electronic device, the Tablet PC should be protected from liquids, dirt and sand, other contaminants, and extreme heat. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 81 Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support Will the Tablet PC work with any monitor or USB accessory, keyboard, mouse, disk drive, etc?
As long as the devices driver is available either in the Windows XP operating system or from the manufacturer and it carries the Windows XP logo or certification, it should work with your Tablet PC. For more information, see www.microsoft.com/help. Why doesnt the Tablet PC or FlexDock have parallel, serial, or PS2 (mouse) ports?
Microsoft Tablet PC certification requires the system to be completely Grab-
and-Gothat is, to be able to dock with and undock from all accessories without putting the system into suspend or shutting it down. Connection through legacy ports (serial, parallel, PS2) often requires suspending or restarting the system, which prevents you from moving between desktop mode and mobile mode seamlessly in one docking/undocking step. How do I adjust the Tablet PC for left-handed use?
Double-tap on the Tablet and Pen Settings icon in the system tray, located in the lower-right corner of the display window, which opens the Settings window. You can change it for left- or right-handed use as well as change the location of the menus. Then, make sure you recalibrate the pen. Standard and Extended Warranty and Insurance Programs Motion Computing currently provides limited warranties on Motion products and accessories. See the Warranty packaged with your Motion product or accessory or visit our website at www.motioncomputing.com. In addition, Motion Computing offers extended warranties along with various screen and configuration insurance programs. Visit our website at www.motioncomputing.com/support. MOTION WARRANTIES MOTION COMPUTING SUPPORT If you need assistance or answers to frequently asked questions about your Motion Tablet PC, visit www.motioncomputing.com/support. We also offer a Knowledge Base of additional information that may help with your problem. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 82 Appendix B Motion Tablet PC Specifications Appendix B Motion Tablet PC Specifications Refer to the Motion Computing website at www.motioncomputing.com for the latest information and specifications for your Tablet PC. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 83 Motion Computing - Support Motion recommends Microsoft Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005. MOTION SUPPORT 2005 Motion Computing, Inc | Legal Terms | Privacy | Site Map http://www.motioncomputing.com/support/2/21/2005 9:51:45 AM Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. For operation within 5.15 ~ 5.25GHz frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. IMPORTANT NOTE:
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device complies with FCC RF Exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment, under 47 CFR 2.1093 paragraph (d)(2). This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
| 1 2 | User manual WLAN rev | Users Manual | 979.70 KiB | / January 08 2005 |
chapter 1 getting to know the basics C H A P T E R O N E GETTING TO KNOW THE BASICS This chapter introduces the features and components of the computer. 1-1 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Performance Features
High Performance Processor The notebook PC is equipped with a powerful Intel processor of the latest sub-micron process, processor technologies, and high bus bandwidths.
Large LCD Display The computer is equipped with a large 16-inch TFT high-resolution display panel for clear text and brilliant colors.
Expandability The system offers upgradeable hard disk drive and 2 DDR SDRAM sockets for expansion, allowing the user to easily increase the storage and system capacities as the need arises.
Swappable Device Bay The swappable device bay allows user to add an additional hard disk drive module for increased storage capacity. 1-2 chapter 1 getting to know the basics
Built-in Multifunction Card Reader (Optional) Some system may come with a multiple card reader, which supports SD, MS, MMC Card formats. This allows user to access a wide array of portable memory devices available today.
Communication Features The system provides built-in Ethernet network adapter for local network and 56K modem.
Firewire (IEEE1394 / 1394a) and USB2.0 ports In addition to a full array of built-in I/O ports, the computer offers IEEE1394 for ultra high-speed connection to high bandwidth digital video devices and USB2.0 ports to connect to any USB-based peripheral devices.
Wireless LAN (Optional) or Bluetooth (Optional) The optional internal Wireless LAN module allows your notebook to connect wirelessly to other 802.11-enabled systems, devices, or network. Alternatively, the system may come with an optional Bluetooth module.
TV Tuner (Optional) The optional TV Tuner module allows user to watch TV or cable programs, record TV, and capture analog video signals to the hard drive or to the recordable optical drive
(optional device). 1-3 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Bottom View 1. Ventilation Grill The fan grill is where air is exchanged to dissipate the internal heat. Do not block this airway completely. 2. Swappable Device Bay and Latch Push the latch and pull on the drive hard case to remove the swappable device. Note: The optical drive resides in the Swappable Device Bay. Additionally, you may also purchase an optional hard drive module to be used in this bay. 1-12 chapter 1 getting to know the basics 3. Hard Disk Drive This is the systems hard drive module. The hard disk drive stores all the system data. The hard disk drive can be upgraded to a larger capacity. (See Chapter 4 for instructions on a hard drive upgrade.) 4. Battery Pack and Battery Latch The battery pack is a built-in power source for the notebook. Slide the battery latch to release the battery pack. 1-13 chapter 1 getting to know the basics AC Adapter 1. DC-out Connector The DC-out connector docks to the power jack (DC-in) on the computer. 2. LED Lamp The LED lamp appears green when the unit is plugged into a valid AC source. 3. Adapter The adapter converts alternating current into constant DC voltage for the computer. 4. AC Plug The AC plug plugs to the AC wall outlet. Warning: Make sure you are using a standard 3-prong AC wall socket with a ground pin. If not, you may feel a slight tingling sensation on any of the computers metal parts such as the I/O ports. This is caused by leakage current when the AC adapter is not properly grounded (via the ground pin). However, the amount of leakage current is within the safety regulation and is not harmful to human body. 1-14 chapter 1 getting to know the basics TV Tuner / Video Capturing Module and Video / Audio Input Breakout Cable (Optional Device) Your system may a video-capturing module built-in. To record or watch TV programs, connect the external TV Tuner Module to the TV Tuner port on the notebook. If the device driver and application have not been installed to your system, you may need to do so via the factory CD-ROM disc when you first power up the notebook. To Notebook External TV Tuner Module Cable in /
Antenna S-Video in Video in Audio Right in Audio Left in Alternatively, you may also use the Video / Audio Input Breakout Cable to connect to external video sources, such as a camcorder, DVD, or VCR. To Notebook S-Video in Video in (Yellow) Audio Left in (White) Audio Right in (Red) 1-15 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Remote Control (Optional Device) If your system comes with a TV Tuner / Video Capturing module, the remote control can be used to play or record TV programs. You may need to install the device driver and recording application before the remote control can be used. See the following illustration for a general description of the keys. See section elsewhere in this chapter for TV playback or record functions or see the devices CD-ROM or help screen in the application for detailed instructions. Note: Your system may come with a different remote control. Please consult the user manual in the factory CD-ROM disc. 1-16 chapter 1 getting to know the basics How to Use the Romote, Watch TV and Record Video Clips The following is a brief guide.
You need to install the cards driver and recording application from PixelViews installation CD-ROM disk.
You need to install a utility program called TV Card or PixelView in order to use the cards function.
Connect a video source, cable, or antenna to the TV Tuner Module.
The TV Tuner Module is either NTSC or PAL compliant.
The recorded video clip is in .AVI format.
For more detail description of the TV functions, please consult the programs built-in on-line Help manual.
When the remote control driver is properly, the Remote Master icon will reside on the task bar. See below.
You may program the keys on the Remote by double-click the Remote Master icon. See below. 1-17 chapter 1 getting to know the basics
You may need to make sure that the TV Card is set to the correct region for it to tune-in accurately. Go to [Start >
Programs > TV Card > SW Configuration]. See below.
Press TV button on the remote and the PixelView TV Card application will start. Or, simply go to [Start >
Programs > TV Card > TV Card] to launch the application. See below. 1-18 chapter 1 getting to know the basics
If you are running TV Card application the first time, press TV setup button on the PixelView video panel to scan all available channels. Note: For additional information regarding the TV viewing, recording, and remote control operations, please consult the Help Menu in the application and/or additional literature. 1-19 chapter 1 getting to know the basics LED Status Indicator The LED Status Indicator displays the operating status of your notebook. When a certain function is enabled, an LED will light up. The following section describes its indication. System Status Indicator LED Graphic Symbol Indication Green light indicates the hard drive is being accessed. Green light indicates the optical drive is being accessed. Green light indicates the numeric keypad is activated. Green light indicates the cap-lock is activated. Green light indicates the scroll-lock is activated. 1-20 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Power Indicator LED Graphic Symbol Indication Persistent green light indicates Power On. Light-off indicates the notebook is in Power Off mode. Blinking green light indicates the battery power is currently low. Blinking orange light indicates the battery is being charged (the system is OFF.) Blinking orange light indicates the battery is being charged (the system is ON.) Persistent green light indicates the notebook is neither in Power Saving mode nor in suspend mode. Blinking green light indicates the notebook is in suspend mode. Light-off indicates the notebook is in Power Saving mode. 1-21 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Keyboard Features Function Keys (Quick Keys) Graphic Symbol Action System Control Fn + F1 Enters Suspend Mode. Fn + F3 Fn + F4 Turns Battery Warning Beep on or off. Changes Display Mode:
LCD-only, CRT-only and LCD&CRT. Turns Speaker Volume up. Fn + F5 Turns Speaker Volume down. Fn + F6 Increases Display Brightness. Fn + F7 Fn + F8 Decreases Display Brightness. Num Lock Enables the embedded keypad to work in numeric mode. The keys act like numeric keypads in a calculator. Use this mode when you need to do a lot of numeric data entry. An alternative would be to connect an external numeric keypad. Scroll Lock Press the Scroll Lock key and to move one then press or line up or down. Note: For various system controls, press the Fn (Function) key and the Fx key simultaneously. 1-22 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Windows Keys Your keyboard also has two Windows keys:
1. Start Key This key allows you to pull up the Windows Start Menu at the bottom of the taskbar. 2. Application Menu Key This key brings up the popup menu for the application, similar to a click of the right mouse button. Embedded Numeric Keypad Press Num Lock to enable the embedded numeric keypad. The numbers are printed in upper right corner of a key, in a color different from the alphabets. This key pad is complete with arithmetic operators (+, -, * , /). Press Num Lock to revert to normal character keys. 7 8 9
*
4 5 6 1 2 3
-
+
0
.
/
Num Lock Enter 1-23 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Touch Pad with Page Up / Page Down Function The built-in touch pad, which is a PS/2-compatible pointing device, senses movement on its surface. As you move your fingertip on the surface of the pad, the cursor responds accordingly. The following items teach you how to use the touch pad:
1. Move your finger across the touch pad to move the cursor. 2. Press buttons to select or execute functions. These two buttons are similar to the left and right buttons on a mouse. Tapping on the touch pad twice produces is similar to clicking the left button of a mouse. 3. Press Page Up / Down button to move up or down a page. Function Left Button Right Button Page Up /
Down Button Equivalent Tapping Action Tap twice (at the same speed as double-clicking the mouse button) Tap once Tap twice quickly and on the second tap hold finger to the touch pad to drag the cursor Execution Click twice quickly Selection Click once Drag Click and hold to drag the cursor Access Context Menu Move One Page Up or Down Click once Click upper portion to move up a page Click lower portion to move down Tips on Using the Touch Pad:
1. The double-click speed is timed. If you double-click too slowly, your notebook responds as if you single-clicked twice. 2. Keep your fingers dry and clean when using the touch pad. Also keep the surface of touch pad clean and dry to prolong its life. 3. The touch pad is sensitive to finger movements. Hence, the lighter the touch, the better the response. Heavy touch does not produce better response. 1-24 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Graphic Subsystem Your computer uses a high performance 16-inch active matrix TFT panel with high resolution and multi-million colors for comfortable viewing. The nVidia GeForce FX Go5600 or ATI Mobility Radeon 9?00 video graphics accelerator, which is Microsoft DirectX 9 compatible, performs graphic rendering at a lighting-fast speed. Adjusting the Display Brightness The notebook uses special key combinations, called hot keys, to control brightness. Press Fn+F7 to increase the brightness. Press Fn+F8 to decrease the brightness. Note: To maximize your battery operating time, set the brightness to the lowest comfortable setting, so that the internal backlight uses less power. Extending the Life of the TFT Display Device Observe the following guidelines to maximize the life of the backlight in the display. 1. Set the brightness to the lowest comfortable setting
(Fn+F8). 2. When working at your desk, connect your notebook to an external monitor and disable the internal display Fn+ F4. 3. Do not disable the suspend time-outs. 4. attached, change to suspend mode when not in use. If you are using AC power and have no external monitor 1-25 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Opening and Closing the Display Panel To open the display, slide the LCD latch to the right and lift up the lid. Then tilt it to a comfortable viewing position. To close the display cover, fold it down gently until the LCD latches click into place. Warning: To avoid damaging the display, do not slam it when closing. Do not place any object on top of the computer when the display is closed 1-26 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Audio Subsystem Your computers audio subsystem is Sound Blaster Pro-compatible. Adjusting the Volume Manually To increase the volume, press Fn+ F5. To decrease the volume, press Fn+F6. Adjusting the Audio Volume in Windows 1. Click the speaker symbol in the task tray in Windows. 2. Drag the volume control bar up or down to adjust the volume. 3. To temporarily silence the speaker without changing the volume setting, click Mute. Adjusting the Audio Volume Using the Volume Dial Rotate the Volume Dial (located on the right edge of the notebook) to adjust the speaker volume. Voice Recording A built-in microphone allows you to record sound. You will need to use audio processing software to enable the built-in microphone. For example, you may use Microsoft Sound Recorder. 1-27 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Modem Your computer comes with a 56K V.90 internal fax/modem and a phone jack (RJ-11), which is located on the right rear side of your computer. Use a telephone cable to connect the computer to the telephone wall outlet. Connecting the Modem 1. Plug one end of the phone line into the modem port located on the rear side of the computer. (For EMI compliance, you need to clip the included EMI CORE to the phone line.) 2. Plug the other end of the line into the analog phone wall outlet. Depending on where your computer is used, you may need to change settings in the modem. Correct setting will allow you to maintain a stable connection in a country where its telecommunication system may be different to others. To change the modem setting, do the following:
1. Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel] and double-click on Modem Settings icon. You will see a similar dialog box. 2. Click on the pull-down menu and select the country where it is applicable. Click on OK to exit. 1-28 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Ethernet Your computer is equipped with a 10/100Base-TX Fast Ethernet network adapter. Connect the active LAN cable to the RJ-45 LAN port located on the left rear side of the computer. This allows you to access and transmit data in the local area network. Connecting to the Network Use Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Ethernet cable only. 1. Insert one end of the UTP cable into the network connector until the connector snaps securely into the receptacle. 2. Either connect the other end of the cable to an RJ-45 jack wall outlet or to an RJ-45 port on a UTP concentrator or hub in the network. Cabling Restriction for Networks The following restrictions should be observed for 100BASE-TX networks:
The maximum cable run length is 100 meters(m) (328 feet[ft]).
For 100-Mbps operations, use Category 5 wiring and connections. Note: Consult Windows manual and / or Novell Netware users guide for the software installation, configuration, operation of the network. 1-29 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature C H A P T E R T W O BIOS SETUP AND SECURITY FEATURE In this chapter, you will learn how to enter the BIOS Setup Menu and manipulate various hardware control settings. You will also learn how to use the built-in security features. 2-1 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature The Setup Utility is a hardware configuration program built into your computers BIOS (Basic Input/Output System). It runs and maintains a variety of hardware functions. It is a menu-driven software, which allows you to easily configure and change the settings. The BIOS contains manufactures default settings for the computers standard operations. However, there are occasions when you may be required to modify the default settings in the BIOS. For example, you may need to configure the BIOS power management (APM) settings if you are using DOS, Windows 3.1, or non-Windows operating system. The BIOS allows you to set up passwords to limit access to users. This is an important feature because a great deal of vital information is carried within the computer nowadays. Unauthorized access can be prevented. Later in this chapter, you will learn how to use this security feature. 2-2 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature Entering the BIOS Setup Screen First turn on the power. When the BIOS performs the POST
(Power-On Self Test), press Del key quickly to activate the AMI BIOS Setup Utility. Note: You may need to press F2 key fairly quickly. Once the system begins to load Windows, you may have to retry by cycle-power on again Leaving the BIOS Setup Screen When you have finished modifying the BIOS settings, exit the BIOS. It takes a few seconds to record changes in the CMOS. BIOS Action Keys Function Key Command Exit General Help Save and Exit Select a field Select an item Select an item Lower value Higher value ESC F1 F10
<Tab>
-
+
Description Leaves a sub-menu to return to the previous menu OR exits the BIOS setup while saving changes. Shows the Help Screen Saves changes and reboots the computer. Selects the next field. Selects the next upper item. Selects the next lower item. Selects the next value within a field. Selects the next value within a field. 2-3 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature Modifying the BIOS Settings The AMIBIOS setup main menu is subdivided into sub-menus. Each menu item is described in this section. Main Setup Under this menu, you may change time/date and view basic processor and system memory information. Item Date Selections /
Sub-menu N/A Time N/A Description Type in the current date, in MM/DD/YY format. Type in the current date, in HH:MM:SS format. Advanced Setup Description Choose LCD+CRT for TFT screen output and VGA display output. Enable or disable the built-in touchpad. Description Item Display Type Touch Pad Support Selections /
Sub-menu LCD CRT LCD+CRT Disabled Enabled IDE Configuration Item Selections /
Sub-menu 2-4 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature Auto ARMD ATAPI CDROM Not Installed Primary IDE Master Secondary IDE Master Primary Master is where BIOS tries to boot from first. The primary master controls the hard drive. Normally, Auto is selected. The secondary master controls the ATAPI CD-ROM drive. Normally, Auto is selected. Super IO Configuration (Port Address) Item Description Selections /
Sub-menu IR Mode SIR FIR Disabled 378 / IRQ7 278 / IRQ5 On Board Parallel Port Parallel Port Mode Normal ECP+EPP EPP ECP Choose Fast IR for greater data bandwidth.
[Disabled]:
The port is disabled. Or you may choose a value for the parallel port. You may choose any one of these settings. ECP offers the best performance. About Hard Disk Drive Setting Select Auto to let BIOS configure the drive parameters automatically. Only for certain old types of hard disk drive will you need to modify the settings. After pressing Enter on [Hard Disk], BIOS display the drive parameters. If the detected drive parameters are not correct or if youre trying to enable the enhanced IDE feature, you may still change the value manually.
32 Bit Mode:
PIO Mode:
Select On to allow data transmission in 32-bit format. 2-5 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature Normally use Auto To let BIOS decide the PIO mode setting. If the selected PIO mode is not supported by the IDE drive, the hard disk drive may not work properly.
S.M.A.R.T. Mode:
DMA Mode:
Self-diagnostic and self-monitoring features are built into newer type hard drive. Select Auto to enable S.M.A.R.T. The hard drive in your computer support Ultra DMA mode.
Block Multi-Sector Transfer:
The hard drive in your computer support Multi-sector data Transfer. Note: AMIBIOS automatically sets IDE drive parameters. Select Auto whenever possible. An incorrect setting make cause the computer to malfunction. Boot Setup Boot Device Priority Item 1st Boot Device 2nd Boot Device 3rd Boot Device 2-6 Selections /
Sub-menu ATAPI CDROM Hard Drive
??NSC DP83815/6 MacPhyter??
Disabled Removable Dev. Description Set the type of device for the 1st drive BIOS attempts to boot from. If NSC MacPhyter is selected, system will attempt to load boot sector from the Ethernet port. Set the type of device for the 2nd drive BIOS attempts to boot from. Set the type of device for the 3rd drive BIOS attempts to boot from. chapter 2 bios setup and security feature Note: If you select NSC DP83815/83816MacPhyter, the system will attempt to boot from the network. Note: When the BIOS performs POST, you may also press F8 Key to enable the Boot Device selection menu. You may choose ATAPI CDROM, Hard Drive, or NSC MacPhyter as the first storage device to boot from. If you have already connected a USB Floppy Disk Drive before powering up, it will appear as a Removable Device in the Boot Device selection menu. Security Setup Boot Settings Configuration Item Selections /
Sub-menu N/A N/A N/A Disabled Enabled Change Supervisor Password Change User Password Clear User Password Boot Sector Virus Protection Description Install or Change the Password Install or Change the Password Install or Change the Password To enable or disable the boot sector protection. When Enabled, BIOS gives a warning when any program attempts to rewrite or delete the boot sector. 2-7 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature Note: About Boot Sector Virus Protection:
If enabled, the following warning message appears when a program attempts to alter the boot sector. You may have to enter N several times to prevent the boot sector write. Boot Sector Write!!!
Possible VIRUS: Continue (Y/N)? _ The following warning message appears when a program attempts to format the hard disk drive. Format!!!
Possible VIRUS: Continue (Y/N)? _ Using Password Protection Two Levels of Password Protection are available. The BIOS provides both a Supervisor and a User password. If you try to activate both passwords, the Supervisor password must be set first. The passwords activate two different levels of protection:
1. System always asks for password every time it is powered on. 2. System asks for password only when you attempt to enter BIOS utility. The passwords are encrypted and stored in NVRAM. Make sure you write them down or memorize them. If you lost the passwords, the computer may need to be sent back to the factory or to an authorized service dealer to reset the passwords. Power Setup Item Power Button Mode Selections /
Sub-menu On/Off Suspend Description
[On/Off]: When the power button is pressed, the system is turned off.
[Suspend]: When the power button is pressed, the system enters the suspend mode. 2-8 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature Note: The Suspend Mode selection in BIOS only applies to older Windows version
(such as Windows 3.1 or Windows 95 or NT4) or non-Windows operating system. In Windows ME / 98SE / 2000 / XP, suspend mode and settings are determined by settings in the Power Options Properties (Start > Control Panel > Power Options). Exit Setup Item Saves Changes and Exit Selections /
Sub-menu N/A Discard Changes and Exit Discard Changes Load Optimal Defaults N/A N/A N/A Description After you have completed the BIOS settings, select this item to save all settings, exit BIOS Setup utility, and reboot. New system settings will take effect on next power-up. Select this item if you intend to exit the BIOS Setup utility without making any changes to the current settings. Discards changes done so far to any of the setup questions. Load Optimal Default value for all the setup questions. F9 key can be used for this operation. 2-9 chapter 3 battery power & power management C H A P T E R T H R E E BATTERY POWER & POWER MANAGEMENT In this chapter, you will learn the fundamentals of power management and how to use it to achieve longer battery life. 3-1 chapter 3 battery power & power management In this chapter, you will learn how to operate your notebook on battery power, how to handle and maintain the battery pack, and learn about the systems power saving features. TFT display, central processor, hard disk drive are the major hardware subsystems that consume the most power. Power management deals how these key components should behave to conserve power. For example, you can have the system turn off its display after 2 minutes of inactivity to save power. Efficient power management can help you work longer sessions before having to recharge the battery. The Battery Pack Lithium-Ion Battery Your notebook uses a twelve-cell Lithium-Ion battery pack that provides power when you dont have access to an AC outlet. Note: It is necessary that you charge the battery pack for at least 10 hours before using it for the first time. Note: In the Standby Suspend mode, a fully charged battery loses its power in roughly 1/2 day or less. When not being used, the batterys power will deplete in 1-2 month. 3-2 chapter 3 battery power & power management Battery Low-Power Warning 1. Low Battery Warning Low battery condition occurs when battery power is reduced to 6%. The green power LED indicator blinks and the system beeps once every 16 seconds or so. 2. Very Low Battery Warning Very Low battery condition occurs at 3 % power remaining. The power LED indicator blinks and the system beeps at 4-second interval. When the notebook warns you of its low battery condition, you will have about 3-5 minutes to save your current work. Warning: Do not expose battery packs to temperatures below 0 degree Celsius (32 degree F) or above 60 degree C (140F). This may adversely affect the battery pack. Note: You may use Fn+F3 function keys to disable battery-warning
(low power) beeps. 3-3 chapter 3 battery power & power management Installing and Removing the Battery Pack Note: The system is not designed for frequent battery pack removal. When you need to remove the battery pack, please observe the following steps. To Remove the Battery Pack:
1. Place the notebook bottom-side up on a flat and secured surface. 2. Push the latch and pull the batterys hard case away from the notebook. 1 2 3-4 chapter 3 battery power & power management To Install the Battery Pack:
1. Place the notebook bottom-side up on a flat and secured surface. 2. Carefully insert the battery pack into the battery compartment of the notebook. Charging the Battery and Charging Time To charge the battery, while the battery pack is in the notebook, plug the AC adapter into the notebook and an electrical outlet. The charging time is approximately 3~4.5 hours when the notebook is turned off and approximately 8-10 hours when the notebook is turned on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery charge indicator becomes dark (off). Note: If system runs at heavy loading or in a high temperature environment, the battery may not be fully charged. You need to continue to charge it with the AC adapter plugged in until the charging LED turns off. 3-5 chapter 3 battery power & power management Checking the Battery Level You can check the remaining battery power in the Windows battery status indicator, which is located at the lower right-hand corner of the task bar. (If you do not see a battery or AC-in icon on the task tray, go to Power Options Properties box and click on the Advanced tab. Check off ``Always show icon on the task bar``.) Alternatively, you can access the power meter by clicking the Power Options icon in the Windows Control Panel. Prolonging the Batterys Life and Usage Cycles The life expectancy of the battery is approximately 300 Make good use of the power management function. Save Use the AC adapter wherever AC wall outlet is available. Purchase additional battery pack. Store the battery pack in room temperature. Higher There are ways you can do to prolong the use of battery.
This will ensure uninterrupted computing.
temperature tends to deplete the batterys power faster.
To Disk (Hibernate) saves the most energy by storing current system contents in a hard disk space reserved for this function.
recharges.
manual on how to care for the battery pack. Note: Read Section Protecting Your Notebook in the beginning of this manual for tips about how to maintain the battery pack. Note: To achieve optimal battery performance, you may need to do a battery calibration at a 3-month interval. To do this:
1. Fully charge the battery. 2. Then discharge the battery by entering the BIOS setup screen. (Press F2 key as soon as you turn on the computer. And let it remain at the setup screen until the battery runs out. 3. Fully charge the battery again. See the notices section in the beginning of the user 3-6 chapter 3 battery power & power management Using Windows Power Options Windows Power Management provides basic power saving features. In the Windows Power Options Properties [Start >
Settings > Control Panel > Power Options] dialogue box, you may enter time-out values for display and hard disk drive. Windows power manager saves power by turning off hard drive after 1 minute of inactivity, for example. Windows Power Schemes The power management control panel in Windows XP, known as Power Schemes, is designed to provide the user with an easy-to-use interface. The Power Schemes tab can be found in the Power Options Properties panel that is accessible via the control panel window. Schemes are easy to understand, based on notebook usage scenarios, and control not only processor power usage but other system peripherals as well. Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel] and double-click the Power Options icon. Always on mode puts the processor into maximum performance mode, which provides no power saving. The other schemes control processor performance based on demand. For example, Max Battery mode lowers the processors speed and voltage to conserve power as much as possible. 3-7 chapter 3 battery power & power management In this dialog box, you can manually set the LCD and hard drives time-out values in the Plugged in column and in the Running on batteries column. Lower time-out values will save more battery power. Note: Also consult Windows user guide for more information on how to use Windows power management functions. Note: Actual dialogue box shown above may appear slightly different. 3-8 chapter 3 battery power & power management Suspend Mode Standby Suspend The system automatically enters this mode after a period of inactivity, which is set in the Power Schemes dialog box. In Standby mode, hardware devices, such as display panel and hard disk, are turned off to conserve energy. Hibernate Suspend In this mode, all system data are saved in the hard disk before powering down. When this mode is activated, all system state and contents are saved to the hard disk drive after a period of inactivity defined by the user. No power or very little power is drawn from the battery module under this mode. However, depending on how much RAM that have been installed on your computer, the amount of time the system requires to restore all its previous contents can range from 5 to 20 seconds. For Windows ME / 2000 / XP users, hibernation is handled by the operating system; therefore, no special disk partition or disk file is necessary. If you wish to activate Hibernate mode, you need enable Hibernate Support in the Hibernate tab of the Power Options menu. 3-9 chapter 3 battery power & power management Note: Do not install or remove the memory module when the system is in the suspend mode. Note: Actual dialogue box shown above may appear slightly different. 3-10 chapter 3 battery power & power management Power Button Action The notebook PCs power button can be set to turn off the system or activate the suspend mode. Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel > Power Options]
and click on the Advanced tab. In the pull-down menu, select how you wish the power button to work as. Note: Actual dialogue box shown above may appear slightly different. Warning: In the When I close the lid of my portable computer pull-down menu, DO NOT select Do nothing otherwise the system will still run at high speed while the processors fan grill is fully blocked by the closed LCD panel. The heat will damage the LCD panel. 3-11 chapter 3 battery power & power management Low Battery Warning You can define when and how the system warns you of its battery-low condition. Go to the Alarms tab in the Power Options Properties box. If you wish to hear audible beeps, click on the Alarm Action button and put a check on Sound Alarm. Note: Consult Windows user guide for more information on how to use Windows power management functions. Note: Actual dialogue box shown above may appear slightly different. 3-12 chapter 3 battery power & power management Power Manu Quick Access Instead of making specific selections in the Power Options Properties box, you can quickly and easily specify which pre-set power saving function you desire by clicking on the Battery icon at the lower right-hand corner of the task bar. (If you do not see a battery or AC-in icon, go to Power Options Properties box and click on the Advanced tab. Check off ``Always show icon on the task bar``.) Select Max Battery if you want the system to enter suspend mode more often. Or, select Always On if your notebook PC is plugged into an AC power source. Note: Actual dialogue box shown above may appear slightly different. 3-13 chapter 4 upgrading your computer C H A P T E R F O U R UPGRADING YOUR COMPUTER In this chapter, you will learn how to upgrade the DRAM, hard disk drive, and to install the optional wireless LAN mini PCI card. 4-1 chapter 4 upgrading your computer Upgrading the Hard Disk Drive Replacing the original drive with one of larger capacity can increase the hard drive capacity of your computer. The computer uses a 9.5 mm (height), 2.5-inch Ultra ATA-66 / 100 / 133 type hard disk. Be sure to make a backup copy of all your data before attempting this operation. Warning: Hard drive upgrade is a delicate process. Please observe the following instructions carefully or have a qualified technician install it for you. Damages due to mishandling of this procedure are NOT covered by the manufactures warranty. Warning: Apply care when handling the hard disk.
Mishandling of the hard drive can result in permanent loss of data. Make a backup copy of the drive s content before you remove it. Do not drop or apply any shock. Do not press on the cover. Do not touch the connector with your fingertips. Note: Certain models that come with the IBM-brand hard drive emit a clattering sound when it is being rattled. This is a normal condition. 4-2 chapter 4 upgrading your computer Upgrading the Hard Disk Drive Turn OFF the computer. Unhook the AC cord and all To replace the hard disk drive, do the following:
1. cables/devices attached to the notebook. 2. discharge any static electricity. 3. Locate and remove 2 Screw As on the Metal Cover. Place your hand on a large metal object momentarily to Screw A x2 Metal Cover 4. Remove the Metal Cover. 5. Locate and remove 4 Screw Bs. Gently remove the HDD module from the HDD cable connector. Screw B x2 Hard Drive Module Screw B x2 Remove HDD module from connector 4-3 chapter 4 upgrading your computer Locate and remove 4 Screw Cs from the HDD module. 6. Remove the metal case. Screw C x2 Metal Cover Screw C x2 Re-attach the metal cover to the new hard drive and 7. tighten 4 Screw Cs. Note the green PC board of the hard disk drive is facing against the metal case. 8. Re-attach the HDD Cable Connector to the HDD module. 9. Re-attach and tighten 4 Screw Bs. (If the HDD assembly is not fully inserted into the bay, the screw and its hole will not line up.) 10. Replace the System Device Cover and 2 Screw As. Congratulations! You have now completed the hard drive upgrade. When you boot up the PC, you may need to create a primary HDD partition and reformat the new drive and re-install O/S, drivers, and all the necessary applications. 4-4 chapter 4 upgrading your computer Upgrading the System Memory Many applications will generally run faster when the computers dynamic memory capacity is increased. The computer provides one DDR memory socket, located underneath the System Device Cover. You can increase the amount of memory by replacing the existing one with a dual inline memory module (commonly known as DIMM) of a higher capacity. The DIMM can be 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, or 1024MB in capacity. The DIMM is of type DDR SDRAM, has 200 pins and runs on 2.5V. The DIMM should be PC1600, PC2100, or PC2700 compliant. Warning: Memory upgrade is a delicate process. Please observe the following instructions carefully or have a qualified technician install it for you. Damages due to mishandling of this procedure are NOT covered by the manufactures warranty. Warning: Changing memory while your computer is in suspend or power-saving mode may cause permanent damage to the hardware. Make sure you turn off the power and unplug the AC cord before proceeding with a memory upgrade. Warning: You should only use the DIMM module that is approved by the reseller or the manufacturer; otherwise the system may become unstable. 4-5 chapter 4 upgrading your computer Installing a memory module (DIMM) into the system Power OFF the notebook. Unplug the AC cord and all To install the DIMM, do the following:
1. cables/devices attached to the notebook. 2. discharge any static electricity. Place the notebook on a flat surface and fully open the LCD lid. 3. keyboard. Find the keyboard latches near the upper edge of the Place your hand on a large metal object momentarily to Latch A Latch A The latch is spring-loaded. It will retract when pressed 4. and revert back to its original position when released. Using a small blade to press the latch inward. The keyboard tray should pop up slightly over the latch. If the keyboard tray does not pop up, try to gently lift it up just over the latch. Repeat the step for the other keyboard latches. 5. Carefully lift up the bottom edge and position the keyboard out of the way and the following is revealed. 4-6 chapter 4 upgrading your computer Metal Cover Metal Cover Screw A x3 Remove 3 Screw As and remove the DIMM Metal Cover. 6. The DIMM socket is now seen as shown below. DIMM Socket x2 If you need to remove an old DIMM from the socket, 7. press out on the latches located on both edges of the socket at the same time. The DIMM should pop up to an angle of 30 degree (see diagram below.). Pull the DIMM module out of the memory socket. Store away the DIMM for the future use. 4-7 chapter 4 upgrading your computer 8. Install the new DIMM module into the memory socket. The DIMM will only fit in one orientation. Insert the DIMM at an angle of approximately 30 degrees into the empty memory socket. Then press it firmly so that the contact edge is driven into the receiving socket. Notch Pivot the DIMM until the latches on both sides of the 9. socket snap into place. Note: Notice the notch on the DIMM. The notches should fit nicely with the socket. 10. Replace DIMM Metal Cover and 3 Screw As. Put the keyboard back to its position. Make sure the upper edge of the keyboard now resides under the spring-loaded latches. Congratulations! You have just completed the memory upgrade. When you boot up the computer, you should expect to see an increase in DRAM capacity. Note: Your computer has been tested with a wide range of DIMM on the market. However, not all memory modules are compatible. Check with your system vendor for a list of compatible DIMM for your computer. 4-8 chapter 5 trouble shooting C H A P T E R F I V E TROUBLE SHOOTING In this chapter, you will learn how to solve common hardware and software problems. 5-1 chapter 5 trouble shooting Your computer has been fully tested and complies with the system specifications before shipping. However, incorrect operations and/or mishandling may cause problems. This chapter provides a reference for identifying and correcting common hardware and software problems that you may encounter. When you encounter a problem, you should first try to go through the recommendations in this chapter. Instead of returning the computer and waiting for repair, you may easily solve the problems by considering the following scenarios and possible solutions. If the error continues, contact your reseller for service information. Before taking further actions, consider the following suggestions:
Check to see if the problem persists when all the external devices are removed.
Check to see that the green light indicator on the AC adapter is lit.
Check to see the power cord is properly plugged to the wall outlet and to the computer.
Check to see the power indicator of the computer is on.
Check to see if your keyboard is operational by pressing and holding any key.
Check for any incorrect or loose cable connections. Make sure the latches on the connectors latch securely on to the receptor end.
Be sure you have not performed an incorrect setting on the 5-2 chapter 5 trouble shooting hardware devices in the BIOS Setup utility. A faulty setting may cause the system to misbehave. If you are not sure of the changes you made, try to restore all the settings to factory defaults.
Be sure all the device drivers are installed properly. For example, without the audio driver properly installed, the speakers and microphone will not work.
If external devices such as USB camera, scanner, printer do not function correctly when connected to the system, it is usually the devices own problem. Consult the devices manufacturer first.
Some software programs, which have not gone through rigorous coding and testing, may cause problems during your routine use. Consult the software vendor for problem solving.
Legacy peripheral are not plug-and-play capable. You need to restart the system with these devices powered up and connected first.
Be sure to go to BIOS SETUP and load DEFAULT SETTING after BIOS re-flash.
Be sure the Quick Key Lockout Switch on the bottom of the computer is not engaged; otherwise the quick keys will not work. 5-3 chapter 5 trouble shooting Audio Problems No speaker output -
Turn up the volume dial located at the right edge of the computer. See Chapter 1 for its location.
Software volume control is turned down in Microsoft Sound System or is muted. Double-click the speaker icon on the lower right corner of the taskbar to see if the speaker has been muted or turned down all the way.
Most audio problems are software-related. If your computer worked before, chances are software may have been set incorrectly.
Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel] and double-click the Sounds and Audio Devices icon. In the Audio page, make sure that C-Media Wave Device is the default playback device. Sound cannot be recorded -
Double-click the speaker icon on the lower right corner of the taskbar to see if the microphone has been muted. 1. Click Options and select Properties. 2. Select Recording and click the OK button. 3. After Click OK button, the recording volume control panel will appear.
Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel] and double-click the Multimedia icon (or Sounds and Audio Devices icon). In the Volume or Audio page, make sure that C-Media Wave Device is the default recording device. 5-4 chapter 5 trouble shooting Hard Disk Problems The hard disk drive does not work or is not recognizable -
If you had just performed a hard disk upgrade, make sure the hard drive connector is not loose and the hard disk drive is also correctly seated. Remove it and reinsert it firmly, and restart your PC. (Refer to Chapter 4 for details.)
The new HDD may need to be partitioned and reformatted. O/S and drivers will need to be re-installed as well.
Check the hard disk indicator LED. When you access a file, the LED lamp should light up momentarily.
The new HDD may be defective or is not compatible.
If your computer has been subjected to static electricity or physical shock, you may have damaged the disk drive. The hard drive is making abnormal whining noises -
You should back up your files as soon as possible.
Make sure the source of noise is indeed from the hard drive and not the fan or other devices. The hard disk drive has reached its capacity -
Run Disk Cleanup utility in Windows. [Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Cleanup] The system will prompt you for what to do.
Archive files or programs that you had no longer used by moving them to an alternative storage medium (floppy disk, optical record-able disk, etc.) or uninstall programs that no longer use.
Many browsers store files in the hard drive as a cache to speed up the performance. Check the programs Online Help 5-5 chapter 5 trouble shooting for instructions on decreasing the cache size or on removing temporary Internet files.
Empty the Recycle Bin to create more disk space. When you delete files, Windows saves them to the Recycle Bin. The hard disk takes longer to read a file -
If you have been using the drive for a period, the files may be fragmented. Go to [Start > Programs > Accessories >
System Tools > Disk Defragmenter] to perform a disk defragmentation. This operation may take a while.
Interrupt requests or problems with other hardware devices may have occupied the CPU and therefore slows down the system performance. The files are corrupted -
Run the Error-checking utility in Windows to check the HDD. Double-click My Computer. Right-click C: and select Properties. Click Check Now in Error-checking in Tools. 5-6 chapter 5 trouble shooting CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, CD-RW, or Combo Drive Problems The CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, or Combo drive does not work -
Try rebooting the system.
The disk is damaged or files are not readable.
After you have inserted a CD-ROM disk, it may take a moment before you can access its content. The drive dose not read any disks -
The CD may not be properly seated in the tray. Make sure the disk is firmly seated onto the spindle.
The disk is damaged or not readable. The disk cannot be ejected -
Normally, it takes a few seconds to eject the disk.
If the disk cannot be ejected, it may be mechanically jammed. Straighten out a paper clip and insert it to a tiny hole next to the eject button. This should reject the disk tray. If not, return the unit for repair. Do not forcefully pull on the disk tray. The CD-RW drive (optional device) cannot record -
You need to purchase and install a burner utility program to record files to a blank media. 5-7 chapter 5 trouble shooting Display Problems The display panel is blank when the system is turned on -
Make sure the computer is not in the Standby or Hibernate suspend modes. The display is turned off to conserve energy in these modes. The screen is difficult to read -
The display resolution should at least be set to at least1024x768 for optimal viewing. 1. the Display icon. 2. 1024x768 and choose at least 256 colors. The screen flickers -
It is normal if the display flickers a few times during shutting down or powering up. Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel] and double-click Under the Settings page, set screen resolution to at least 5-8 chapter 5 trouble shooting Keyboard and Mouse Problems The built-in touch pad performs erratically -
Make sure there is no excess perspiration or humidity on your hand when using the touch pad. Keep the surface of the touch pad clean and dry.
Do not rest your palm or wrist on the surface of the touch pad while typing or using the touch pad. The built-in keyboard accepts no input -
If you are connecting an external keyboard to the system, the built-in keyboard may not work.
Try restarting the system. The characters on the screen repeat while I type.
You may be holding the keys down too long while youre typing.
Keep the keyboard clean. Dust and dirt under the keys could cause them to stick.
Configure the keyboard to wait longer before the auto repeat feature starts. To adjust this feature, Go to [Start >
Settings > Control Panel], and double-click the Keyboard icon. A dialogue box shows up with the adjustable settings for the keyboard. 5-9 chapter 5 trouble shooting CMOS Battery Problem A message CMOS Checksum Failure displays during the booting process or the time (clock) resets when booting -
Try to reboot the system.
If the message CMOS Checksum Failure appears during the booting procedure even after rebooting, it may indicate failure of the CMOS battery. If so, you need to replace the battery. This battery normally lasts two to five years. The battery is of type CR2032 (3V). You may replace it by yourself. The battery is located next to the DDR DRAM socket. See Chapter 4 on how to access the DDR DRAM socket. If you are not sure how this is done, return the notebook to the dealer. 5-10 chapter 5 trouble shooting Memory Problems The POST does not show an increased memory capacity when you have already installed additional memory -
Certain brands of memory module may not be compatible with your system. You should ask your vendor for a list of compatible DIMM.
The memory module may not be installed properly. Go back to Chapter 4 to review the details of this operation.
The memory module may be defective. The O/S issues an insufficient memory error message during operation -
This is often a software or Windows-related problem. A program is draining the memory resources.
Close the application programs youre not using and restart the system.
You need to install additional memory module. For instructions, go to Chapter 4 Upgrading Your Computer. 5-11 chapter 5 trouble shooting Modem Problems The built-in modem does not respond -
Make sure the modem driver is loaded properly.
Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel > Phone and Modem Options] and go to Modems tab. Make sure SmartLink 56K Voice Modem or Uniwill V.90 Modem is listed. Otherwise, click the Add button to add the modem drive, which is located in the factory CD-ROM (or floppy diskette).
Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel > System] and click Device Manager button in the Hardware page to check for possible resource or driver conflict. See Windows on-line help or manual for how to handle such problems.
Make sure the phone line, which the computer is connected to, is working. Connection difficulties -
Be sure to disable Call Waiting on the phone line.
Be sure to have the correct country setting where your computer is used. [Start > Settings > Control Panel > Modem Settings > Configuration] In the Country/Area pull-down menu, select the appropriate country setting.
Excessive line noise might cause the connection to be dropped. To check this, put the regular phone handset on the line and placing a phone call. If you do hear abnormal noise, try to make the modem connection with a different line or contact your local telephony company for service.
Make sure the cable connection is firm.
Try a different receiver number and see if the problem persists. 5-12 chapter 5 trouble shooting Network Adapter / Ethernet Problems The Ethernet adapter does not work -
Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel > System >
Hardware > Device Manager]. Double-click on Network Adapters and check if SiS 900-Based PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter appears as one of the adapters. If it does not exist, Windows has not detected the National Semiconductor Fast Ethernet adapter or the device driver has not been installed properly. If there is a yellow mark or red-cross on the network adapter, it may be a device or resource conflict. Replace or update the device driver from the factory CD-ROM disk or consult Windows manual on how to solve the resource conflict problem.
Make sure the physical connections on both ends of the cable are good.
The hub or concentrator may not be working properly. Check to see if other workstations connected to the same hub or concentrator is working. The Ethernet adapter does not appear to operate in the 100Mbps transmission mode -
Make sure the hub you are using supports 100Mbps operation.
Make sure that your RJ-45 cable meets the 100Base-TX requirements.
Make sure the Ethernet cable is connected to the hub @
socket that supports 100Base-TX mode. The hub may have both 100Base-TX and 100Base-T sockets. 5-13 chapter 5 trouble shooting PC Card / PCMCIA Problems Note: Some system may not have the PC Card Slot option. PC Cards do not function-
Make sure you have properly installed the driver for the card.
Consult the cards manual or contact the vendor for trouble-shooting. The PC card cannot be recognized -
Windows NT4.0 does not support PCMCIA (PC Card) function. You may need an external program for this.
Make sure the card is fully inserted; the outer end of the card should be even with the edge of the computer.
Remove and insert the PC card again.
Make sure there is no IRQ conflict with the card. See Windows on-line help for solving IRQ conflicts.
Reboot the computer and see if the problem persists.
The card may be defective. Try the card on another system, if possible. Windows crashes or freezes when you remove the PC card-
Make sure you have <Stop> the PC card before removing it. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon at the lower right corner of the task bar and select the card you wish to stop. When you click <Close>, in few seconds Windows will prompt you to remove the card. 5-14 chapter 5 trouble shooting Performance Problems The computer becomes hot -
In a 35oC environment, the certain areas of the computers back case are expected to reach 50 degrees.
Make sure the air vents are not blocked.
If the fan does not seem to be working at high temperature (50 degrees Celsius and up), contact the service center.
Certain programs that are processor-intensive may increase the computer temperature to a degree where the computer automatically slows down its CPU clock to protect itself from thermal damage. The program appears stopped or runs very slowly -
Press CTRL+ALT+DEL to see if an application is still responding.
Restart the computer.
This may be normal for Windows when it is processing other CPU-intensive programs in the background or when the system is accessing slow-speed devices such the floppy disk drive.
You may be running too many applications. Try to close some applications or increase system memory for higher performance.
The processor may have been overheated due to the systems inability to regulate its internal heat. Make sure the computers ventilation grills are not blocked. 5-15 chapter 5 trouble shooting Printer Problems The printer does not print -
Make sure the cable connection is secured and the printer is powered up, if the printer is connected via the parallel port.
Run the printer self-test to see if it reports any problem.
Check if the printer displays any error messages. A paper jam may have occurred.
Make sure you have already installed the printer driver.
Try rebooting the system with the printer powered up and connected first. The printer does not print whats on the screen -
The information displayed on the screen may not exactly be the same as what is printed.
If the printer prints extra and strange symbols, it is the result of the cache (garbage) in the printer memory buffer. Cancel all the printer tasks and toggle off the printer power switch to clear up the memory buffer. Then, turn the printer back online and print again.
Make sure you install the correct printer driver. The printer does not respond to infrared communication -
See Infrared Problems listed elsewhere in this chapter. 5-16 chapter 5 trouble shooting Firewire (IEEE1394) and USB2.0 Problems The USB device does not work -
Windows NT 4.0 does not support USB protocols
Check the settings in the Windows Control Panel.
Make sure you have installed the necessary device drivers.
Contact the device vendor for additional support. The IEEE1394 port does not work -
Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel > System >
Hardware > Device Manager]. You should see an entry which reads IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers. If it does not exist, Windows has not detected the host controller or the device driver has not been installed properly. If there is a yellow mark or red-cross on the 1394 host controller, it may be a device or resource conflict. Replace or update the device driver from the factory CD-ROM disk or consult Windows manual on how to solve the resource conflict problem.
Make sure the cable is fully connected.
Make sure you have installed the necessary device drivers.
Contact the device vendor for additional support. 5-17 appendix A product specification A P P E N D I X A PRODUCT SPECIFICATION A-1 appendix A product specification Processor and Core Logic Intel P4 ( 3. 06 GHz), 478 Pins FC-PGA2 Type, 400/533/800 MHz FSB, 512 KB L2 with Error Correction Code SiS 846FX + SiS SB963 chipset with audio, modem LAN, and USB2.0 controllers integrated 400/533/800 MHz Front Side Bus 266/333 MHz DDR interface System Memory DDR SDRAM, 333/266 MHz, PC2700 / PC2100 /
PC1600 compatible 0 / 128 / 256 / 512 / 1024MB, 2.5-Volt 64-bit bus Two 200-pin DIMM sockets, Max 2 GB Display
16-inch (1600x1200 UXGA or 1400x1050 SXGA+) active-matrix TFT display with up to 16M colors or
15.4-inch (1680x1050 WSXGA+ or 1280x800 WXGA) active-matrix TFT display with up to 16M colors
nVidia GeForce FX Go5600 256-bit 2D / 3D graphics accelerator or
ATI Mobility Radeon 9?00 256-bit 2D / 3D graphics accelerator 8X AGP architecture graphics capability Hardware Motion Compensation and IDCT Supported for MPEG1/2 Playback 64MB or 128MB DDR DRAM Direct3D compatible, DirectX compatible
Processor
Core Logic
Memory Type
Default
Memory Expansion
LCD Panel options
Graphic Accelerator Options
AGP Bus
Motion Playback
Frame Buffer
Other Features A-2 appendix A product specification
Chipset
Audio Codec
Sound Capabilities
Chipset
Transmission Rate
Chipset
MAC
PnP Function
Flow Control
Speed Selection
Other Features Audio SiS SB963 integrated audio controller Realtek 8110S DirectSound 3D accelerator SoundBlaster Pro compatible AC97 V2.2 compatible 2 or 4 Stereo Speakers (1 Watt each) Modem SiS SB963 integrated Modem Controller with MDC card, AC97 V2.2 Modem support V.90 / K56flex for download data speed up to 56Kbps. V.34, V.17, V.29 protocol supported LAN / Ethernet SiS SB963 integrated Ethernet function for 10/100Base-TX network standards Realtek 8169S Windows 95 / 98 / ME / 2000 / XP Plug and Play compatible Automatic Jam and auto-negotiation for flow control Auto Negotiation and Parallel detection for automatic speed selection (IEEE 802.3u) High performance 32-bit PCI bus master architecture with integrated DMA controller for low CPU and bus utilization Remote Wake-up Scheme supported Hot Insertion supported A-3 appendix A product specification Firewire IEEE1394(a) SiS SB963 IEEE1394 OHCI Host Controller and Up to 400 Mbps FW802 Expandable up to 63 devices in chains Storage 2.5-inch format hard disk drive 5.25-inch format (12.7mm height) fixed module with 24X speed 5.25-inch format (12.7mm height) fixed module
(Optional Purchase) 5.25-inch format (12.7mm height) fixed module
(Optional Purchase) 5.25-inch format (12.7mm height) fixed module
(Optional Purchase) 5.25-inch format (12.7mm height) fixed module
(Optional Purchase) Keyboard & Touch pad 88/90-key QWERTY keyboard with embedded numeric keypad and Windows keys, 19mm Pitch Built-in Touch Pad with PageUp / PageDown Buttons and Scroll Bar 19.05mm Pitch
Chipset
PHY Layer
Capabilities
Hard Drive
CD-ROM
DVD-ROM
CD-RW
Combo Drive
DVDR/RW
Keyboard
Touch pad A-4 appendix A product specification
Audio-In Port
Audio-Out / SPDIF
Volume Pot
Firewire
USB2.0 Port
Ethernet
Modem
S-Video
Power-In
Parallel
VGA Port
Consumer IR
FIR/SIR
Card Reader
PC Card Slot
Multimedia Input Port
Battery Pack
Feature
Adapter AC-Input /
DC-Output Ports and Connectors One Microphone-in jack One Headphone / SPDIF jack One VR Dial for audio volume control One Firewire (IEEE1394) host connector Three USB2.0-compliant connectors One standard network Ethernet connector (RJ-45) One modem / phone connector (RJ11) One S-video (TV-out) output connector One DC-in connector One 25-pin parallel port connector One 15-pin VGA connector One Consumer IR Receiver lens for Remote (Optional) One SIR/FIR Port One Card Reader slot (MMC/MS/SD supported) One PC Card Slot (type II) One TV Tuner Module connector (Coaxial cable, RCA Audio Input Jacks, RCA Video Input Jack supported) Battery Pack / AC Adapter
Li-ion Rechargeable Battery Model: BATEDX A-5 appendix A product specification BIOS AMI PnP BIOS Power On Self Test DRAM auto-detection, auto-sizing L2 Cache auto-detection Hard disk type auto-detection APM 1.2 (Advanced Power Management) &
ACPI 2.0 (Advanced Configuration Power Interface) Smart Power Two Level Password Protections 32bit access, Ultra DMA, PIO5 Mode support Multi-boot capability Support: Microsoft Windows 2000 / XP Compatible: Microsoft Windows 95/ 98/ 98SE/ ME/
NT4.0 Physical Specification For 16-LCD model: 350 (W) x 290 (D) x 40.5 (H) mm For 15.4-LCD model: 350 (W) x 290 (D) x 38.5 (H) mm For 16-LCD model: 7.5 lbs / 3.4 KG (with CD-ROM) For 15.4-LCD model: 7.3 lbs / 3.3 KG (with CD-ROM) Operating Temperature: 5 to 35oC (41 to 95oF) Operating Humidity: 20 to 90 percent RH (5 to 35oC) Storage Temperature: -20 to 50oC (-4 to 122oF)
PnP Function
Self Test
Auto Detection
Power Management
Security
Other Features
O/S
Dimension
Weight
Environmental Limits A-6 appendix B agency regulatory notices A P P E N D I X B AGENCY REGULATORY NOTICES B-1 appendix B agency regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by the Manufacture may void the users authority to operate the equipment. Connections to Peripheral Devices Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. Declaration of Conformity This device complies with Part 15/68 the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. European Notice Products with the CE Marking comply with both the EMC Directive
(89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) and R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC) issued by the Commission of the European B-2 appendix B agency regulatory notices Community. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European Norms:
EN55022 (CISPR 22) Radio Frquency Interference
EN50082 (IEC801-2, IEC801-3, IEC801-4) Electro-magnetic Immunity
EN 300 328-2 (ETS 300 328) Radio Spectrum Matter.
TBR21 (ETS TBR21) Terminal Equipment.
EN60950 (IEC950) I.T.E. Product Safety Canadian Notice This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Le present appareil numerique nemet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de Classe B prescrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le Ministere des Communications du Canada. Power Cord Requirement The power cord supplied with the AC adapter should match the plug and voltage requirements for your local area. Regulatory approval for the AC adapter has been obtained using the power cord for the local area. However, if you travel to a different area and need to connect to a different outlet or voltage, you should use one of the power cords listed below. To purchase a power cord (including one for a country not listed below) or a replacement ac adapter, contact your local dealer. U.S. and Canada
The cord set must be UL-Listed and CSA-Certified or C-UL Listed.
The minimum specifications for the flexible cord are (1) No. 18 AWG,
(2) Type SJ, and (3) 3-conductor.
The cord set must have a rated current capacity of at least 10 A.
The attachment plug must be an earth-grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15A, 125V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250V) configuration. Japan
All components of the cord set (cord, connector, and plug) must bear a `PSE` mark and registration number in accordance with the B-3 appendix B agency regulatory notices Japanese Dentori Law.
The minimum specification for the flexible cord are: (1) 0.75 mm2 conductors, (2) Type VCT or VCTF, and (3) 3-conductor.
The cord set must have minimum rated current capacity of 7 A.
The attachment plug must be a two-pole, grounded type with a Japanese Industrial Standard C8303 (15 A, 125 VAC) configuration. Other Countries
The cord set fittings must bear the certification mark of the agency responsible for evaluation in a specific country. Acceptable agencies are:
BSI (UK) OVE (Australia) CEBEC (Belgium) SEMKO (Sweden) FIMKO (Finland) DEMKO (Denmark) NEMKO (Norway) SETI (Finland) EANSW (Australia) SEV (Switzerland) IMQ (Italy) UTE (France) CCC (China) PSB (Singapore) PSE (Japan) BSMI (Taiwan) B (Polish)
The flexible cord must be of a HAR (harmonized) type HO5VV-F 3-conductor cord with a minimum conductor size of 0.03 square inches.
The cord set must have a current capacity of at least 10 A and a nominal voltage rating of 125 / 250 VAC. CAUTION: MODEL 766NSx IS DESIGNED TO USE WITH THE FOLLOWING AC ADAPTER MODEL ONLY Manufacture: LITE-ON ELECTRONICS, INC. Model: PA-1161-02 (160W) B-4 appendix B agency regulatory notices Telephone lines requirement
The appropriate utilization of 26AWG telephone line cord on unit. CAUTION: Always disconnect all telephone lines from the wall outlet before servicing or disassembling this equipment. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Battery Pack Safety
The battery pack is intended to use only with this notebook. Do not disassemble the pack. Do not dispose of the battery pack in fire or water. To avoid risk of fire, burns, or damage to your battery pack, do not allow a metal object to touch the battery contacts. Handle a damaged or leaking battery with extreme care. If you come in contact with the electrolyte, wash the exposed area with soap and water. If it contacts the eye, flush the eye with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Do not charge the battery pack if the ambient temperature exceeds 45J (113K). To obtain a replacement battery, contact your local dealer. Do not expose the battery pack to high storage temperatures (above 60J, 140K).
When discarding a battery pack, contact your local waste disposal provider regarding local restrictions on the disposal or recycling of batteries.
Use only supplied AC Adapter for charging. CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer`s instructions or local laws. VORSICHT! Explisionsgefahr bei unsachgernazen Austausch der Batterie. Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einem vom Hersteller empfohlenem ahnlichen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien navh Angaben des Herstellers. B-5 appendix B agency regulatory notices Laser Safety The optical drive used with this computer is certified as a Class 1 laser device according to the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services
(DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard and International Standards IEC 825 / IEC 825-1 (EN60825 / EN60825-1). The device is not considered harmful, but the following precautions are recommended:
Do not open the unit.
Avoid direct exposure to the laser beam.
If the unit requires service, contact an authorized service center.
Ensure proper use by reading and following the instructions carefully.
Do not attempt to make any adjustment of the unit. Warning!
Do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet containing the laser. The laser beam used in this product is harmful to the eyes. The use of optical instruments, such as magnifying lenses, with this product increase the potential hazard to your eyes. For your safety, have this equipment serviced only by an authorized service provider. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1 LASERSCHUTZKLASSE 1 PRODUKT LED (Infrared) Safety The infrared port located on the left side of this computer is classified as a Class 1 LED (light-emitting diode) device according to International Standard IEC 825-1 (EN60825-1). This device is not considered harmful, but the following precautions are recommended:
Do not attempt to view the infrared LED beam with any type of optical device.
Do not attempt to make any adjustment of the unit.
If the unit requires service, contact an authorized service center.
Avoid direct eye exposure to the infrared LED beam. Be aware that the beam is invisible light and cannot be seen. B-6 CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT LEDSCHUTZKLASSE 1 PRODUKT appendix B agency regulatory notices Lithium battery warning This computer contains a lithium battery to power the clock and calendar circuitry. CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is replaced incorrectly. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. ATTENTION: Il y a danger dxplosion sil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avcc unc batterie du meme type ou dun type recommande par le constructer. Mettre au rebut les batteries usagees conformement aux instructions du fabricant. VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemBen Austausch der Batterie Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einem vom Hersteller empfohlenem ahnlichen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. Der Arbeitsplatzbezogene Schalldruckpegel nach DIN 45 635 betragt 70dB
(A) oder weniger. Zum Netzanschlua dieses Gerates ist eine geprufte Leitung zu verwenden. Fur einen Nennstrom bis 6A und einem Gerategewicht groBer 3kg ist eine Leitung nicht leichter als H05VV-F, 3G, 0.75mm2 einzusetzen. Die Steckdose muB nahe dem Gerat angebracht und leicht zuganglich sein. B-7 Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. For operation within 5.15 ~ 5.25GHz frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. IMPORTANT NOTE:
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device complies with FCC RF Exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment, under 47 CFR 2.1093 paragraph (d)(2). This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
| 1 2 | Users manual BT | Users Manual | 834.35 KiB | / January 08 2005 |
Bluetooth 1.2 USB module
(BM-GP-CS-08) Data Sheet December 2004 Rev 1.4 www.usi.com.tw Introduction The Bluetooth Class 2 Module (model number BM-GP-CS-08) is a small module with 10-way connector that provides a complete 2.4GHz Bluetooth system. This ready-to-use Class2 Bluetooth module provides a fully compliant Bluetooth system V1.2 for data and audio communications. This module also provides the coexistence solution that is critical for Notebook implementation. The coexistence solution includes AFH, and WCS (Wireless Coexistence Solution). Activity Signaling is an option. Feature l Fully Qualified Bluetooth v1.2 system l Enhanced Data Rate(EDR) compliant with v0.9 of specification for both 2Mbps & 3Mbps modulation modes l Scatternet Support l With small size suitable for compact system integration. Low power consumption, extend the battery life. l 2.402 2.4835 GHz frequency band. l Support for 802.11b/g Coexistence including Intel WCS (Wireless Coexistence System). l Integrated Printed Antenna l Easy for integration into mobile and handheld device with flexible system configuration and antenna design. l On board 8 Mbits flash memory for firmware upgrade All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) General Description Features Standards Frequency Band Sensitivity Output Power Integrated Antenna Coverage Temperature Operating Voltage Power Consumption Data Rate Interface Dimensions Weight Operating systems Description Fully compliant with BluetoothTM 1.2 Standard 2.402GHz ~ 2.4835GHz
-82 dBm 4 dBm max with power control (Maximum Power measurement is from chip set) Peak Gain @ 2.45GHz: 0.5dBi 10m ~20m (Varies depending on operating environment) Operating temperature: 0 C to +70 C Storage temperature: -40 C to +85 C 3.3V DC +/- 10%
Peak RF current during TX burst: 65 mA Peak RF current during RX burst: 47 mA Asynchronous:723.2kbps/57.6kbps Synchronous:433.9kbps/433.9kbps JST SM10B-SRSS-TB connector Length: 36.0 mm, Width: 13.8 mm, Height: 3.8 mm 2.0 grams +/- 15%
Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP Electrical Connector Pinout Figure 1: Connector pin assignment Pin Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Pin Name GND USB_D+
USB_D-
RSVD BT_Priority / Ch_Clk (PIO4) HW_RADIO_DIS# (Optional) Ch_Data (PIO6)
+3.3V LED GND Description to 802.11b for BT_Active output Ground USB D+
USB D-
Reserved for Co-
Existence. This is optional if you need Activity Signalling scheme. BT Priority and Channel Clock for WCS. Disable radio transmissions when low Channel Data for WCS (Standard). Or, WLAN_Active input from 802.11b for Activity Signalling which is optional. 3.3V power input LED indicator for radio activity Ground Table 2: Connector pin assignment All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 1 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Block Diagram Figure 2: Module Block Diagram Electrical Characteristics Absolute Maximum Ratings Rating Storage Temperature Supply Voltage: VDD Recommended Operating Conditions Operating Condition Operating Temperature Range*
Supply Voltage: VDD Min
-40 C
-0.40V Min 0 C
+3.0V Max
+85 C
+3.60V Max
+70 C
+3.60V All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 2 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Input/Output Terminal Characteristics Digital Terminals Input Voltage VIL input logic level low (VDD=3.0V) VIH input logic level high Output Voltage VOL output logic level low, (lO = 4.0mA), VDD=3.0V VOH output logic level high, (lO = -4.0mA), VDD=3.0V USB Terminals Input threshold VIL input logic level low VIH input logic level high Input leakage current VSS < VIN< VDD CI Input capacitance Output levels to correctly terminated USB Cable VOL output logic level low VOH output logic level high Typ
-
-
-
Min
-0.4 0.7VDD
-
VDD-0.2 Min Typ
-
-
1
-
-
-
-
0.7VDD
-1 2.5 0 2.8 Max
+0.8 VDD+0.4 0.2
-
Max 0.3VDD
-
5 10 0.2 VDD Unit V V V V Unit V V A pF V V Average Current Consumption VDD=3.3V Temperature = 20C Mode ACL data transfer 1Mbps USB (Slave) ACL data transfer 1Mbps USB (Master) Standby Mode (Connected to host, no RF activity) Deep Sleep Typ Unit 50 58 10 380 mA mA mA uA Peak Current Consumption VDD=3.3V Temperature = 20C Mode Peak RF current during TX burst (+4 dBm , CW mode) Peak RF current during TX burst (0 dBm , CW mode) Peak RF current during RX burst (-82 dBm) Typ 55.0 52.0 44.0 Unit mA mA mA All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 3 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Radio Characteristics Radio Characteristics, VDD = 3.3V Temperature = +20C Receiver Frequency
(GHz) Min Typ Max Sensitivity at 0.1% BER Maximum received signal at 0.1% BER Transmitter RF transmit power Initial carrier frequency tolerance RF power control range 20dB bandwidth for modulated carrier Drift ( five slot packet) Drift Rate
?f1avg Maximum Modulation
?f2max Minimum Modulation 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.402 2.441 2.480
-
-
-
0 0 0
-82
-84
-84
-
-
-
-78
-80
-80
-
-
-
Frequency
(GHz) Min Typ Max 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.402 2.441 2.480
-3
-3
-3
-
-
-
25
-
-
-
Frequency
(GHz) Min 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.402 2.441 2.480 140 140 140 115 115 115 4 4 4 10 10 10 35 820 15 250 Typ 165 165 165 140 140 140
-
-
-
35 35 35
-
1000 25 400 Max 175 175 175
-
-
-
Notes:
Results shown are referenced to input of the RF Balanced-Filter. Bluetooth Specification 70
-20 Bluetooth Specification
-6 ?to +4(4) 75 16 1000 25 400 Bluetooth Specification 140 f1avg1 75 115 Unit dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm Unit dBm dBm dBm kHz kHz kHz dB kHz kHz Hz/s Unit kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz kHz All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 4
-
Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Radio Characteristics, C/I and Adjacent Channel Power VDD = 3.3V Temperature = +20C Frequency = 2441 MHz Receiver C/I co-channel Adjacent channel selectivity C/I F=F0+1MHz Adjacent channel selectivity C/I F=F0-1MHz Adjacent channel selectivity C/I F=F0+2MHz Adjacent channel selectivity C/I F=F0-2MHz Adjacent channel selectivity C/I F=F0+3MHz Adjacent channel selectivity C/I F=FImage Adjacent channel selectivity C/I F=F0-4MHz Transmitter Min Typ Max Bluetooth Specification Unit
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
9
-4
-4
-35
-21
-45
-18
-25 11 0 0
-30
-20
-40
-9
-20 11 0 0
-30
-20
-40
-9
-20 Min Typ Max Bluetooth Specification dB dB dB dB dB dB dB dB Unit dBm dBm Adjacent channel transmit power F=F02MHz Adjacent channel transmit power F=F03MHz
-
-
-35
-45
-20
-40
-20
-40 All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 5 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Mounting Guide for Antenna Radiation In order to achieve longest communication range, please keep the area surrounding antenna free of grounding or metal housing. All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 6 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Impedance Matching of Antenna BM-GP-CS-08 utilizes a meander line printed antenna for radiate communication. Application environments, such as notebooks, PDAs, headsets or other handheld devices, both have plastic housings, different motherboards and other mechanism structures. These factors will cause the deviation of antenna resonant frequency. Therefore, impedance matching of antenna should be optimized for various applications to achieve longest communication range. Please consult USI for further information. All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 7 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Mechanical Drawing All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 8 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Laser Marking Legend:
1. USI MMYY: MMYY is the date code. MM stands for month while YY stands for the last 2 digits of the year. 2. P/N: BM-GP-CS-08 is the the standard USI model number. This part number can be customize to your specific part number. 3. MAC: MAC address. All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 9 Bluetooth USB Module (BM-GP-CS-08) Packaging For Additional information, please contact the following:
Universal Scientific Industrial Co., Ltd. Headquarters 141, Lane 351, Taiping Road, Sec. 1, Tsao-Tuen , Taiwan, Http://www.usi.com.tw Tel: + 886-49-2350876, 2325876 Fax: +886-49-3439561, 2337360, 2351093 E-mail:usi@ms.usi.com.tw All rights are reserved by USI. No part of this technical document can be reproduced in any form without permission of USI. 10
| 1 2 | Users manual System | Users Manual | 2.95 MiB | / January 08 2005 |
MOTION COMPUTING LE1600 TABLET PC MICROSOFT WINDOWS XP TABLET PC EDITION 2005 USER GUIDE Copyright Information Acrobat is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Atheros. the Atheros logo, Super G, Super A/G, Wake-on-Wireless, and Wake-on-Theft are registered trademarks of Atheros Communications, Inc. AuthenTec is a registered trademark of AuthenTec, Inc. BLUETOOTH is a registered trademark owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. and licensed to Motion Computing, Inc. Intel, Intel Inside, the Intel Inside logo, Pentium, and PROSet are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Knowles and IntelliSonic are trademarks or registered trademarks of Knowles Acoustics, Inc. Microsoft Windows, Windows XP, Windows XP Tablet PC Edition, and Windows Journal are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/
or other countries. Motion Computing, Speak Anywhere, and View Anywhere are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motion Computing, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. OmniPass is a trademark of Softex, Inc. Realtek is a trademark of Realtek Semiconductor Corporation. SigmaTel is a registered trademark and Universal Jacks is a trademark of SigmaTel Corporation. Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Motion Computing, Inc. has made every effort to identify trademarked properties and owners on this page. All brands and product names used in this document are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. PATENTS: The Motion Computing products and services may be covered by one or more of the following protected inventions. Additional patents may also be pending. US PATENTS: D480,730. OTHER PATENTS: GB3009545, BG3009546, AUS154529, CAN101617, J1188539. For more information, see www.motioncomputing.com/info/patents. NOTICE: The information in this publication is subject to change without notice. MOTION COMPUTING, INC. SHALL NOT BE HELD LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN NOR FOR ACCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE, OR USE OF THIS MATERIAL. The information contained in this document is provided as is without warranty of any kind and is subject to change without notice. The warranties for Motion Products are set forth in the express limited warranty statements accompanying such products. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. This publication contains information protected by copyright. No part of this publication may be photocopied or reproduced in any form without prior written consent from Motion Computing, Inc. 2005 Motion Computing, Inc. (February 2005) P/N 024-02-0061 Rev. A00 Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide ii About This User Guide CAUTIONS, WARNINGS AND NOTICES The following notices are found in this User Guide:
WARNING: Text set off in this way indicates that failure to follow directions in the warning could result in bodily harm or loss of life. CAUTION: Text set off in this way indicates that failure to follow directions in the CAUTION could result in damage to the equipment or loss of information. MENU ITEMS, BUTTONS, ICONS WRITING ON THE DISPLAY INK REFERENCES TO USING THE PEN AND PEN FUNCTION BUTTON IMPORTANT: Text set off in this way presents information or instructions that should be followed or information of particular interest. NOTE: Text set off in this way presents information or instructions. Menu items, icons, and instructions found in the procedures in this User Guide are set apart by capitalizing them exactly as shown on screen. Examples are the Start menu, Dashboard, Tablet and Pen Settings icon, and Apply buttons. Writing on the Motion Tablet PC digitizer display in this User Guide refers to any handwritten input using the specially-designed Motion digitizer pen, that is provided. The display responds only to this pen and not to any other type of pen or to a stylus or other device such as those used with personal digital assistants (PDAs). The display surface may be damaged by ink pens or other pointed objects. The term ink refers to digital ink, i.e., hand-drawn or handwritten input and that can be displayed or converted into text. Notations for using the Motion Digitizer Pen, which are found throughout this User Guide, are described below:
Tap Firmly tap the pen on the Tablet PC display, without pressing the function button on the pen; a tap equals a mouse left-click Double-tap Tap the pen twice on the display, without pressing the function button on the pen Right-click Press the function button on the pen and tap the pen on the display (equals a mouse right-click) Press and hold Press and hold the tip of the pen to the display with-
out pressing the pen function button (equals a mouse right-click) Tap and drag Tap and drag the pen on the display Select/Highlight Tap on the item on the display to activate the func-
tion: to select a line of text, tap, hold down the button, and drag the pen across the text to highlight it TASK BAR/
SYSTEM TRAY The Microsoft Windows task bar is on the lower-left of the display; the system tray (or notification area) is on the lower right, near the clock. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide iii Table of Contents Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Features Overview . 1 Quick Start Instructions . 2 Using the Motion Digitizer Pen . 2 Helpful Hints: Pen and Ink . 3 Complete the Microsoft Tablet PC Tutorials . 4 Review Using Your Motion Tablet and User Guide . 4 Open the Motion Dashboard . 4 Visit the Microsoft Help and Support Center . 5 Hardware Overview . 6 Tablet PC Display . 7 Fingerprint Reader . 7 Motion AC Adapter . 7 Motion Battery Pack . 7 Tablet PC Buttons, Connectors, and Indicators . 10 Front Panel Buttons . 10 Front Panel LEDs . 11 Battery Status LEDs . 11 Ports, Slots and Connectors . 12 Software Overview . 14 Using Your Motion Tablet . 14 Motion Dashboard . 15 Motion Security Center . 18 Motion Third-Party Software Solutions . 18 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Pen and Ink . 19 Configuring Tablet and Pen Settings . 19 Calibrating and Using Your Digital Pen . 20 Using the Tablet PC Input Panel . 22 Helpful Hints: Using the TIP Window . 26 Audio and Video . 26 Motion Dashboard Audio System Controls . 26 Adjusting Display Settings and Screen Brightness . 26 Creating Schemes for External Monitors . 30 Helpful Hints: Mirrored and Extended Modes . 31 Power Management . 31 Configuring Your Power Management Settings . 31 Using Your Batteries . 34 Helpful Hints: Battery and Power Management . 36 Security Features and Settings . 37 Motion Security Center . 37 Motion OmniPass and Fingerprint Reader . 38 Helpful Hints: Successful Fingerprint Captures . 41 Capturing a Fingerprint . 41 Capturing a Second Fingerprint Later . 44 Configuring Advanced OmniPass Features . 44 Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide v Logging Onto a Remembered Site . 46 Configuring Strong Logon Security . 46 Infineon Trusted Platform Module . 47 Windows Security System Components Overview . 47 Speech . 51 Introduction to Speech . 51 Motion Speak Anywhere Technology . 51 Speech Recognition . 52 Helpful Hints: Dictating and Recording . 55 Ports, Slots and Connectors . 56 PC Cards . 56 SD Cards . 56 IrDA (infrared) Port. 56 USB Ports . 56 Speaker Port . 56 Microphone Port . 56 DVI-D Connector . 57 VGA Connector . 57 Docking Connector . 57 Wireless Networking . 57 Wi-Fi (802.11) Wireless Connections . 57 Bluetooth Wireless Connections . 59 Using the Bluetooth Application . 60 Helpful Hints: Bluetooth Wireless . 65 Using Infrared Wireless Connections . 65 Configuring Buttons . 68 Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance Caring for Your Tablet PC and Its Accessories . 69 General Care . 69 Caring for the Standard and View Anywhere Displays . 70 Caring for the Motion Digitizer Pen . 70 Ordering New Pens . 71 Traveling With our Tablet PC . 71 Traveling by Air . 71 Other Travel Hints . 72 System Repair/Recovery Procedure . 72 Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support Solutions To Common Problems . 75 Frequently Asked Questions . 81 Motion Warranties . 82 Standard and Extended Warranty and Insurance Programs 82 Motion Computing Support . 82 Appendix B Motion Tablet PC Specification . 83 Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide vi Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC The Tablet PC from Motion Computing combines the best features of desktop and notebook computing with the unique mobility and versatility found only in a Tablet PC. This chapter provides a quick start overview of the hardware and software features of the Tablet PC. Specific details on how to set up and use the Tablet PC are provided in Chapter 2. The Care and Maintenance of your new Tablet PC is detailed in Chapter 3. Appendix A is a summary of common problems and the steps to take if those problems occur. Appendix B is a reference to where you can find the Tablet PC Specifications. It is not necessary to read this document from cover to cover. If you are already familiar with personal computers, you may feel comfortable proceeding to the instructions in the next chapter. If there are certain things you want to learn about your new Tablet PC, look in the Table of Contents or search for that topic. The Motion Tablet PC includes these key features:
Microsoft Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 operating system that contains a Tablet PC Input Panel (TIP) with ink-to-text and word recogni-
tion functionality, and an improved security infrastructure that helps defend against viruses, worms, and hackers Optional View AnywhereTM display which optimizes the display for both outdoor and indoor viewing, providing the same wide viewing angles as the standard display while significantly improving the sunlight contrast ratio and significantly reducing unwanted reflection and glare Ambient Light Sensor (ALS) to automatically optimize display perfor-
mance and battery life Integrated 802.11 Wi-Fi wireless technology Integrated Bluetooth wireless technology for pairing with Bluetooth devices Fingerprint reader for convenient, secure biometric password manage-
ment; combined with Motion OmniPass software to manage settings Speak AnywhereTM technology that combines user-configurable acous-
tics software with integrated array microphones to optimize the audio capabilities of your Tablet PC Motion Dashboard for convenient access to Tablet PC controls High speed USB ports Front panel status LEDs and function buttons Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 1 FEATURES OVERVIEW Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Screen rotation Handwriting and voice recognition PC Card slot for memory expansion, or accessory connections Secure Digital (SD) Card slot to support SD storage devices User-configurable power-saving schemes Additional I/O ports Two audio jacks (designated as microphone/audio in and headphone/audio out) Two USB 2.0 ports External VGA monitor port RJ-45 (Gigabit Ethernet network) DVI-D (Digital Video Interface) port Infrared (IrDA) transceiver DC power-in port Motion Digitizer Pen/Eraser for ink input, with a pen storage bay and a pen tether anchor built into the Tablet PC Universal security lock slot QUICK START INSTRUCTIONS Start the Tablet PC by sliding the power switch. The power LED turns blue and the Hard Disk Drive (HDD) LED intermittently flashes blue (these are the top two LEDs on the upper right corner). Then Windows XP launches. When you start the Tablet PC, the Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 Tutorials screen appears. NOTE: If you do not want this screen to continue to appear, check Do not show me this again. We recommend that you complete the Microsoft tutorials, which take a few min-
utes. It you do not want to run the tutorials now, you can return to them by tapping Start > Using Your Motion Tablet PC. Using the Motion Digitizer Pen Function Button Tip Eraser The Motion Digitizer Pen contains internal electronics that let you enter digital ink on the Tablet PC display. The pen is a sensitive, electronic, data-entry device designed in conjunction with the display. The pen includes a user-
replaceable tip; the other end of the pen serves as an eraser in applications that support an eraser. The pen contains no batteries and requires no external power. The pen contains a pen function button, used for right-clicking (like a mouse) and a small opening at one end for attaching a pen tether cord. Using the pen tether
(provided) helps prevent pen loss; attach it to the built-in pen tether post on the upper right edge of the Tablet PC. The pen also comes with replacement pen tips and a replacement tool. For information about replacing the pen tips, refer to the Care and Maintenance information in Chapter 3. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 2 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Pen Usage. Think of the pen as your mouse; review the following information about how it works in conjunction with tapping, pressing, and the function button. Tap Firmly tap the pen on the Tablet PC display, without pressing the function button on the pen; a tap equals a mouse left-click Double-tap Tap the pen twice on the display, without pressing the function button on the pen Right-click Press the function button on the pen and tap the pen on the display (equals a mouse right-click) Press and hold Press and hold the tip of the pen to the display with-
out pressing the pen function button (equals a mouse right-click) Tap and drag Tap and drag the pen on the display Select/Highlight Tap on the item on the display to activate the func-
tion: to select a line of text, tap, hold down the button, and drag the pen across the text to highlight it NOTE: For best results, we recommend that you calibrate your pen before using it for the first time. For information about this and other pen procedures, refer to Calibrating and Using Your Digital Pen on page 20. Helpful Hints: Pen and Ink Here are some additional hints about working with the digital pen. For more information about the pen and Tablet PC settings refer to Configuring Tablet and Pen Settings on page 19. When you write with the pen, you can rest your hand or arm anywhere without disturbing any open programs or damaging the display. Watch the cursor instead of the pen tip when you write. The cursor is a guide for your pen movements. If it does not align with the pen tip, you should recalibrate the pen. Practice writing and learn how firmly and where to tap on the Tablet PC display. You need these skills for activating programs, menus, or other Tablet PC functions. The pen can be held like any other writing tool. Learn how to hold it and when and how to press the function button on the pen, which activates right-click options (such as pop-up menus). You can also activate the right-click options by pressing and holding the pen tip on the surface of the display. Change pen tips every 90 days in a clean environment. Change pen tips every 30 days if you use the pen in an environment with airborne or sur-
face debris (sand, dust, etc.) or if you drop it on a rough surface. Any of these or similar situations could damage the pen tip or embed debris in it. You may not notice the damage or debris until it is too late. Damaged pen tips could scratch the display. Perform the following steps to familiarize yourself with the Tablet PC. Complete the Microsoft Tablet PC Tutorials Read the Motion Resources Page and review the User Guide Open the Motion Dashboard Go to the Microsoft Help and Resources Page for more information Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 3 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Complete the Microsoft Tablet PC Tutorials When you start your Tablet PC, several tutorials are offered to help you learn to use various features, such as the Tablet PC Input Panel (TIP) and speech recognition. The tutorials are short, quick, and informative and are an excellent place to begin a successful Tablet PC experience. NOTE: Microsoft Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 provides several tutorials. One set ap-
pears each time you start the Tablet PC (unless you deactivate this option). Others can be found by tapping the Using Your Motion Tablet icon on your desktop. If you are new to the Tablet PC world, taking the tutorials is a great way to get started and learn quickly. Review Using Your Motion Tablet and User Guide Tap the shortcut Using Your Motion Tablet icon on your desktop to open the Using Your Motion Tablet page. Instructions for using the pen, the Motion Dashboard, and links to other applications, are included. Also, you can tap the Motion User Guide icon on your desktop to open the online Motion Tablet PC User Guide at any time. Open the Motion Dashboard The Motion Dashboard is an exclusive Motion Computing application that you can use to access programs and functions as well as configure your Tablet PC. To open the Motion Dashboard, press the Dashboard (Hot Key #1) button on the Tablet PC front panel or select Start > All Programs > Motion Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 4 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Resources > Motion Dashboard. (Refer to Tablet PC Buttons, Connectors, and Indicators on page 9 for a description of the Tablet PC buttons and indicators). The Motion Dashboard can be used to monitor and set some of the most commonly used control panel items for the Tablet PC. For more information, refer to Motion Dashboard on page 15. Visit the Microsoft Help and Support Center You can find additional information about your Tablet PC and the Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 operating system in the Microsoft Help and Support Center. Access help by selecting Start > Help and Support. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 5 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC HARDWARE OVERVIEW Whenever you open the Help and Support Center while your Tablet PC is connected to the Internet, the "Did You Know" section checks for updates from Microsoft and Motion Computing, such as system-use hints, or notices from Motion Computing about your Tablet PC. If this is your first experience with the Windows XP operating system, taking the Microsoft tour is a good way to get started. Select Start > Help and Support > Whats new in Windows XP > Taking a tour or tutorial. Tablet PC Display The Motion Tablet PC includes a 12.1-inch display with wide viewing angles. The Tablet PC standard display incorporates the following features:
A highly-readable, liquid-crystal display (LCD) A protective layer that offers a firm writing surface and minimizes glare A digitizer panel underlying the display that enables handwritten entry with a specially-designed Motion Digitizer Pen and the TIP A wide viewing angle display that provides bright, clear viewing at up to 180 degrees, plus a high contrast ratio, fast response time, and authen-
tic color at any angle A digitizer that responds to the Motion Digitizer Pen, but not to a plastic stylus or to finger touches A display surface that lets you touch or rest your hand on it without affecting open programs or data input NOTE: For information about display care, see Chapter 3 of this User Guide. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 6 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Tablet PC View AnywhereTM Display Option. The View Anywhere display option was designed to enhance indoor viewing and to improve outdoor viewing while retaining all the standard display features. The bright 12.1-
inch XGA TFT display was developed from a proprietary optical enhancement process based on technology initially developed for high-end military aviation and marine applications. The View Anywhere display includes all the features of the standard display plus the following components:
A protective layer that improves the sunlight contrast ratio and signifi-
cantly reduces reflection and glare Improved sunlight contrast ratio, which enhances viewability at wide viewing angles even further than the standard display Enhanced optical display technology with a significant reduction in unwanted reflection and glare and improved light pass-through effi-
ciency Fingerprint Reader The fingerprint reader lets you scan your fingerprint and associate it with passwords. This feature offers a quick and convenient way to log on to your Tablet PC, provides global password management, and protects your Tablet PC data from unauthorized access. The fingerprint reader also serves as a scrolling device; you can move your finger vertically (from top to bottom) to scroll the cursor within the active application window. Motion AC Adapter The Motion AC Adapter has three components:
AC power adapter Power cord AC mini-plug with folding prongs that can be used instead of the long cord when traveling CAUTION: Use the Motion AC Adapter with your Mo-
tion Tablet PC. This adapter should not be used to power any other electronic devices. If you do so, you may damage the accessory or the other device. Motion Battery Pack Each Motion Tablet PC ships with a Lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery mounted and latched at the top edge of the Tablet PC. Extra batteries are available from Motion Computing. An optional Extended Battery is available that provides additional hours of continuous operation. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 7 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC WARNING: To avoid personal injury, handle the bat-
tery with care. Do not open, puncture, short, or expose it to fire or water. Keep the battery in an ambient tem-
perature of less than +104F (+40C); for example, do not leave it in a closed car in hot weather for an ex-
tended time. For additional safety information, see the Safety and Regulatory Guide packaged with your Tablet PC. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 8 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC TABLET PC BUTTONS, CONNECTORS, AND INDICATORS The following shows the buttons, connectors, and other components on the Tablet PC. While there are no controls on the back side of the Tablet PC, there is a sliding panel that covers the Extended Battery connector. This panel must be open before connecting the optional Extended Battery. The connector panel should be closed when not being used. Tablet PC LEDs, Buttons, Connectors, and Other Components Wireless On/Off Pen bay Power LED Battery LED Hard drive LED Wireless LED Escape button Function button Five-way directional control button Dashboard (Hot Key
#1) or Windows Journal (with Function) Alternately turns wireless on and off; makes it easy to disable wireless on airplanes (button must be pressed and held for 1/2 second to take affect) Storage area for the Motion digitizer pen; located at upper right edge. A pen tether attachment point is located directly above the pen bay. Displays power status; lights blue when power is on, blinks blue on low battery Displays battery status; lights amber when battery is charging; blinks blue when in stand by state Displays hard disk drive (HDD) activity - blinks blue Displays wireless 802.11 and Bluetooth activity; white for 802.11, blue for Bluetooth Primary function: Escape; secondary function: Alt+Tab Press this button then another to activate Secondary button functions Primary functions: Scrolls Up/Down/Right/Left + Enter Secondary functions: Left arrowShift+Tab; Right arrowTab; Up arrowPage Up; Down arrowPage Down Primary function: Opens the Motion Dashboard; programmable Secondary function: Opens the Windows Journal application Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 9 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Rotate Display (Hot Key #2)/TIP (Tablet PC input panel) SAS button Microphones PC card slot SD card Slot Infrared (IrDA) transceiver Power switch DVI-D connector AC power port RJ-45/LAN VGA connector Docking connector USB ports (2) Primary function: Changes the Tablet PC display orientation; programmable Secondary function: Opens the Tablet PC Input Panel Primary function: Ctrl-Alt-Del; Secondary function: None Work at a natural distance; disabled when an external microphone is plugged in Holds one Type-II PC Card for memory expansion, Smart Card Holds one SD-type card, for memory expansion (SDIO compatible) An infrared transceiver built into the Tablet PC. Allows communication with other devices compliant with the IrDA standard. Effective range is approximately 3 feet Turns the Tablet PC on and off; can be configured to activate Hibernate or Stand By mode A digital video interface digital connector for attachment to a digital video interface monitor. An optional DVI-D cable is available from Motion Computing. To use a digital video interface monitor you must use this cable with your Tablet PC. AC point of connection for the AC adapter Standard RJ-45 connector for a 10/100/1000 Mbps network A standard DB-15 monitor connector for an external monitor, projector, or other VGA device Connects the Tablet PC with the Motion FlexDock for the LE series (not pictured in the illustration) Universal Serial Bus; a port for connecting USB 2.0 devices, such as a storage device, mouse, printer, digital camera, or optical disk drives Audio input/output (2) Microphone and headset plug; 3.5 mm plug Speakers (2) Integrated speakers that are muted when you connect a headset or external speakers Swipe-type sensor for scanning fingerprints; used for password management and security; also serves as a scroll device in active application window Fingerprint reader Ambient Light Sensor Measures the background light and automatically balances display brightness Active cooling system vent, dissipates heat from the Tablet PC (side and back) Air vent
(not pictured in the illustration) An external battery connector is included on the backside of the Tablet PC. It is located under a sliding panel in the upper center of the chassis. The sliding panel must be opened before attempting to attach the Extended Battery. External battery connector Front Panel Buttons The front panel of the Motion Tablet PC contains six buttons. Most of these buttons have both primary and secondary functions. In addition, some may be re-programmed for other functions. The SAS (security) button is located at the top left corner of the Tablet PC. Front Panel LEDs The Tablet PC front panel (shown in the illustration) contains status LEDs for the following:
Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 10 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Power On and Off Battery Hard Disk Drive Wireless The front panel LEDs are described in the following table. Power Battery Hard Disk Drive Wireless (white is 802.11, blue is Bluetooth) LED Power/Stand By Battery Status Hard Disk Drive Wireless Activity Front Panel Status LEDs Status Description Tablet PC is on Steady blue Flashing blue Tablet PC is in Stand By See Front Panel Battery Status LED below Flashing/On Off Independently flashing white and blue Off Some HDD activity No HDD activity Wireless is on:
White=802.11 Blue=Bluetooth Wireless is off Battery Status LEDs Your Motion Tablet PC is equipped with a smart battery that provides information about its power status. CAUTION: To avoid personal injury, or the risk of fire or explosion if the battery is overheated, wait until the battery cools to room temperature before recharging or replacing it. NOTE: If the unit is operating on battery power, you can move the pen over the Power/Battery icon
(shown here and found in the system tray at the Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 11 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC lower-right corner of the Tablet PC display) to see the number of hours of battery life and the percentage of battery charge remaining. Battery LED Steady blue Power Amber Front Panel Battery Status LED Battery Status Action Battery charged
(AC plugged in) Battery charging (AC plugged in) None None Battery Hard Disk Drive Wireless NOTE: When the remaining battery charge is 10%, your Tablet PC issues a Low Battery alarm message in addition to the LED warning. For information about modifying this alarm (you can set it to display a message or to produce an audible warning), refer to Configuring Your Power Management Settings on page 31. The Tablet PC issues a Fast-flashing amber Critical Battery alarm and
(lasts only a few automatically goes into seconds) Hibernate mode. 3% battery charge remaining
(AC unplugged) Slow-flashing amber The battery is too hot to charge Move the Tablet PC/ battery to a cooler environment until the temperature is closer to normal. NOTE: Hibernate mode attempts to save data in any open programs to your hard disk drive. When you restart the Tablet PC, it should return to the same system status as before hibernation. Off Tablet PC is unplugged from AC power and the system is running on battery power. Plug the Tablet PC into AC power if you want to preserve battery power. Refer to Power Management on page 31 for more information about your battery and power settings. PORTS, SLOTS AND CONNECTORS The Motion Tablet PC contains a number of ports and connectors that you can use to attach to input/output and networking devices. The following illustration shows the ports, slots, and connectors that are on the left side of the LE1600 Tablet PC. Wireless On/Off Audio In/Out VGA Lock Slot Power USB Connectors DVI-D LAN Connector Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 12 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC USB Connectors. Two USB connectors are included. These can be used to connect any USB device to the Tablet PC. Audio In/Out Connectors. The connectors are marked for microphone input and speaker output connections. DVI-D Connector. The Digital Video Interface(DVI-D) connector can be used to attach a third-party Digital Video Interface enabled monitor to the Tablet PC. An optional DVI-D cable is offered by Motion Computing for this purpose. Refer to Mirroring or Extending Your Display on page 28 about how to set up video that is displayed on an attached external display/
monitor. VGA Connector. The VGA connector can be used to attach a third-party VGA capable display/monitor to the Tablet PC. Motion Computing does not provide a VGA cable; refer to the information that came with your display for the type of cable to use. LAN Connector. This is a Gigabit Ethernet LAN (RJ-45) connector that can be used to connect to a network, cable modem, or xDSL; it contains two status LEDs. The following illustration shows the ports, slots, and connectors that are on the right side of the LE1600 Tablet PC. AC Power SD Card Slot Pen Bay Pen Tether PC Card Slot IrDA Transceiver Air Vent The right side of the Tablet PC contains:
AC Power port SD Card slot for expanded accessory options (SDIO compatible) PCMCIA card slot for third-party type-II PC cards Infrared (IrDA) transceiver for short distance network connections with another IrDA compliant device Pen Bay for the Motion Digitizer Pen Pen Tether post for attaching the Motion Digitizer Pen The following illustration shows the connectors and attachment points on the bottom edge of the Tablet PC. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 13 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC FlexDock Connector Convertible Keyboard/FlexDock Attachment Motion Accessory Port SOFTWARE OVERVIEW FlexDock Connector. There is a FlexDock connector at the bottom edge of the Tablet PC. This connector mates with the corresponding connector on the FlexDock for the LE Series to provide the required signal connections when the Tablet PC is docked. Refer to the Installation Guide provided with the FlexDock for the LE series unit for more information. Motion Accessory Port. The Motion Accessory port is for connecting input/output devices directly to the Motion Tablet PC, or to the FlexDock for the LE Series when the Tablet PC is mated to the FlexDock. For example, this is the port for attaching the optional external DVD/CD-RW Drive to the Tablet PC - all power to the drive is provided through this port. Convertible Keyboard. There are two attachment points for mating the Tablet PC to the Motion Convertible Keyboard. When the Tablet PC is attached to the keyboard, the Tablet PC can be angled to provide a comfortable viewing angle. Your new Motion Tablet PC ships with the standard Motion software, Motion Security Center, Motion Dashboard, and Motion CDs. In addition, it contains the Microsoft Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 Operating System with a Tablet PC Input Panel (TIP) that includes enhanced ink-to-
text experience and word recognition, and an improved security infrastructure that helps defend against viruses, worms, and hackers. All the software options you ordered have been pre-loaded on your Tablet PC. Software installation files are in the directory c:\windows\motion. Using Your Motion Tablet When you start your Tablet PC and go to Start > Using Your Motion Tablet, you will find pages that describe software applications and utilities to help you personalize and make the most of your system. These pages are opened by your default internet browser. Most of the links on those pages do not require an internet connection; however, you may need an active internet connection to access some of the information. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 14 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Motion Dashboard The Motion Dashboard puts many operations at your fingertips for convenient access and control. To open the Motion Dashboard, press the Dashboard button (Hot Key #1). NOTE: The Motion Dashboard does not include an Apply button. When you change a setting, the change occurs imme-
diately. Tapping OK on the Motion Dashboard closes the window. Also, if you disable your wireless connection from the Motion Dashboard, it may still appear to be working for a short time. The wireless/Bluetooth LED may continue to blink for a few seconds. This is a timing delay; the connection will end short-
ly. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 15 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Feature Display Brightness Motion Dashboard Features Description The built-in Ambient Light Sensor (ALS) detects light in the environment and automatically adjusts the display brightness. Available settings:
Off Blanks the display to save power Fixed Maintains a fixed brightness level on the display that remains constant under varying light conditions Dynamic Uses ALS to maintain a relative brightness level on the display in varying light conditions NOTE: For optimal battery life benefits and view-
ability from ALS, set the brightness scale to the mid-point or slightly above. If the setting is higher than this, you lose some of the battery-saving benefits while gaining minimal improvement in viewability. External Monitor The Tablet PC has a dual-head video controller that can mirror the Tablet PC display or extend it to a second monitor or external device, such as a data projector. This feature is disabled by default. Audio -
Speaker Volume Available settings:
Mirror Display Clones or duplicates the Tablet PC display on another monitor or projector Extend Display Enlarges the overall desktop work space to include both the external monitor and the Tablet PC display Disable Disables the External Monitor feature Available settings:
Mute the speaker sound; sliding the scale changes the speaker volume Multimedia Optimized Best equalization setting for sound reproduction from the Tablet PC for a CD player, DVD, or sound recorder Voice Optimized Best setting for voice reproduction from External Speakers Best setting for external speakers or the Tablet PC speakers headphones Properties Access advanced operating system controls to configure your audio experience. Tap Volume Control >
Options > Properties to set Playback and Recording for a selected device. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 16 Audio -
Microphones Pen and Digitizer Wireless Power Management Motion Security Center Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Available settings:
Mute Sliding scale changes microphone volume Narrow Angle Best setting for dictation, Voice over IP
(VoIP), or voice noisy environments Medium Angle Best setting for small group, conference table, or voice quiet environments; the microphone detects sounds from a larger area Wide Angle Best setting for an open meeting room Calibrate Trains the microphones to focus on sounds from a particular location or angle Available Options:
Calibrates the pen to the display Pen and Button Options Changes Tablet PC, pen, and but-
ton properties, such as hot-key assignments, right/left handed-
ness, or the right-click function; enable the eraser for applications that support an eraser. Available Settings:
Enables/disables the 802.11 (Wi-Fi) and/or Bluetooth wireless radio Disables either or both wireless devices at Tablet PC start up
(useful in environments where policy prohibits wireless opera-
tions) The physical wireless button (not on the Motion Dashboard) is intended for situations where you want to shut wireless down quickly and reliably. Lets you set power schemes and power button options; also displays remaining battery power. You can select from an extensive list of power schemes or you can create custom power schemes to fit your environment. Opens the Motion Security Center where you can do the following:
Access Motion OmniPass; refer to Motion OmniPass and Fin-
gerprint Reader on page 38 Review or modify Trusted Platform Module settings; refer to Infineon Trusted Platform Module on page 47 Open the Microsoft Security Center to review or modify Win-
dows security settings; refer to Using Windows Security on page 48 Stand By Help Puts the Tablet PC in a low-power Stand By state for a temporary suspension from which you can quickly resume a Windows session. Displays Motion Dashboard Help application Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 17 Chapter 1 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Motion Security Center The Motion Security Center consolidates the tablet security applications into one single security management dashboard. It provides the ability to manage the security applications and settings from a single point. You can also find quick links for help with various security-related tasks. Motion Security Center provides access to the Motion OmniPass, Infineon TPM, and Microsoft Security Center applications. Motion Third-Party Software Solutions Visit the Motion website at www.motioncomputing.com/products and select Software. You will find links to software solutions to purchase as well as free downloads from Motion software and service partners. All Motion Tablet PCs come packaged with CDs for the repair and recovery of the operating system and utilities and drivers. Separate application CDs, including the Motion Pak and Microsoft Office Pak software, are optional at the time of purchase. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 18 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC This chapter is divided into the following sections:
Pen and Ink on page 19 Audio and Video on page 26 Power Management on page 31 Security Features and Settings on page 37 Speech on page 51 Ports, Slots and Connectors on page 56 Wireless Networking on page 57 Configuring Buttons on page 67 Each of these sections includes a brief introduction to the topic, and information on how to access and use the feature or function. Other than a brief introduction to these topics in Chapter 1; all other information regarding the topic, including set up, operating procedures, and helpful hints, is in this chapter. A significant difference between using a standard personal computer or a laptop and your Tablet PC is the use of pen and ink in software applications. Some software applications are designed specifically for pen and ink while others may be ink enabled to improve their suitability with ink input. Be aware that you need to turn on the ink in Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel to be able to write over what is being displayed. You can also use the TIP to enter text directly. Configuring Tablet and Pen Settings The Tablet and Pen Settings window is accessed by tapping the Pen and Button Options button in the Pen and Digitizer area of the Motion Dashboard. Refer to Tablet PC Buttons, Connectors, and Indicators on page 9 for a description of the Tablet PC buttons and their default behavior. You can make selections to set up the following from the various sub-
windows of the Tablet and Pen Settings window:
Settings Tab Select right-handed or left-handed to improve handwriting recognition Set the menu location for right-handed or left-handed display Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 19 PEN AND INK Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Set the calibration for each orientation Change the rotation sequence Set the display screen brightness Display Tab Select and preview the primary screen orientation Change the rotation sequence Set the screen brightness for each power setting Tablet Buttons Tab Set up the front panel buttons Set same for all orientations, or Set different for each orientation Pen Options Tab Set up the pen and equivalent mouse actions Set up the pen buttons and enable the eraser (application dependent) Click on each tab and practice setting different options. The default settings may be perfect for your work situation, but if not, the Tablet and Pen Settings window lets you set up your Tablet PC according to your unique needs. The following illustration is a sample Tablet and Pen Settings window - this window includes a checkbox to enable the eraser - if your eraser is not functioning properly, make sure this box is checked. Also, availability of the eraser is application dependent; not all software applications allow the top of the pen to be used as an eraser. Refer to the Microsoft Help application for more information about these features (tap the HELP button). Calibrating and Using Your Digital Pen Be sure to calibrate your pen in both portrait and landscape orientations the first time you start your Tablet PC, then again at other times if the cursor does not seem to line up with the pen tip. Calibration ensures the accuracy Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 20 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC of the pen and adjusts the input angle for each person who uses it. The Tablet PC stores calibration data and settings on a per-user basis. 1. Open the Motion Dashboard and tap Calibrate Digitizer. Or double-tap the Tablet and Pen Settings icon in the system tray, located in the lower right-hand corner of the display window. This opens the Tablet and Pen Settings window. NOTE: This icon may be hidden in the system tray. Tap the system tray left-arrow to open all hidden icons. 2. Hold the pen naturally, angled as if you are writing with a pen, and tap the pen point in the center of each of the four calibration crosshairs as they appear. During calibration, try to position the Tablet PC as close to the way you will use it as possible, whether holding it in portrait or landscape orientation or using it in a FlexDock for the LE Series or with a Convertible Keyboard. Changing the pen or display angles affects the calibration. 3. If you change the orientation, you may need to calibrate the pen again. When using the pen as a cursor, you can determine if you are in the right place to select a menu item. For example, look at the position of the pointer on the screen, not where the pen touches the display. CAUTION: Do not write on the Tablet PC display with ink pens or other sharp objects that could dam-
age it. Do not use markers that could also damage the display. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 21 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Refer to the following to compare mouse and pen actions:
Mouse versus Pen Actions With a Mouse With the Digitizer Pen Point and click Point and tap the pen on the display. Double-click Double-tap the pen on the display. Click-and-drag Tap-and-drag the pen on the display. Right-click Press the pen button while tapping, or press and hold the pen on the display. Deactivating Pen Button to End Accidental Right-Clicks. If you find that you accidentally press the pen button when you write, you may want to deactivate this option. (You will still be able to open right-click menus by pressing and holding the pen against the display surface.) Using the Tablet PC Input Panel The Tablet PC Input Panel (TIP) is the primary tool for entering text and provides several text correction and control options. The TIP also includes buttons for activating speech recognition and voice command capabilities. It is opened by tapping the TIP icon in the Windows task bar. In some applications, a small TIP icon floats nearby. As you move your pen close to the display; tap that icon to open the TIP. TIP icon: Tap the icon to open the Tablet PC Input panel (TIP). Using the TIP. The following example shows how the TIP icon appears in a Save As window; you can tap the icon to open the TIP panel to use handwriting or the On Screen Keyboard to enter the name of the New Folder. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 22 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC When you tap this icon, the Writing Pad opens. As you write, the recognition software interprets the writing and displays a text equivalent below the line. You can change from the Writing Pad to a Character Writing Pad or On Screen Keyboard at any time by tapping the appropriate icon on the left side of the TIP panel. On the right side of the TIP panel there are icons for Tools and Options and for TIP Help. Tap the Tools and Options (small gear) icon to access the following selections:
Tools and Options icon Speech - If this is the first time you selected Speech, a Speech Recog-
nition Enrollment window is shown. You must adjust the microphones
(using the Motion Dashboard) and train for your voice before speech recognition is functional. This can take several minutes. After training, tapping Speech shows that Dictation and Command icons have been added to the TIP panel. Tapping either Dictation or Command opens a voice input window. For more information about Speech, refer to Motion Speak Anywhere Technology on page 51. Dock at Top of Screen. Moves and locks the TIP at the top of the screen. Dock at Bottom of Screen. Moves and locks the TIP at the bottom of the screen. Undock. Closes the TIP if shown; allows it to float undocked the next time it is opened. Options. Opens the Options window, where you can change many of the finer aspects of the pen and its usage in the TIP. There is also a link to Help that is specifically for the Tablet PC TIP. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 23 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Using the Writing Pad. As you write, the software selects the best match for a word from its dictionary of words and displays it on screen. Tap on a word to select it. In the following example, either handwrite directly over the incorrect character or tap the character to open a list of alternatives (as shown here:
O, 0, a, 6). You can erase a word you have just written, by rapidly scratching back and forth over it. The Writing Pad expands to show Numbers (Num) or Symbols (Sym) toolbars, whose symbols are inserted immediately in the text entry area as you select them. Then, when you begin to handwrite on the Writing Pad, the Num or Sym toolbar closes. Using the Character Writing Pad. Use the Character Writing Pad for acronyms, equations, or other entries that require individual letters, numbers, or symbols that the writing pad may interpret incorrectly. Some examples include the following: ~<!<@<#<$<%<^ and*()_+<>{}[] \ /. Symbols/letters are displayed in a text equivalent that you can individually correct by:
Handwriting over the text equivalent in each character space Clicking on the arrow under the letter and selecting an alternative from the drop-down menu Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 24 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC The writing pad expands vertically when you get near the end of the panel. Using the On Screen Keyboard. You can use the On Screen Keyboard to type words, letters, numbers, and characters from keyboard using your pen. For improved security and accuracy, you may want to enter passwords with the On Screen Keyboard instead of handwritten text. NOTE: When using the On Screen Keyboard, be sure to place your cursor where you want to enter text in the text entry box before you tap Insert. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 25 AUDIO AND VIDEO Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Helpful Hints: Using the TIP Window Move the TIP panel on your desktop using the bar on the right - only available when the TIP panel is not docked/locked at the top or bottom of the screen. When it is docked at the top or bot-
tom, it cannot be moved. Customizing Select Tools and Options (the gear icon) then Options... from the TIP window to open the Options window at the General tab. You can customize many features in the TIP. Select one or more of the tabs and set the desired options. Refer to the Help and the Tutorials that are provided as part of the Windows Operating System. Or refer to the Help information that is provided in the Options window. In some applications, you may need to double tap to enable pen and ink functions. The Audio and Video controls are in the Motion Dashboard in the Audio and Display sections. You will find additional information regarding audio settings and acceptance angles in the Speech section of this chapter, refer to Speech on page 51. Motion Dashboard Audio System Controls The Motion Dashboard contains volume and directional controls for both speech recognition and recording functions. You should perform this procedure before you train your Tablet PC for speech recognition or voice commands. Speaker Volume. While the noise suppression software removes most background noise, in some cases speaker playback (such as background music or intermittent audio messages) can affect recording. In general, reducing speaker volume will eliminate these extraneous noises. Microphone Volume. The default volume setting for the microphones is at roughly two-thirds of the sliding scale. When recording, dictating, or using voice commands, you may need to adjust this setting until you achieve the desired results. Adjusting Display Settings and Screen Brightness The Display settings on the Motion Dashboard are used to set the brightness level of the LCD display. These settings are used in conjunction with the Ambient Light Sensor (ALS) to maintain a level of brightness and contrast in all lighting conditions. The built-in light sensor located on the Tablet PC front panel measures the ambient light in the environment. The system then automatically balances the brightness of the Tablet PC display in relation to the surroundings. You Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 26 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC can set brightness modes from the Motion Dashboard (note: you can also turn the display off). Fixed Sets the display brightness to a fixed level (ALS is off); use the slider to adjust the display to the desired brightness level Dynamic Sets the display so that the system adjusts the brightness to the preferred level under changing lighting conditions while maintaining viewability (ALS is on) Setting Dynamic Display Brightness: ALS On. When you turn on the ALS, the display will automatically brighten if you move from dim to bright light (within the range supported by the hardware), or automatically dim if you move to an environment with a lower level of lighting. You may not be able to visibly detect the adjustment. Using ALS also helps to reduce power consumption when possible. 1. Open the Motion Dashboard. 2. Under Display, tap the radio button beside Dynamic. 3. Move the slider until the Tablet PC display is at the preferred brightness level. The system will then auto-
matically adjust the display brightness to changes in lighting. Move slider to preferred brightness level. Setting Fixed Display Brightness: ALS Off. 1. Open the Motion Dashboard. 2. Under Display, tap the radio button beside Fixed. 3. Move the slider until the brightness is at the desired level. The system will keep the same brightness level at all times; that is, it will not adjust the display brightness to changes in lighting. NOTE: In low-light settings, the Fixed brightness setting may keep the display brighter than is needed for good view-
ability. Keeping the brightness always at the same level may also use more battery power than necessary. Turning the Display On and Off. 1. Open the Motion Dashboard. 2. Tap Off in the Brightness area of the Display settings. NOTE: To turn the display back on, wave your pen over the display or press any key on the keyboard. When the display comes on, the Fixed/Dynamic setting remains selected as it was. Changing Display Orientation. An interesting and useful feature of the Tablet PC is the ability to change the screen orientation from landscape to portrait by pressing a button. Also, you can rotate the screen in 90-degree increments. The Tablet PC flexibility in changing the screen orientation allows you to set the view to suit your purpose. You may be using an Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 27 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC application where it is more advantageous to have a portrait (vertical) view of the screen. You may be filling out a form that is longer than the standard screen view. At other times you may want to view a wider than normal page;
in this instance you would use landscape view. The Tablet PC provides several ways to change the display orientation quickly:
The quickest way to rotate the screen is to press the Rotate button (Hot Key #2). Be aware that changing the screen orientation may require you to recalibrate the pen; refer to Calibrating and Using Your Digital Pen on page 20. Use the pull-down menu to see the other orientation settings. You can also change the sequence for rotating from one orientation to another. Mirroring or Extending Your Display. The Tablet PC has a Dual Head Video Controller that lets you run a presentation from your Tablet PC on an external monitor or data projector while taking notes in ink. You can also move applications onto a second monitor to create additional work space. How To Connect the Tablet PC and a Monitor or Projector Example. 1. Plug the VGA monitor cable into the VGA port on the Tablet PC or Motion FlexDock for the LE Series. 2. Connect the external monitor or data projector to a power outlet and turn it on. The software recognizes the external monitor or data pro-
jector and searches for a driver. 3. If necessary, install the driver from the CD supplied by the monitors 4. Set up the mirrored desktop or external display, using the steps in manufacturer. the following sections. IMPORTANT: Be sure to drag any application window back to the Tablet PC display before shutting down the external data projector or monitor. Otherwise, you cannot access the appli-
cation(s) to shut it down. If you do leave an application open on the extended display, you can disable it from the Windows Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 28 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Control Panel Display Properties or from the Motion Dashboard. Setting Up a Mirrored Display. Use this feature to connect an external projector for presentations or an extra display on your desk. This example shows a Word document (1) displayed (mirrored) on both the Tablet PC (2) and an external monitor (3). Mirrored Display Example: (1) Word document; (2) Tablet PC display; (3) external monitor NOTE: The resolution and orientation of the external monitor will be the same as the Tablet PC display. To Mirror the Tablet PC Display, Do the Following:
1. Open the Motion Dashboard. 2. Select the Mirror Display radio button under External Monitor. This setting automatically creates an identical display on the exter-
nal monitor. NOTE: You can also tap the icon for the Intel Graphics Media Accelerator Driver for Mobile, in the system tray at the bottom right of the Tablet PC display (or found in the Windows Control Panel) to set up this feature from the Graphics Media pop-up menu. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 29 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Setting Up an Extended Display. Use this feature when you want to simultaneously open applications on two monitors and significantly expand your workspace without hiding open documents under layers of other work. This example shows the Tablet PC (1) and an external monitor (2) with an Excel spreadsheet extended across both. It also shows a Word document
(4) on the Tablet PC and e-mail (5) on the extended desktop. Extended Desktop Example: (1) Tablet PC display; (2) external monitor; (3) spreadsheet; (4) Word document; (5) email message To Extend the Tablet PC Display, do the following:
1. Open the Motion Dashboard. 2. Tap the Extend Display radio button under External Monitor. This setting automatically extends the Tablet PC display to the external monitor. NOTE: You can also tap the icon for the Intel Graphics Media Accelerator Driver for Mobile in the system tray at the bottom right of the Tablet PC display (or found in the Windows Control Panel as Intel GMA Driver for Mobile) to set up this feature from the pop-up menu, or tabbed window respectively. Creating Schemes for External Monitors To create a special screen resolution scheme. This feature can be used to create named schemes for one or more external monitors. After creating and saving the scheme, you can access it by right-clicking on the operating system desktop and selecting the scheme name from the pop-up menu that is shown. 1. Tap the Intel Graphics Media Accelerator Driver for Mobile icon in the system tray, located at the bottom-right corner of the display;
then select Graphics Options > Graphics Properties. 2. This example illustrates the Mobile Intel 915GM/GMS, 910GML Express Chipset Family window. From that window, select the Schemes tab. The current Video Mode is displayed. (The default mode is 1024 x 768 True Color (60 Hz). 3. Select the desired video mode for the new scheme 4. Tap the New... button in this window. 5. Type in a name for the new scheme. Tap OK to save the scheme. 6. Highlight this new scheme in the Schemes window. 7. Add or change the parameters for this scheme. 8. Tap Save. Right-click on the desktop, select Display Mode and the new scheme name will be displayed. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 30 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Helpful Hints: Mirrored and Extended Modes Use a mouse pointing device and keyboard to operate in these modes. The pen does not work in the external monitor space of the extended mode. Refer to Mobile Intel Help for more information about creating schemes for external monitors. POWER MANAGEMENT The Tablet PC provides access to a comprehensive suite of power management functions by using the buttons and controls on the Motion Dashboard. Configuring Your Power Management Settings The following power-related settings can be accessed, monitored or controlled from the Motion Dashboard. Power schemes Alarms for low and critical battery Power meter readings for up to two batteries Advanced power settings Hibernation settings Tapping the Properties button in the Power area of the Motion Dashboard opens the Power Options Properties window. Each of the power options is represented by a tab in this window. Tapping one of the tabs shows the various properties for that aspect of the Tablet PC power management feature. The following example shows the window open at the Power Schemes tab; it illustrates the various power schemes properties that can be set for the Tablet PC. The remaining option properties windows are described, but illustrations to show the various options are not included in this User Guide. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 31 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Power Schemes. Tap the Power Schemes tab to show the Power Schemes window. You can select from a set of pre-defined power schemes that apply to a wide variety of home and work environments. Try it yourself by selecting one of the options from the pull-down menu and seeing how your choice affects the power settings. This operation also gives you the flexibility to define your own scheme and keep the same name or rename it to something that makes more sense to you. Alarms. The Alarms tab shows the Alarms window. This option lets you specify the point at which battery alarms are activated for both the low and critically low battery level states. You also define the action that the Tablet PC should take when that battery level is reached. For example, you may choose to have the Tablet PC sound an alarm, or you may prefer to receive a text message. Power Meter. The Power Meter tab shows the Power Meter window and shows a visual indication of the Battery Status for battery #1 and #2 (if present and attached to the Tablet PC). The icon shows the remaining battery level and the text shows the percentage remaining. You can click on a battery icon to open a detailed information window for that battery. Advanced. The Advanced tab shows the Advanced window where you specify the power settings options that you want to use. You can also specify what you want the Tablet PC to do when you press the Power switch. Your choices include everything from doing nothing, going into standby mode, to hibernation, or to performing a shut down of your computer. Hibernate. The Hibernate tab opens the HIbernate window where you enable or disable hibernation by using the Hibernation checkbox. This window also shows information about the hard drive space on your computer and details the amount of hard disk drive space required for safe Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 32 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC hibernation. Selecting Hibernate has the following advantages over placing your Tablet PC in the Stand By state:
Hibernate saves the state of the desktop and applications Hibernate consumes no battery power When you return from the Hibernate state, you return to where you were when you entered hibernation. Checking Your Battery Power Level. There are several ways to see how much battery power is left on your Tablet PC. You can determine the remaining battery power by doing any of the following:
Reading Battery Power from the Tablet PC Display To check the power level while you are on battery power, move the pen over the Power Meter icon, shown here, in the system tray at the bottom-right corner of the Tablet PC display. This displays the number of hours of battery power and the percentage of battery power left. (Also, the blue area on the battery icon gets smaller as the battery discharges.) Reading Battery Power from the Battery Gauge (requires battery removal) Ensure that AC power is plugged into the Tablet PC, or that the Tablet PC is turned off. Turn the system over so that you are looking at the back and remove the battery from the top of the tablet. The gauge is mounted on the backside of the standard battery. Press the button and look at the LEDs. Each LED represents approximately 20% of the total available charge. (If the optional Extended Battery is attached, the battery gauge is located on the backside of the Extended Battery and can be checked without removal.). Spring-Loaded Latch Locking Latch Slide latches toward center to open Extended Battery Connector Under Sliding Panel (must be open to install Extended Battery) Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 33 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Caution: When you replace the standard battery, make sure that the locking latch is in the correct position, moved fully to the right to lock the battery in place, and that the battery is firmly installed. Reading Battery Power from Motion Dashboard The Motion Dashboard also has a battery power gauge that displays the percent of remaining battery charge. If a Standard Battery and a Extended Battery are both attached, the power reading is the cumulative amount of both batteries. Reading Battery Power from the Power Meter Right-click on the Power Meter icon in the system tray, located in the lower right-hand corner of the display window (only visible if you are running on the battery). To see remaining power, tap Power Meter; or tap Adjust Power Properties > Power Meter tab. From the Windows Control Panel (in Classic view), double-click Power Options. Or (in Category View), tap Performance and Maintenance, then tap Power Options. Using Your Batteries This section describes how to use your Tablet PC battery. The Standard Battery is located at the top of the Tablet PC. There is an optional Extended Battery that can be attached to the back of the Tablet PC. The upper center area of the back of the system includes a small sliding panel that covers the terminal connections for the Extended Battery. Caution: Ensure that the sliding panel is open before attempting to attach the Extended Battery. Otherwise, there may be damage to the Extended Battery connector. Both batteries are designed to be re-charged by using the AC adapter when attached to the Tablet PC. Charging the Battery. When you connect the Tablet PC to AC power with a battery attached, the system automatically charges the battery until it reaches full charge. If two batteries are attached, the primary battery charges first, followed by the secondary battery. The charging sequence is staggered to ensure that both batteries become fully charged at nearly the same time. The standard battery charges to the 80% level, followed by the Extended Battery charging to the 80% level. Then each battery charges for a short interval until both reach 100%. The Battery Status LED is on the Tablet PC flashes amber when the battery is at a critically low level and changes to solid amber while charging. When the battery is fully charged, the Battery Status LED is solid blue. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 34 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC WARNING: To avoid injury, keep the battery within the recommended temperature range when charg-
ing it. Wait until it cools to room temperature before recharging it in the Tablet PC or the battery charger. For more information, see the Safety and Regulatory Guide shipped with your Tablet PC or the documen-
tation that came with the battery charger. Or go to www.motioncomputing.com/support to view these documents. To charge the battery:
1. Plug the AC adapter into the Tablet PC, then into a wall outlet or power strip. (Completely recharging the battery may take up to two hours, although the battery reaches an 80% charge in much less time.) Swapping the Battery. You can swap the Standard Battery while the system is powered on, with or without having the Tablet PC plugged into an AC power outlet. 1. If the Tablet PC is running, open the Motion Dashboard and tap Stand By. The Tablet PC immediately goes into the Stand By state. 2. Alternatively, go to Start > Turn Off Computer. 3. Do one of the following:
If you are logged on to a domain: When the Turn Off Computer window appears, tap Stand By or Hibernate from the drop-down list. If you are not logged on to a domain: Press the Shift key on your external keyboard or tap Shift on the TIP On Screen Keyboard to change the option from Stand By to Hibernate. NOTE: Here are some key differences between putting the Tablet PC in Stand By or Hibernate mode to swap the battery:
If you choose Stand By, the Tablet PC is designed to maintain your system for up to 30 seconds while you swap the battery. However, you may have less than 30 seconds if you are running a number of programs that drain power faster. You should save any data before putting the system in Stand By to swap the battery. Choosing Hibernate gives you more time to swap the battery. Hibernate saves the status of the Tablet PC to your hard drive. 4. Tap Hibernate or Stand By. The Tablet PC opens a dialog box stating that it is preparing to standby or hibernate. 5. Wait until the system shuts down. In Hibernate, all LEDs are off; in Stand By, the Power LED flashes. 6. Slide the battery release latches on the back of the Tablet PC toward the center and lift the battery upward to remove it. 7. Insert the new battery until you hear the left latch click, which ensures the new battery is correctly seated. Slide the right latch fur-
Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 35 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC ther to the right to lock it in place. Check to make sure the latches are fully seated. CAUTION: To avoid damage to the Tablet PC, install only Motion Computing batteries, which are specially designed for the Tablet PC. Disposing of Used Batteries. The Tablet PC contains a Lithium-ion (Li-
ion) battery that should be disposed of at a hazardous materials recycling center when it is no longer serviceable. Do not throw it in a waste receptacle where it will be sent to a landfill. Helpful Hints: Battery and Power Management Use AC power when available to lengthen the batterys usable life. The battery will charge automatically as you run on AC power, so leave the battery in the Tablet PC while you are working. Use AC power when installing software or writing to a CD, and for opti-
mal battery life, when using a CD or DVD player. When using battery power, if you leave the Tablet PC unattended, place the system in Stand By or Hibernate. Keep in mind that the display, processor, PC Cards, SD cards, wireless cards, and accessory drives all draw on the battery, so adjust properties and disable unused accessories and PC Cards when operating on bat-
tery power. When using battery power, adjust the power mode and display bright-
ness to lower settings to prolong the battery life. Turn off all wireless devices through the Motion Dashboard when not being used. Enable the Ambient Light Sensor (ALS) through Motion Dashboard. See the section Adjusting Display Settings and Screen Brightness on page 26. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 36 SECURITY FEATURES AND SETTINGS Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Motion Computing has strongly embraced the need for enhanced platform-
based security for the Tablet PC. The result of that commitment has been to provide an out-of-box, safe computing environment that enables strong security protection and that will serve as the foundation for complementary add-on security technologies. These core security features include password-protected Phoenix TrustedCore BIOS with HDD locking and networking control, a universal security lock slot, the Motion Security Center, a built-in fingerprint reader, a Trusted Computing Group Trusted Platform Module (TPM), and a Smart Card-ready platform. The Motion Computing Tablet PC includes a comprehensive security solution that is designed to protect the hardware platform, the operating system, and any information stored on the Tablet PC from most potential outside threats. The Motion Security Center includes the following:
Motion OmniPass Infineon TPM Microsoft Security Center Motion Security Center The Motion Security Center consolidates the tablet security applications into one single security management dashboard. It provides the ability to comprehensively manage the security applications and settings from a single point. You can also find quick links for help with various security-
related tasks. Motion Security Center provides access to Motion OmniPass, Infineon TPM, and Microsoft Security Center. Click on those headings to launch the respective application. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 37 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Motion OmniPass and Fingerprint Reader The Motion OmniPass Control Center and the Fingerprint Reader are vital elements of the Motion Security Center. Using this application and the Fingerprint Reader, you can define the security and convenience features of your Tablet PC. When implemented within the security policies of your work environment, the OmniPass authentication tools add another layer of security for your passwords, files, and other logons. The OmniPass application can be opened by tapping the OmniPass icon (shown at right) in the System tray. Or, you can open the application by opening the Motion Dashboard then Motion Security Center > Motion OmniPass. The OmniPass Control Center window is shown below. There is extensive help supporting the Motion OmniPass Control Center. To get help on a specific topic, tap the Help button in the Motion OmniPass Actions panel, and use the Search or Index function. At this point you can choose from the following options:
Manage OmniPass Users and Settings to add users Change OmniPass System Settings Manage Your Passwords Protect Your Files Also, notice that there are three selection areas, an action panel and two information panels, at the left side of the window. These areas allow actions or show specific information. Action panel Log Off Current User Switch User Identity Password Information Help Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 38 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC User Information panel Shows current user information Version Detail panel Shows version and build Information Manage OmniPass Users and Settings. When you select this action you are presented with the following options:
Add a new user to OmniPass Remove a user from OmniPass Import a new user into OmniPass Export an OmniPass profile These are advanced operations and may not be part of your typical work flow. If you need more information about this aspect of the Motion OmniPass application, refer to the OmniPass Help by tapping Help in the Action panel. Other OmniPass Set Up Functions. You can also tap the Change User Settings icon; the Change User Settings window is opened where you can select from the following operations:
Audio Settings Taskbar Tips Encrypt/Decrypt Enrollment Use radio buttons to set the desired audio setting Use radio buttons to set the desired taskbar tip level Select digital certificate or select an algorithm for encryption Use the enrollment wizard to create a user account or to enroll new authentication devices (e.g., fingerprint reader, digital certificates) Manage Your Passwords Opens the User Name/Domain dialog where you enter the password and domain information to authenticate the user for access to the password vault. There you can change your password. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 39 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Protect Your Files Browse to select files to be encrypted Browse to select encrypted files to decrypt Fingerprint Reader. The built-in fingerprint reader lets you scan your fingerprint and associate it with a password. This offers a quick and convenient way to log on to your Tablet PC, provides global password management, and helps protect your Tablet PC data from unauthorized access. The illustration at the right shows the bi-directional scan of a fingerprint. You can move your selected finger from left-to-right or right-to-left. Refer to Helpful Hints: Successful Fingerprint Captures on page 41 for more information about obtaining a successful fingerprint capture. The fingerprint reader also functions as a scrolling device; you can move your finger vertically (vertical in relation to the orientation of the Tablet PC) across the scanner to scroll the Tablet PC application within the window. NOTE: The scroll function is disabled while scanning a finger-
print. Using Motion OmniPass Security and the Fingerprint Reader. The fingerprint reader built into your Motion Tablet PC lets you scan your fingerprint to log onto your Tablet PC and perform other functions such as accessing email, e-banking, paying bills online, or accessing network resources. The OmniPass software offers a secure and convenient system for managing your passwords and providing confidentiality for your sensitive data through file encryption. The procedures for setting up the fingerprint reader are divided into basic and advanced options. For a more successful experience, start with the basic set up before setting the more advanced features. Basic setup includes:
Enrolling (your username and password) Selecting a finger Capturing a fingerprint Capturing a second fingerprint Advanced OmniPass setup features include:
User management User settings System settings You can modify the OmniPass startup options You can enable Strong Logon Security to authenticate with a specific security device before showing the windows desktop Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 40 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Vault management The vault is a storage area for passwords and dialogs that you have associated with web sites and applications. Encrypting and decrypting files You can encrypt any file on your Tablet PC except for system files. Only an authenticated user can decrypt files that have been encrypted. Descriptions of these features may be found in the OmniPass Help section
(open Motion Dashboard then Motion Security Center > Motion OmniPass and tap the Help icon in that window). Helpful Hints: Successful Fingerprint Captures Be consistent. Hold your finger and scan at the same angle each time. For example, if you enroll your finger with your hand open (or closed), hold your hand this way each time you scan. If you enroll your thumb while holding the edge of the Tablet PC while scanning, you need to scan like this each time. The scanner is bi-directional; you can move your finger from right-to-left or left-to-right. Read the prompts carefully and make sure you are waiting to be prompted before each swipe. Swiping too fast or too slow can make a capture unsuccessful. Change the swipe speed until you learn what speed works best. When scanning, press hard enough to fully contact both the nickel-col-
ored ring and the sensor; you do not have to press hard. Rub your fingers together to stimulate the natural skin oils so your fin-
gerprint is easier for the sensor to detect. Conversely, wipe your finger off so nothing interferes with the scan. If you are repeatedly having trouble getting a good scan, you may need to clean the sensor. First, power down the Tablet PC and remove the battery. Then, clean the sensor using a cotton swab sprayed with a win-
dow-type cleaner (no bleach, solvents, or abrasives); then dry the sen-
sor. Do not spray, pour, or otherwise dispense any liquid directly on the sensor. If you are having trouble enrolling a specific finger, enroll a different fin-
ger. Typically, you will get the best results by scanning an index finger, thumb, middle finger, ring finger, and little finger in that order. Capturing a Fingerprint 1. Tap Motion Dashboard then Motion Security Center > Motion OmniPass > Manage OmniPass Users and Settings > Add a new user to OmniPass. This step enrolls a new user; you decide on the authentication method (e.g., fingerprint, digital certificate, TPM, etc.). 2. Type in the User Name, Domain, and the Password (if you have one set up) for this OmniPass account. (This may default to the user name you logged on with and the password associated with it.) 3. Tap Next to take you to Selecting a Finger and Practicing Finger-
print Capture. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 41 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC 4. When the Choose Finger window appears, tap the dotted area above the finger you want to enroll. A red arrow appears above the selected finger. IMPORTANT: To get a feel for finger position and swipe speed, tap Practice. Practice takes you through all the en-
rollment steps and helps you get a successful fingerprint scan. You are asked to scan the same finger three times. 5. After you have practiced, you will be asked to scan one more time for verification. After the verification is successful, tap Next to scan your finger again, this time for real (not practice). 6. Place the selected finger over the nickel-colored ring and slowly, with moderate pressure, drag your finger across the sensor from right-to-left or left-to-right. Make sure your entire fingerprint (i.e., your fingertip, not your whole finger) touches both the nickel-colored ring and the sensor surface. NOTE: If the capture is successful, you will see a green fin-
gerprint image in the capture area. If the capture is unsuc-
cessful, an information message appears, such as Scan too slow/too fast... and the green fingerprint will not appear. Swipe your finger across the sensor again as many times as required for a successful scan. 7. After the first scan is successful (and a green fingerprint image appears), OmniPass prompts you to scan your fingerprint additional times. Wait until the green fingerprint disappears from the display and the fingerprint image area is blank before swiping your finger again. After OmniPass successfully captures three fingerprints, the Verify Fingerprint window appears. Swipe your finger one more time to complete the enrollment. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 42 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC When the messages The selected finger has been enrolled in OmniPass and Verification Successful! and a green fingerprint image appear, enrollment is successful and complete. IMPORTANT: During the verification process, you may get red fingerprint images or the message Verification Failed. If this happens, tap the Back button and try again. You can have as many tries as you need for enrollment and verification. 8. Tap Next. When you are asked if you would like to enroll a second fingerprint, tap Yes. IMPORTANT: We recommend that you enroll a second finger-
print. A finger injury could prevent authentication and block access to your accounts. 9. Repeat Steps 6-8 to enroll a second fingerprint. 10. Tap Next. The Audio and Taskbar Settings window appears. You can leave the defaults or change the settings, as desired. 11. Tap Next. The Congratulations window appears. OmniPass recom-
mends that you Export (backup or make a copy of) your user pro-
file so you can restore a lost or corrupted OmniPass configuration or encryption keys. See the section Exporting Your User Profile on page 46 for more information. NOTE: You can export your profile at any time, but this may not be the best time since you are a new user and your profile has little information associated with it. You should backup your profile later and on a routine basis to protect your config-
uration and any stored passwords and encryption keys. 12. Tap Done. 13. Tap Yes to log yourself on as a new user. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 43 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Capturing a Second Fingerprint Later Capturing a second fingerprint is a good practice to follow. While it is easier to do this at the time of the initial enrollment, it is possible to capture a sec-
ond fingerprint later. To do so, open the Motion Dashboard, then tap the following: Motion Security Center > Motion OmniPass > Manage OmniPass Users and Settings > Change User Settings > Enroll Authentication Devices (e.g. enroll a new finger). Then follow the procedure to enroll. Configuring Advanced OmniPass Features OmniPass offers a number of advanced features that provide additional password management for your Tablet PC beyond the basic convenience of logging on. CAUTION: Before configuring advanced features, please read the Motion OmniPass Help, including any cautions or warnings about features. Activating some features (specifical-
ly Strong Logon Security) may, as a normal part of the Om-
niPass operation, change the way your Tablet PC starts up and/or the start-up options that are available. Before using ad-
vanced features, back up your user profile using the feature provided. To access these advanced features, tap the OmniPass icon in the system tray and open the OmniPass Control Center, or open the Motion Dashboard then Motion Security Center > Motion OmniPass. The following is an overview of these features. For further information, refer to the OmniPass Help. Motion OmniPass > Manage OmniPass Users and Settings Add/remove users Import a new user Export OmniPass user profiles; user profiles are stored as .opi
(OmniPass Import/Export) files IMPORTANT: To restore a lost or corrupted OmniPass config-
uration and encryption keys, back up and store a copy of your user profile(s) in a safe place. Motion OmniPass > Change User Settings Change user audio settings Change taskbar tips Modify file encryption settings Enroll authentication devices Set authentication rules and policies NOTE: For instructions for setting up passwords, refer to Re-
placing Password Logons on page 45. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 44 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Change System Settings Startup options for Windows Strong Logon Security Vault Management Password management for websites, applications, or any password-protected resource Encrypt/Decrypt Settings for authenticating encrypted/decrypted files Checking Logon Status. Move your pen over the OmniPass key icon in the system tray to check. A pop-up window shows who is logged on. Open the Motion Dashboard, tap Motion Security Center > Motion OmniPass or tap the OmniPass key icon and open the OmniPass Control Center and look at the Current User/Domain information in the second panel on the left. See the OmniPass Control Center illustration for an example of this window. Replacing Password Logons. OmniPass lets you replace the password logons at websites or anywhere you are prompted to provide your credentials, such as Internet email, ftp logons, client logons, or any restricted-access network resource. Once OmniPass registers your logon credentials, you can conveniently access any of these restricted areas with your fingerprint. You can also access these sites with your password. Perform the following steps. 1. Go to a site that requires a log on (username and password), but do not log on yet. 2. At the site logon prompt, enter your username and password in the fields provided, but do not tap Enter, Submit, OK, or Logon or any other method that accesses the site. 3. Right-click the yellow OmniPass key icon that appears in the system tray at the bottom of the screen. 4. Tap Remember Password. The Windows arrow cursor will change to the OmniPass golden key cursor. 5. Drag this OmniPass cursor to the area on the site where you would normally enter your username and password to log on, but do not tap Logon or Submit yet. (You will complete the logon in Step 9.) 6. If a Friendly Name window appears, enter a name that reminds you of the website. OmniPass associates this name with this web-
site. NOTE: Verify that the Settings for this Password Site are set the way you want the site authenticated:
Automatically enter ... Instantly accesses the site without requiring a password or fingerprint scan. If you are logged in to OmniPass and you access a secure website, OmniPass will automatically submit your user name and password without prompting for verification. If you leave your system unattended and unlocked, this website can be viewed by anyone who has access to your Tablet PC. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 45 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC
(Default) Automatically click ... Prompts you for your OmniPass/Windows password or fingerprint scan when you access the site. 7. If needed, swipe your fingerprint or enter your master password to authenticate these settings. 8. Tap OK, Submit, Sign In, or Logon to access the site. 9. Tap Finish to complete the Remember Password procedure. The site location, the credentials to access the site, and the OmniPass authentication settings for the site are now stored in the OmniPass secure database. Logging Onto a Remembered Site 1. Open a website where you have set up the OmniPass logon (that is, 2. Swipe your finger when you are prompted for a fingerprint/master a Remembered Site). password authentication. NOTE: You can remove a remembered site through the OmniPass Control Center > Vault Management >
Manage Passwords option. Exporting Your User Profile. The OmniPass Help application contains information about exporting your user profile. Go to Motion Dashboard then Motion Security Center > Motion OmniPass, and tap Help in the Action panel. Configuring Strong Logon Security Strong logon security can be configured to require authentication before showing the Windows desktop. Be aware that enabling strong logon security will force you to authenticate with a specific security device (e.g., the fingerprint reader, a Smart Card) before allowing access to the Windows desktop. Once enabled, the Windows XP Welcome screen and Windows fast switching will not be available on this Tablet PC. 1. To enable Strong Logon Security, open the Motion Dashboard, tap Motion Security Center then Motion OmniPass to open the OmniPass Control Center. 2. Tap Change OmniPass System Settings 3. Tap Enable strong logon security. The Enable strong logon security window is shown. 4. Tap the checkbox: Enable strong logon security. 5. Tap the checkbox: Save all changes. A dialog box tells you that you have made changes that require you to restart your computer. 6. Tap OK and restart your computer. During logon you will be required to use the specified authentication device. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 46 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Infineon Trusted Platform Module The Infineon Trusted Security Platform Solution is a comprehensive set of tools provided with your Tablet PC. Together, these tools and the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) result in the one of the most secure computing environments now available on a Tablet PC. With this application it is now possible to create and manage digital certificates for user and platform authentication. The Infineon TPM is not automatically enabled at startup and requires system administrator action to enable the feature. More Information About the Infineon Security Solution. Ask your system administrator for more information or learn more about the Infineon Security Solution by opening the Motion Dashboard then Motion Security Center > Infineon TPM > Getting Started Guide. Windows Security System Components Overview Among the new security features, the Microsoft Windows Security Center automatically sets up a Windows Firewall on your Tablet PC to block unwanted access to your system over the internet and from other networks. The Security Center system provides security alerts during startup and messages while running Internet Explorer. These messages are a normal part of the operating system. Microsoft provides information with these alerts to help you decide what action to take. In addition, you can set up the firewall to block all outside sources from connecting to your system (recommended) or can make exceptions to allow communications with a certain program. Within these settings, you can change the scope to specify a set of computers for which this port or program is unblocked. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 47 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Microsoft Security Center Lets you check security settings and learn more about improving security. Access is via open Motion Dashboard > Motion Security Center. Windows Firewall On by default; helps protect your Tablet PC against viruses and other security threats, such as intruders who might try access over the Internet or a network. Tap the Windows Firewall icon on the Control Panel (Classic view) or the Security Center > Windows Firewall icon (Category view). From here, you can add exceptions to bypass selected programs and services. If a program or service needs to open the firewall to perform, it notifies you and lets you decide whether to open the firewall and allow access. Automatic Updates Checks for the latest important updates and installs them automatically. Configure from the Microsoft Security Center. Internet Explorer Provides security settings to warn you about viruses and other security threats that can spread over the Internet or other types of networks; blocks certain website features and gives you a warning, so you can decide whether it is safe to proceed. Access from Internet Explorer Tools > Internet Options > Security. You can always bypass the settings for sites of your choice by changing the options for that site. Pop-up blocker in Internet Explorer. Stops most browser windows from popping up without your permission, giving you more control over your Web browsing experience. Access from Internet Explorer Tools > Internet Options > Security. You can always bypass the settings for sites of your choice by changing the options for that site. Microsoft Security Center. The Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 Operating System provides new security features that help defend against viruses, worms, and hackers. To learn more about these features, go to Motion Dashboard then Motion Security Center > Microsoft Security Center or tap the Windows Security Alerts icon in the system tray (this icon only remains active for a short time on your desktop). Using Windows Security. Passwords protect your Tablet PC from unauthorized access. Passwords can create different levels of protection for your Tablet PC and its data. Operating system passwords Secure the files on your Tablet PC from other users BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) passwords Secure the software routines that test hardware at startup, start the operating system, and support the transfer of data among hardware devices System password Locks access to the BIOS set up Boot password Locks access to the system Hard Disk Drive (HDD) password Secures your data so the HDD cannot be accessed by removing it and connecting it to another Tablet PC Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 48 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Setting the Windows Operating System Password. Be aware that the following advanced procedures require you to make changes in Windows BIOS. You should not perform this procedure unless you are comfortable with the following cautionary information. You can set up a Windows operating system password going to Start > Control Panel > User Accounts > Create a new account... (Classic View) Setting BIOS Passwords. CAUTION: We strongly recommend that you read the information in this section carefully to understand the implications of setting up a BIOS system password. If you set up a BIOS System password and enter it in-
correctly several times, you will be locked out of the system. If you become locked out, you can restart the Tablet PC and retry the password again. You can restart the Tablet PC and re-enter the password as many times as you need to. Howev-
er, if you are unsuccessful in entering the password, you will not be able to access your Tablet PC. If this happens, contact Motion Computing Technical Support at www.motioncomputing.com/support for assistance. Have your Tablet PC serial number available (on the label on the back of the system). The level of security you want on your Tablet PC helps determine what BIOS password(s) you set. Setting a BIOS System Password. Perform these steps to set up a password to access the PhoenixBIOSTM Set Up Utility on the Tablet PC:
NOTE: These procedures describe using the pen to enter information; you can also attach an external keyboard if you prefer. 1. Start the Tablet PC. 2. When the Motion Computing splash screen appears, quickly press Hot Key #2. If you miss the splash screen, turn the Tablet PC off then back on and try this step again. 3. From the PhoenixBIOS Set Up Utility, tap Security on the menu bar. 4. To set up a System password, double-tap Enter next to Set System Password. 5. Type in a System Password using the On Screen Keyboard. 6. Tap Enter. 7. Type in the password again to confirm it. 8. Tap Enter. The system returns to the Security screen and the Sys-
tem Password reads Set. A password is now required to enter the PhoenixBIOS Set Up Utility. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 49 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC 9. To set up a Password on boot, tap Disabled next to Password on boot until Enabled is highlighted. You will not be prompted to type in another password because Password on boot uses the System password. NOTE: You cannot set up Password on boot until you set up a System password. 10.If you have finished setting up a password, tap Exit or press the Esc key on the Tablet PC to exit the PhoenixBIOS Set Up Utility. 11. When you exit, you are asked to select from the following options:
Exit Saving Changes Exit Discarding Changes Load Set Up Defaults Discard Changes Save Changes 12. Select the desired action. 13. Confirm the selection by tapping Yes. Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Password. To set up a password to start the Tablet PC (so no one can access the information on the HDD of your Tablet PC even if it is removed and installed in another Tablet PC without the proxy password):
1. Start the Tablet PC. 2. When the Motion Computing splash screen appears, quickly press Hot Key #2. If you miss the splash screen, turn the Tablet PC off then back on and try this step again. 3. From the PhoenixBIOS Set Up Utility, tap Security on the menu bar. 4. To set the HDD password, double-tap Enter next to Set Hard Disk Password. 5. Type in a New Password. 6. Tap Enter. 7. Type in the password to confirm it. 8. Tap Enter. The system returns to the Security screen and the HDD Password is Set. (When you exit then re-enter the PhoenixBIOS setup, the HDD Password is Locked.) 9. If you have finished setting up a password, tap Exit or press the Esc key on the Tablet PC to exit the PhoenixBIOS Set Up Utility. 10. When you exit, you are prompted to select from the following options:
Exit Saving Changes Exit Discarding Changes Load Set Up Defaults Discard Changes Save Changes 11. Select the desired action. 12. Confirm the selection by tapping Yes. Clearing Tablet PC Security. To clear the Tablet PC PhoenixBIOS security:
1. Start the Tablet PC. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 50 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC 2. When the Motion Computing splash screen appears, quickly press Hot Key #2. If you miss the splash screen, turn the Tablet PC off then back on and try this step again. 3. From the PhoenixBIOS Set Up Utility, tap Security on the menu bar. If you have rebooted, you will be prompted to enter the password(s) you have set up. 4. To clear the System and Password on boot passwords, double-tap Enter next to Set System Password. 5. Type in the Current Password. 6. Leave the space blank next to Enter New Password. 7. Tap Enter. 8. Leave the space blank to Confirm New Password. 9. Tap Enter. 10. When the Security screen appears, the System Password should be Clear and the Password on boot Disabled. 11. To clear the HDD password, double-tap Enter next to Set Hard Disk Password. 12. Type in the Current Password. 13. Leave the space blank next to Enter New Password. 14. Tap Enter. 15. Leave the space blank to Confirm New Password. 16. Tap Enter. 17. When the Security screen appears, the HDD Password should now display Clear. SPEECH Introduction to Speech The speech recognition capability in the Tablet PC provides two distinct operations; there is a Voice Command mode and a Dictation mode. These selections are visible as buttons in the Tablet PC Input Panel (TIP). The following steps lead to success in setting up the speech feature. View the tutorial on speech recognition Set acceptance angle and the skew using the Motion Dashboard Adjust microphone volume Go through training Dictation mode requires additional training and results in converting your spoken words into typewritten text. The Voice Command and Dictation modes are described in this section. Motion Speak Anywhere Technology The Motion Speak AnywhereTM audio system combines the Knowles Acoustics IntelliSonicTM software application with integrated microphones to let you record audio, dictate notes, and use voice commands without the need for a microphone headset. These capabilities make the Motion Tablet PC with Speak Anywhere technology a valuable tool for mobile users in a variety of work settings, including small or large groups, or for individual dictation or voice commands. Integrated microphones, two of the three are used at one time The integrated microphones help optimize the sound capturing capabilities of Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 51 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC the Tablet PC for speech recognition and voice recording. The locations of the microphones have been carefully designed to let the system detect sound input from a specific angle, rejecting sounds from outside that angle. There are three microphones; the software determines which two of the three provide the best results. Knowles Acoustics IntelliSonic software This software lets you direct sounds coming from a specific direction to the microphones, while can-
celing interfering noise from other directions, thus minimizing the effects of environmental noise and eliminating acoustic echo feedback. It is based on the following audio technologies:
Array Processing or beam forming software Removes all sound outside a software-defined angle of acceptance Noise Suppression Removes background and ambient noise Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) Removes echo caused by the microphone picking up the systems speaker output, thus preventing feedback Speech Recognition Speech recognition lets you convert spoken words into typed text or into voice commands, you can use speech to correct errors, format text, or control programs. This is sometimes quicker than typing or writing text. Before you can use speech recognition, you must first train the system for your voice, pronunciation, speaking pace, and inflection. These adjustments are made through the Speech utility on the TIP window. Speech recognition, including dictation and voice commands is available through the TIP window. Tap the Tools and Options icon in the TIP. If this is the first time you have activated Speech, you will be asked to complete the Voice Training application. The more training you do, the better the speech recognition. Tap here to activate speech recognition Dictation mode Selected by tapping Dictation. Changes everything you say to text; use to enter text directly into any document or text box when you do not want to use the pen or keyboard Voice command mode Selected by tapping Command. Listens for specific words that correspond to an existing list of available voice com-
mands; use to quickly switch between programs, for saving documents, etc. NOTE: To turn off speech, tap the button for Dictation or Com-
mand (whichever you are using). Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 52 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC For additional information about setting up speech recognition, you can tap Help (the Question mark in the circle) on the TIP window and search for speech. Using Motion Dashboard Directional Controls. The Microphone settings in the Motion Dashboard include three radio buttons that define the directional angle that is to be used for speech recording. The selected setting determines the angle of acceptance. The following information is intended to help you understand the differences between the narrow, medium, and wide angles. However, the best reference will be your actual experience in using the technology. There are three microphones, but only two are used at one time. If you are in landscape mode, the microphones along the bottom edge (as viewed in primary landscape mode) of the Tablet PC are used. If you are in portrait mode, the two microphones along the right side are used. Angle of acceptance. Three pre-defined angles of acceptance are part of the Motion Speak Anywhere audio technology:
Narrow Angle Best setting for dictation, Voice over IP, voice noisy environments; the microphones detect sound on a narrow angle near the bottom center (landscape orientation) or top center
(portrait orientation) of the display. If you do not speak within the angle of acceptance, e.g., if you turn your head while dictating or change the angle of the Tablet PC, the sound will not be recorded. Medium Angle (default) Best setting for a small group, conference table, voice quiet environment; microphones detect at a wider angle Wide Angle Widest angle of acceptance. Try starting with this setting (even for dictation) before using a more restricted angle. Change to the Narrow or Medium Angle to eliminate more background noise. 1 Narrow Angle; 2 Medium Angle; 3 Wide Angle; 4 Microphones (only two of the three are shown in the illustration). Skew angle. The pre-set sound detection area is straight in front of the system display. If you want the system to receive sound from Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 53 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC elsewhere, you can skew the receiving direction towards one or the other microphone (keeping the same relative angle of acceptance. Setting up the skew angle:
1. Open the Motion Dashboard. 2. Under Microphone, tap Narrow Angle or Medium Angle. (You can-
not calibrate wide angle.) 3. Move to where you want the microphone to detect your voice. 4. Tap Calibrate. A block of text appears. 5. Read the text aloud, speaking normally towards the Tablet PC micro-
phones. This should take 20-40 seconds. NOTE: In many cases, you will not need to calibrate the microphone because the audio system filters out many unwanted sounds. If you are dictating in an office or recording during a meeting, the audio system may work well with no additional calibration. IMPORTANT: The audio system does not store calibrations. If you change to another angle/position and then return to the previous one, you must re-calibrate the audio system. Enabling Speech Recognition Enrollment. It is necessary to train the system to your voice before you can use the Speech Dictation and Voice Command capabilities of the Tablet PC. The procedure is used to adjust the microphones and train the Tablet PC for the characteristics of your voice. The entire process takes about 10 minutes. It is advisable to move to a quiet environment before starting this procedure. 1. Open the Motion Dashboard and make sure the speakers and microphone are turned on (the default settings). 2. Check that the speaker volume and microphone sound levels on the Motion Dashboard are appropriate for your setting. 3. Tap the TIP icon on the menu bar at the bottom of the Tablet PC dis-
play. The TIP appears. 4. Tap the down-arrow beside Tools to open the Tools options. 5. Tap Speech. The first time you access this function, a Speech Rec-
ognition Enrollment message appears. You must adjust the micro-
phone and train speech recognition before continuing. Until you complete speech training, the speech button is inactive. This takes about 10 minutes. 6. Tap Next and follow the Microphone Wizard. NOTE: To improve speech recognition, run additional speech training sessions. Using Speech Recognition: Setting Up Dictation or Voice Commands. Once you activate speech recognition, depending on your work setting
(single-person office or small or large meeting) and what you plan to do
(dictate, use voice commands), you may want to change the Motion Dashboard microphone angle from Medium (the default) to either Narrow Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 54 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC or Wide. You may then also want to calibrate the direction of the microphones. 1. Open the Motion Dashboard and select the desired angle. 2. (Optional) To use either Medium or Narrow Angle to dictate from a direction other than directly in front of the display, tap Calibrate and read through the calibration script. NOTE: Calibration will skew the angle at which the micro-
phones detect your voice while keeping the same relative an-
gle of acceptance. 3. To start the Speech recognizer, open the TIP window. 4. Select Dictation (to convert spoken words into typed text) or Commands (to use your voice to enter commands, such as Enter, Save, Open). NOTE: For more information about using this feature and for available voice commands, see the Windows Help and Sup-
port Center where you can search for topics about speech recognition and training. Also available are the speech tutori-
als. To find the speech tutorials, select Start > Help; then Support > Welcome to Tablet PC > Tablet PC Tutorials. Helpful Hints: Dictating and Recording You may want to start recording or dictating from the Wide Angle
(Motion Dashboard setting) and change to a more-restricted angle
(Narrow or Medium) if too many outside sounds are recorded. The advantage to the Wide Angle is that no sounds will be lost if you change your location. The disadvantage is that outside sounds may be picked up that interfere with the recording. You MUST recalibrate the microphones if you change from one orienta-
tion (landscape) to another (portrait). This is because the skew angle changes and the sound will no longer be in the angle of acceptance. If necessary, refer to the earlier information on skew angle. Even with the Narrow Angle setting, if a sound is loud enough and within the angle of acceptance (no matter how distant), the sound will be picked up by the microphones. The advantage of the Tablet PC is that it detects fewer extraneous sounds than other audio systems. You can fur-
ther limit the detection of these outside sounds by turning down the microphone volume and speaking louder; this reduces the microphones range and restricts their ability to detect extraneous sounds. The Tablet PC contains pre-installed audio components. If you install a third-party audio device (such as USB or Bluetooth devices), the Motion-
installed audio may not work. If this happens, you must reinstall the Motion-audio components. (The Motion audio components are the Sig-
maTel and Knowles Acoustics audio drivers.) After you install these, if you still have problems recording, contact Motion Technical Support or the Bluetooth or USB manufacturers technical support. To improve speech recognition, run additional speech training sessions. Open the Windows Control Panel and select Speech to perform addi-
Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 55 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC tional speech training. As you do this, speech recognition accuracy will gradually improve. PORTS, SLOTS AND CONNECTORS PC Cards The PC Card slot (also referred to as a PCMCIA card slot), located on the right edge of the Tablet PC, holds one Type-II PC Card for networking, memory expansion, or accessory connection. 1. To install a PC Card, insert it label side up. 2. To remove a PC Card, push the button next to the slot until it pops out. 3. Push it again to eject the PC Card. NOTE: Your Tablet PC ships with a plastic blank card in the PC Card slot. When the slot is not in use, we recommend that you leave the plastic blank in place. SD Cards The SD Card slot, located just above the PC card slot on the right edge of the Tablet PC, holds one SD Card for networking, memory expansion, or accessory connection. 1. To install an SD Card, insert it in the slot, label side up. 2. To remove the SD Card, grip the edge of the card and carefully pull it from the slot. Notice that the edge of the Tablet PC is curved slightly in the area of the SD Card. This makes it easier to grip the edge of the card for insertion and removal. Infrared (IrDA) Port The IrDA port is located on the right edge of the Tablet PC near the SD Card slot. The infrared connection protocol allows transfer of data or digital images from any IrDA enabled device to the specified file location on the Tablet PC. Typically, the devices must be within three feet of each other. USB Ports There are two high speed USB ports on the left edge of the Tablet PC. These can be used to attach any USB device to the Tablet PC. Typically a USB device draws power from the Tablet PC and it is advisable to use AC power when one or more USB devices are attached. Running USB devices while on the battery power will affect your power consumption. Speaker Port The speaker port is on the left edge of the Tablet PC. It is marked with a small headphones symbol and is designed as an audio output channel only. You can attach external speakers or headphones to this port. When headphones or external speakers are attached, the internal speakers are disabled. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 56 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Microphone Port The microphone port is on the left edge of the Tablet PC. It is marked with a small microphone symbol and is designed as an audio input/line in channel only. You can attach an external microphone directly to this port to enhance your audio recording capabilities. When an external microphone is attached, the built-in microphones are disabled. DVI-D Connector The DVI-D (Digital Video Interface) Connector is on the left edge of the Tablet PC and is identified by the DVI-D designation. This connector is provided for the direct attachment of a digital video monitor. An optional DVI-D cable is available from Motion Computing for this purpose. When an external monitor is attached, the Motion Dashboard display settings can be used to set the external display as a mirrored or extended display. VGA Connector The VGA Connector is on the left edge of the Tablet PC. It is intended for use with standard analog video displays. An attachment cable is not provided for this purpose; if you use the Tablet PC with a standard VGA-type display, you will need to purchase a corresponding cable. When an external monitor is attached, the Motion Dashboard display settings can be used to set the external display as a mirrored or extended display. Docking Connector The Docking Connector is at the bottom edge of the Tablet PC. It is designed to integrate the Table PC with the new Motion FlexDock for the LE Series. When the Tablet PC is used with the new FlexDock, the port connections on the Tablet PC are replicated on the FlexDock. For more information about the new FlexDock for the LE Series, contact your Motion sales representative or visit the Motion Computing website at www.motioncomputing.com/accessories. WIRELESS NETWORKING There are three technologies available in the Tablet PC for wireless networking connections. Wi-Fi (802.11) Bluetooth Infrared Wi-Fi (802.11) Wireless Connections IMPORTANT: Since wireless set ups differ widely, the infor-
mation presented here is general and may not cover all the steps required for your wireless configuration. For more infor-
mation about wireless networks, you may need to contact your System Administrator. Or, go to Start > Help and Sup-
port and search for wireless help from Microsoft. Although wireless access is available in public areas, your ability to use the wireless access point depends on the following conditions:
Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 57 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Distance from the access point Ability to connect to the access point Service rights to it (which may require an account fee, user name, pass-
word, an/or network set up through an administrator) The access point is not broadcasting a network name (Check your secu-
rity settings, the SSID may not be broadcasting) The security settings may not be configured properly for wireless net-
working. WARNING: FAA regulations require that you disable any wireless connection when traveling by air. If the Wireless LED on the front of the Tablet PC is off, in-
ternal wireless communications are disabled. Enabling/Setting Up a Wireless Connection Through the Motion Dashboard. 1. Open the Motion Dashboard and make sure that Enable Internal 802.11 Wireless Radio is checked. 2. Under Wireless on the Motion Dashboard, tap Properties. 3. In the Wireless Network Connection Properties window, tap the Wireless Networks tab. 4. In the Wireless Networks window, tap View Wireless Networks to see a list of available networks Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 58 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC 5. Highlight the network you want to connect to and tap Connect. 6. Tap OK. NOTE: If you are on a secure network, you may also need to enter a network key. Bluetooth Wireless Connections The internal Bluetooth wireless radio in the Tablet PC is disabled by default. This setting is found in the Motion Dashboard. Bluetooth software comes pre-installed on your Tablet PC. To begin using Bluetooth, open the Motion Dashboard, and check the box that enables your internal wireless Bluetooth radio. The Bluetooth software completes its installation. How To Access Bluetooth. When you first enable Bluetooth on your Tablet PC, you will see a Bluetooth icon in the system tray. This icon offers shortcuts to the Bluetooth Settings window, the Bluetooth File Transfer Wizard, and the Add New Connection Wizard. Press and hold the pen tip on the Bluetooth icon to open the Bluetooth Settings menu. Bluetooth Device Connection Process. The following process is generally common for connecting most Bluetooth devices (keyboard, mouse, printer, cellular phone, PDA, Tablet PC, notebook PC, etc.). The actual steps may be slightly different for every type and brand of Bluetooth device. Read and follow the installation instructions included with your Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 59 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC specific device. These are the four generic steps for connecting to a Bluetooth device. 1. Discover 2. Search 3. Pair 4. Connect 1. Make the device discoverable. Making a Bluetooth device discoverable makes it visible to other Bluetooth devices. Each Bluetooth device uses a different method (pressing a button or key combination) to make it discoverable; this is generally described in the devices documentation. 2. Search for Bluetooth devices in range. This process will find every Bluetooth device that is discoverable and available for connection within 33 feet (10 meters). 3. Pairing. Using a passkey creates a secure connection (pairing) between the Tablet PC and Bluetooth device. This passkey helps prevent data from being intercepted and interpreted by another device. IMPORTANT: Though the passkey exchange helps to secure your data, Bluetooth wireless technology should not be con-
sidered completely secure. 4. Connect the devices. The first time a Bluetooth device is connected to the Tablet PC the drivers are loaded for that device. After this initial connection, some Bluetooth devices may disconnect when they go into power-saving mode. Most will automatically reconnect when they become active again. Using the Bluetooth Application 1. Make sure that either the Bluetooth LED is flashing or that there is a checkmark beside Enable Internal Bluetooth Wireless Radio
(both indicate that Bluetooth is running) in the Motion Dashboard 2. Using your pen, single tap the Bluetooth Devices icon in the 3. Tap Add New Connection to launch the Bluetooth Add New Con-
system tray. nection Wizard. The Bluetooth Settings window is shown, quickly followed by the Add New Connection Wizard. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 60 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC 4. Place the Bluetooth device (mouse, keyboard, printer, etc.) in dis-
coverable mode. NOTE: Each Bluetooth device may have a different way to make it discoverable. Some have a small button on the back of the mouse or keyboard; others may require that you press a key sequence on the keyboard. Look at the documentation that came with the Bluetooth device or visit the manufactur-
ers website for information. 5. After you make the Bluetooth device discoverable, tap Next. The Searching for Bluetooth devices window is shown. When the Bluetooth device is detected, it is shown in the Add New Connection Wizard Select a device window. If multiple devices are detected, each is shown in the window. Select the device to be connected. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 61 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC 6. Tap Next to add the Bluetooth device.The wizard searches for remote device services. The Wizard will display a message that it is connecting and then the passkey number if authentication is required. NOTE: If required, immediately enter the number shown in the Passkey field and press Enter. Consult your device docu-
mentation for more information. It may take a short time to complete the connection. Please wait. 7. When the Completing the Add Bluetooth Device Wizard window appears, the Bluetooth installation is nearly complete. Tap Finish to complete the installation Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 62 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC 8. Take your device for a spin. You can now begin using your Bluetooth device. Important Steps to Take If the Device Is Not Discovered If the Tablet PC fails to detect the Bluetooth device after what you consider a reasonable number of attempts, try the following:
Make sure the Bluetooth LED is flashing. If not, open the Motion Dashboard and enable the Bluetooth Wireless radio button. Make sure the device you are adding is discoverable. There are several things you need to check:
Install new or fully charged batteries in the Bluetooth device; make sure these are installed correctly For keyboards, mice, printers, etc., read the instructions that came with the device or visit the device manufacturers website for information and other troubleshooting tips. Some devices have a button to press or a series of keys to press to make it discoverable. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 63 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Also with keyboards, mice, printers, etc., be sure that when you go through the Add Bluetooth Device Wizard that you place a checkmark beside My device is set up and ready to be found. For Tablet PCs transferring files, both Tablet PCs must turn on the device transfer wizard, although only the receiving Tablet PC needs to be discoverable. Tap the Bluetooth icon and then either Send a file or Receive a file. When you do this, discovery is automatically turned on for the receiving device. Also for Tablet PCs, you need to enable Allow Bluetooth devices to connect to this computer to connect to keyboards, mice, printers, etc. While this is the default, make sure that this setting has not been changed. You find this by right-clicking the Bluetooth icon > Show Bluetooth Devices > Options. When you open the Bluetooth Devices tab, only the connected devices will be displayed. Other devices are only displayed when you add a device using the Bluetooth Device Wizard. Check to see what Bluetooth devices are connected. Tap the Bluetooth Devices icon > Open Bluetooth Settings. On the Devices window, you should be able to see Bluetooth devices that are currently connected. If the Bluetooth card in the Tablet PC still fails to detect the Bluetooth device, contact the device manufacturer or visit their website for assistance. NOTE: A system reboot is not required. The Bluetooth device is ready to use. If you look at the Blue-
tooth Settings window, the connected device or devices are shown. An example of a Bluetooth Settings window with both a Bluetooth keyboard and a Bluetooth mouse is shown below. Switch to Other Bluetooth Software. Your Tablet PC comes pre-installed with Bluetooth from Toshiba. Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 supports certain Bluetooth devices natively (e.g., keyboards and mice). Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 64 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC If you would prefer to use the Windows XP Tablet PC software, please visit http:\\selfhelp.motioncomputing.com for instructions on switching to the native Bluetooth software. Helpful Hints: Bluetooth Wireless Motion Computing and its Bluetooth partners have worked to ensure a positive experience with this technology, as well as to ensure Bluetooth inter-operability. In doing so, the following operating issues have been found:
When simultaneously operating Bluetooth wireless and 802.11 wireless, interference between these wireless technologies impacts Bluetooth performance. This is most noticeable when you try to transfer large amounts of data, such as file transfers or printing large documents. This may also be noticeable when you try to transfer large or small amounts of data may if several Bluetooth devices are operating simultaneously in an office. Bluetooth audio support is currently based on technology that has not been fully developed for speech recognition. In addition, the Bluetooth software in the Tablet PC does not have a pre-installed Bluetooth head-
set profile. Therefore, for speech recognition, we recommend that you not use a Bluetooth wireless headset. Moreover, the Motion Speak Any-
where technology is designed to record clear audio, dictate notes, and use voice commands without the need for any type of microphone head-
set. Should you attempt to install other wireless headset or other audio driv-
ers (such as Bluetooth or USB) over the Tablet PC audio drivers, a mal-
function of the Tablet PC audio system may occur because the drivers may not be compatible. Because Bluetooth is a relatively new technology, some cross-device compatibility issues may occur. If you are having problems with inter-
pretability of Bluetooth devices, contact the manufacturer of your Blue-
tooth device and check its compatibility with the Bluetooth software installed on your Tablet PC. Do not install Bluetooth software from another manufacturer over the Microsoft Bluetooth software installed on the Tablet PC. This will cause malfunction of the Tablet PC Bluetooth system. Using Infrared Wireless Connections The infrared software is installed by default. You can access the Infrared software by going to the Control Panel and tapping the Wireless Link icon. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 65 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Double-tap the Wireless Link icon to open the Wireless Link window. The following shows the Wireless Link window at the Infrared tab. Tap the desired checkboxes. Accessing Image Transfer. To transfer an image from your camera to your Tablet PC, tap the Image Transfer tab in the Wireless Link window. The Image Transfer window is shown. Specify the destination of the received image(s) and tap OK to begin. For information about the Infrared Port, tap the Hardware tab to open that window. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 66 CONFIGURING BUTTONS Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC This section shows you how to program some of the buttons on the front panel of the Tablet PC. It is not necessary for you to customize the buttons, especially at this point in the learning process. Just be aware that it can be done, and as you become more familiar with the Tablet PC, you may want to customize your buttons. You can configure some of the Tablet PC buttons so they perform the functions that you want them to perform. Escape button (Secondary function is programmable) Function button (not programmable) Five-way directional control buttons (Secondary functions of each key are programmable) Hot Keys 1 and 2 (Primary and Secondary functions are programmable) SAS (Ctrl+Alt+Del) (not programmable) - this button is located on the front panel in the upper left corner (when in primary landscape orienta-
tion) above the key icon and the fingerprint reader. SAS button Esc button Fcn button Five- way directional control Dashboard/Hot key #1 Tablet PC Buttons Rotate/Hot key #2 Button Default and Programmable Functions Button Primary Function Programmable Secondary Function
(Press Fcn button
+ this button) Escape Escape key Function Function + other button activates secondary function Secondary function is programmable Not programmable Alt + Tab No secondary function Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 67 Chapter 2 Using Your Motion Tablet PC Secondary functions are programmable Left arrow = Shift
+Tab Right arrow = Tab Up arrow = Page Up Down arrow = Page Down Both primary and secondary functions are programmable Both primary and secondary functions are programmable Not programmable Open Windows Journal Open Tablet PC Input Panel No secondary function Five-way Directional Control Button Dashboard/Hot Key # 1 Rotate/Hot Key
# 2 SAS
(This button is located at the top left corner with a key icon) Works like the arrow keys on a keyboard. The center of the button works like the Enter key. Opens Motion Dashboard Rotates the display Ctrl + Alt + Del
(Windows Task Manager). Also used for domain authentication or logon screen. To change the default button properties:
1. Open Motion Dashboard and tap Pen and Button Options. Or, double-tap the Tablet and Pen Settings icon in the system tray, located in the lower right corner of the display window. 2. Tap Tablet Buttons. 3. Highlight the name of the tablet button you want to reprogram. The button being programmed turns red. 4. Tap Change. 5. On the Change Button Functions window, tap the down-arrow beside Action. This opens the list of actions. 6. Select a new action from the list. NOTE: For some actions, you only need to select the action itself to change the button property. For others, such as to launch a program, you must browse and find the program; or, to set up a key combination, you must press a sequence of keys. You can also tap Reset to return to the button defaults. 7. Tap OK. In the list of Actions, you should see the new action for the button you programmed. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 68 Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance This chapter describes various care and maintenance procedures that you should do on a routine basis with your Motion Tablet PC. CARING FOR YOUR TABLET PC AND ITS ACCESSORIES The Tablet PC display and chassis are designed to be very durable. This section describes the proper care and maintenance that will keep them working and in good condition for a long time. For general information about care of the Tablet PC and its components and accessories, see the Regulatory and Safety Guide packaged with your Tablet PC. CAUTION: Be sure to follow the guidelines listed be-
low when caring for your Tablet PC and its compo-
nents. Improper use may damage the Tablet PC and/
or its components and void the warranty. General Care Protect the Tablet PC from exposure to extreme temperatures, shock, liquids, and strong magnetic fields. Do not open or disassemble the Tablet PC other than to replace memory modules or to replace the battery. Always follow the instructions included with these accessories when performing these procedures. WARNING: To avoid the risk of personal injury or damage to the Tablet PC, when replacing memory modules, turn off your Tablet PC, unplug the AC pow-
er connection, and remove the battery. Ground your-
self by touching a grounded conductive surface, such as a device or appliance with a grounded, three-pronged plug. Avoid touching the pins and leads on the memory and the internal circuitry of the Tablet PC. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 69 Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance When storing the Tablet PC for an extended period of time, unplug AC power and remove the battery after discharging it part way. Do not place heavy objects on top of the Tablet PC. Caring for the Standard and View Anywhere Displays General cleaning of either display Clean fingerprints and most marks from the display surface by wiping it with the soft cloth (provided). Never spray or pour liquids directly onto the display surface itself. Never use an abrasive cleaner on the display. If liquid is spilled on the display, wipe it up immediately. Cleaning the standard display If needed, spray a soft cloth (not directly on the display) with a window-type cleaner and wipe the display. Cleaning the View Anywhere Display If needed, clean with any alcohol-based product recommended for use on anti-reflective glass. Other cleaning products may leave a residue. Avoid using tissues or paper towels to clean the display surface. These contain wood fibers that can scratch the display. Use only the Motion Digitizer Pen on the display. Do not write on the sur-
face with an ink pen or pencil, any pointed or other object that could damage the display surface. Do not place heavy objects on the display surface. Protect the display surface from unnecessary contact by using the Hard-
top Cover or a portfolio when transporting the Tablet PC. Avoid exposing the display to direct sunlight for long periods of time. Caring for the Motion Digitizer Pen Always store the Motion Digitizer Pen in the Tablet PC pen bay or in the portfolio when not in use. Do not store the pen vertically on the tip. Constant tip pressure can affect the pen-to-digitizer interaction. Change the pen tip regularly. See the CAUTION and refer to Replacing the Pen Tips on page 70. The pen contains sensitive electronics. Do not immerse it in liquids. CAUTION: Certain environments may contain parti-
cles or debris that can adhere to the Tablet PC dis-
play or to the pen tip. To avoid damaging the display, clean it frequently with the cleaning cloth, provided with your system. Also, change pen tips regularly, especially if you drop the pen onto a rough surface that could damage the tip or embed debris in it. Dam-
aged pen tips can scratch the display. Consider us-
ing a Motion Slip Case to protect the display and the pen. Replacing the Pen Tips. Normal use eventually wears down the pen tip, so the pen ships with extra tips and a small tip tool for replacing them. 1. Grasp the old tip with the silver ring of the tip replacement tool. Use the notch on the ring to grab the tip. 2. Pull the old tip out of the pen. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 70 TRAVELING WITH YOUR TABLET PC Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance 3. Insert a new tip. 4. Apply slight pressure to push it into place. Ordering New Pens To order additional pens, visit the Motion Computing website at www.motioncomputing.com/accessories. Here are some tips for traveling with your Tablet PC:
Remove all accessories and cables. Remember to pack those you will need while traveling and do not forget to pack at least one Motion digitizer pen. Attach the Hardtop Cover or slip the Tablet PC into a portfolio to protect the display. Protect the pen by keeping it in the Tablet PC pen bay or portfolio case during travel. Pack the Tablet PC securely in a briefcase or hand-carried luggage, and keep it separate from toiletries, liquids, and food. Do not pack it in checked luggage when you travel. Keep the Tablet PC stable during travel; secure it to prevent it from slid-
ing around in overhead bins and car trunks. NOTE: For travel warnings, see the section FAA Wireless Air Travel Requirements in this chapter. Traveling by Air Prepare for airport security by charging the battery in the event Security asks you to start the Tablet PC. Have it hand-inspected or sent through the X-ray scanner, but never carry it through the metal detector. Either turn off or place the Tablet PC in hibernation mode for takeoff and landing. FAA Wireless Air Travel Requirement WARNING: The FAA requires that you suspend wireless operations, such as 802.11 and Bluetooth, before boarding the plane. The easiest way to dis-
able internal wireless operations is by pressing the Wireless on/off button for 1/2 second. You can also uncheck (disable) all wireless devices in the Motion Dashboard. The wireless LED on the Tablet PC front panel, shown here, is off when wireless commu-
nications are disabled. To disable external wireless operations, remove any installed wireless PC Cards. WARNING: Do not transport the Lithium-ion batter-
ies used in your Tablet PC in checked baggage. You may take up to two spare batteries in carry-on lug-
gage in addition to the one in your Tablet PC. Transporting batteries in checked baggage or trans-
porting more than two spare batteries is a violation of transportation regulations. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 71 SYSTEM REPAIR/
RECOVERY PROCEDURE Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance Other Travel Hints Before extended use in the field or long trips away from AC power, adjust the Power properties to maximize battery conservation. Right-
click the Power Meter icon in the system tray to open the Power Options Properties dialog box. Then adjust the options. For more infor-
mation, refer to Helpful Hints: Battery and Power Management on page 36. For international travel, obtain and use the appropriate adapters for your destinations electrical outlets. A current converter is not necessary. You may want to carry proof of ownership or a merchandise passport when traveling internationally. Consult your insurance company and credit card company to learn about emergency travel assistance in the event your Tablet PC becomes lost or disabled. You may never need to perform this procedure, but in the event that your system shows signs of instability or corruption, it may become necessary. In most cases, once initiated, this procedure lets you repair the Tablet PC hard disk drive and retain the original system data, applications, passwords, and settings with no data loss. In those cases where no repair is possible, this procedure overwrites your system data. You can cancel the procedure before the recovery process begins. In this case, you may want to contact your system administrator for assistance. 1. If possible, back up your data files. 2. Turn off your Tablet PC. 3. Insert the Motion Tablet PC Operating System Recovery CD (Win-
dows XP Professional Service Pack 2) into the CD-ROM drive and start the Tablet PC. 4. When prompted, press any key to boot from the CD. 5. On the Set Up screen, select ENTER to set up Windows XP. NOTE: Do not select R=Repair before you accept the End User License Agreement (EULA). If you do, you must exit this procedure, shut down and restart your Tablet PC, then accept the EULA before proceeding. 6. Press F8 to accept the terms of the End User License Agreement. 7. When the next options appear, select from the following:
IMPORTANT: If Windows XP cannot repair your system, this procedure automatically skips to the second option, ESC =
Dont Repair (reformatting):
R = Repair option Installs Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005 on your system, preserving your system data, applications, passwords, and settings ESC = Dont Repair (reformatting) option Reformats your hard disk drive. If Windows XP automatically skips to this option (that is, no repair is possible), you must decide whether to reformat now or Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 72 Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance cancel the procedure. If you decide to reformat, select either Format the partition using the NTFS File System or the NTFS File System
(Quick). If you decide not to reformat, select ESC to cancel the procedure. 8. Continue following the on screen instructions. 9. After your operating system has been reinstalled, you will be prompted to insert the Motion Drivers and Utilities Recovery CD. For a repaired system, this process completes quickly. If your system notifies you to reboot, restart your system. For a reformatted system, this process takes some time while the drivers and utilities are reinstalled. Once Win-
dows loads, your settings and drivers begin to install. Your system may reboot several times during this pro-
cess. No action is required. At this point, you may need to install additional software (such as Microsoft Office), as appropriate, from the Motion Application CD. You may also want to restore your personal preferences and settings. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 73 Chapter 3 Care and Maintenance This page is intentionally blank. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 74 Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support All Motion Computing Tablet PCs have passed a rigorous series of performance and quality-control tests, but now and then a problem may occur. If you do not see a solution among the following system and software issues, check the section Support Options in this chapter or go to our website at www.motioncomputing.com/support. SOLUTIONS TO COMMON PROBLEMS PROBLEM POWER The Tablet PC wont start when I slide the Power switch. CAUSE SOLUTION The Power switch hasnt been fully engaged. Fully discharged battery or no battery and no AC power. Slide and hold the power switch for at least a half-second, but no more than three seconds. Connect the AC adapter to operate the Tablet PC and charge the battery. Press the SAS button (small button with a key icon nearby) to start Windows Task Manager and close the application, or Slide and hold the power switch for at least 5 seconds to force a shutdown of the Tablet PC. Enable Hibernation through Power Option Properties. The Tablet PC wont shut down. An application has locked up the Tablet PC. The Tablet PC wont enter Hibernation mode. Hibernation isnt enabled. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 75 Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support The Tablet PC wont come out of Hibernation mode when running on battery power. Fully discharged battery and no AC power. Connect the AC adapter to provide power to the Tablet PC and charge the battery. The display goes black while the Tablet PC is still turned on. The Tablet PC system has gone into stand by after sitting idle for a period of time. (In this state, the power LED flashes blue.) Slide the power switch for about a second to resume operations. BATTERY Data loss during battery swap. The battery seems to run down very quickly (lasting less than three hours after a full charge). System has gone into low-battery Hibernation mode. (In this state, the power LED is off.) 1. Slide the power switch for about a second to resume operations. 2. Connect the AC adapter to the Tablet PC to charge the battery. The unit is designed to maintain the data and settings for up to 30 seconds in stand by while you swap the battery. This time may vary due to your system and the programs youre running. Accessory devices such as a DVD player and applications that make heavy use of the hard drive drain the battery more quickly. The battery is weakening or defective. When you swap the battery with the unit in stand by, be sure to save your data before removing the battery to avoid data loss. Use AC power when possible and/
or turn off the accessory devices. All batteries weaken over time, but if a new battery is needed, visit the Motion website to order a new battery. DISPLAY The desktop is too big for the display I cant see all of the desktop icons. Screen resolution is set higher than the default 1024 x 768 with 32-bit resolution. Decrease the screen resolution by opening the Motion Dashboard, selecting Graphics Properties, then the Schemes tab. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 76 Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support When I disconnected a second monitor from the Tablet PC, the image became too big for the Tablet PC display. The Tablet PC has attempted to spread the image of a window or desktop beyond the screen area of the active monitor. The display looks dim. Brightness is set too low. The screen is unreadable or distorted. Screen resolution and/or color quality are set incorrectly. Display driver has become corrupted or uninstalled. PEN The Tablet PC digitizer screen doesnt respond to the plastic stylus I use on my PDA. Youre using the wrong input device. The Motion Digitizer Pen tip doesnt line up with the arrow-
cursor when I tap on the screen. The pen and display need recalibrating. 1. Tap the Properties button on the Motion Dashboard. 2. Tap Graphics Options, then Graphics Properties... to open the Properties screen. 3. Select Notebook to make the Tablet PC the primary display. Adjust brightness from the Motion Dashboard. Reset resolution to 1024 x 768 and color quality to 32-bit by opening the Motion Dashboard, Graphics Properties, then the Schemes tab. 1. Open the Windows Control Panel, select Performance and Maintenance (Category View). or System (Classic View). 2. Select the Hardware tab. 3. Select Device Manager. 4. Open Display adapters. 5. Double-tap on an adapter. 6. Select the Driver tab. 7. Choose Update Driver... and follow the Installation Wizard. Only the Motion Digitizer Pen lets you write on the Tablet PC display. The Tablet PC doesnt respond to other tablet pens or to a plastic stylus. Open the Motion Dashboard and select Calibrate. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 77 Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support When I write, I unintentionally click the pen function button while Im writing with the pen. Youre pressing the pen button with your thumb or finger when you write or gripping the pen too tightly and accidentally pressing the pen button. This enables the right-click function of the pen. Try these hints:
Readjust how you hold the pen. Place your fingers on either side of the pen function button when you write. Practice using the pen function button with both your index fin-
ger and thumb to see which you prefer. Relax your grip. Only a light touch is needed to write with the pen. Deactivate the pen right-click function through Tablet and Pen Settings. Instead, press and hold the pen to the display sur-
face to right-click. The pen button doesnt work. I cant get it to right-click. The right-click option for the pen button may be deactivated. You may not be correctly timing clicking the pen button and tapping the pen on the display. The buttons on the Tablet PC dont do what I expect them to do. Button functions have been changed. Re-activate the right-click option:
Double-click the Tablet and Pen Settings icon, select Pen Options, and reselect Use pen button to right-click. Select Apply>OK. To right-click, hold the pen button down and then firmly tap on the display. Double-tap the Tablet and Pen Settings icon, then Tablet Buttons. You can reset the buttons to the defaults. NOTE: Button functions are associated with the orientation in which theyre programmed. INTERFACE/PORTS The system doesnt recognize the PC card Ive inserted. The card is incorrectly inserted. The device is not supported. Eject the card and re-insert it with the label side up. Check Windows XP compatibility. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 78 The system doesnt recognize a USB device. The Tablet PC is sitting in the Motion FlexDock for the LE Series, but the system doesnt recognize any accessory devices, such as the external monitor or DVD/CD RW. AUDIO No sound is coming from the built-
in speakers. No sound is coming from any speakers. Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support Windows XP may take a short time to recognize the device. The accessory isnt connected to the Tablet PC correctly. The correct driver isnt built into Windows XP. The Tablet PC isnt fully seated in the Motion FlexDock for the LE Series. Wait until Windows XP recognizes the device. Check the connection cable and be sure it is inserted into the correct port on the Tablet PC and the accessory device. Use the devices installation CD or check the manufacturers website for the correct driver. Reseat the Tablet PC in the Motion FlexDock for the LE Series. Connecting a headset or external speakers mutes the built-in speakers. Audio volume is too low or has been muted. Disconnect the headset or external speakers if not in use. Open the Motion Dashboard and adjust the speaker volume by sliding the volume slider or uncheck the Mute button. Ive forgotten my BIOS password and cant access my system. The Tablet PC will let you enter several passwords incorrectly before it temporarily locks the system. The program Im working in has stopped responding, but the cursor moves and other programs work. The program has crashed. Turn the Tablet PC off and back on and try re-entering your password
(you can do this as many times as needed). If you have forgotten your password, contact Motion Computing Technical Support for information about unlocking your system at www.motioncomputing.com/
support. Press the Security button (small button with a key icon) on the Tablet PC front panel to open the Task Manager and end the non-
responsive program. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 79 Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support The system seems to be operating more slowly than usual. The hard disk drive is full or nearly full. The disk needs defragmenting. COMMUNICATIONS The wireless communication keeps connecting even when I dont want it to. Data doesnt transfer through the wired Ethernet cable. The default setting is On. The Ethernet cable is not connected correctly. Run the Disk Cleanup utility to clear out unnecessary and temporary files. Remove unneeded programs and files. Run Disk Defragmenter to consolidate files and folders on the hard drive. Consult the Performance and Maintenance section of the Microsoft Help and Support Center. Uncheck the wireless checkboxes in the Motion Dashboard. Reconnect and check the activity LEDs next to the LAN (RJ-45) port. They should flash green and amber. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 80 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support Can I make the battery charge last longer?
Change to the Max Battery power scheme (right-click on the Power/Bat-
tery icon in the system traylocated in the lower-right corner of the dis-
play windowand tap Adjust Power Properties; under Power schemes, tap Max Battery). The Tablet PC comes with Motion Computing Opti-
mized as the default power scheme. Turn on the Ambient Light Sensor on the Motion Dashboard. This will dim the display automatically (when possible) and save battery power. Dim the display brightness by opening the Motion Dashboard and mov-
ing the Display Brightness slider. (You can also double-tap on the Tablet and Pen Settings icon in the system tray and choose the Display tab to get this brightness slider.) Disconnect LAN/modem connections and disable wireless communica-
tions when not in use (uncheck the Wireless checkboxes in the Motion Dashboard). Turn off optional and unnecessary background programs and turn off or unplug accessory equipment from the USB ports. What does the Tablet PC need for use in another country?
Just an outlet adapter, which you can find in airports and travel stores. The AC adapter will adjust automatically to different voltages when plugged into the correct location-appropriate power adapter. Whats the best way to clean the standard display screen?
To clean the acrylic display screen, wipe it with a soft cloth (like the one supplied) onto which you have sprayed a window-type cleaner. Do not spray cleaners, spray/pour any liquid, nor wipe any abrasive cleaner on the screen nor any surface of the Tablet PC. Do not use tissues or paper towels to clean the screen. They contain wood fibers and may scratch the surface. How should I clean the View Anywhere display screen?
To clean the View Anywhere display screen, wipe it with a soft cloth (like the one supplied). If needed, clean with any alcohol-based product recommended for use on anti-reflective glass. Other cleaning products may leave a residue. Do not spray cleaners, spray/pour any liquid, nor wipe any abrasive cleaner on the screen nor any surface of the Tablet PC. Do not use tissues or paper towels to clean the screen. They contain wood fibers and may scratch the surface. Will scratches affect the display/digitizers performance?
Testing has not found appreciable loss of performance on a scratched display. How sensitive is the screen to various elements?
As with any computer or electronic device, the Tablet PC should be protected from liquids, dirt and sand, other contaminants, and extreme heat. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 81 Appendix A Troubleshooting and Support Will the Tablet PC work with any monitor or USB accessory, keyboard, mouse, disk drive, etc?
As long as the devices driver is available either in the Windows XP operating system or from the manufacturer and it carries the Windows XP logo or certification, it should work with your Tablet PC. For more information, see www.microsoft.com/help. Why doesnt the Tablet PC or FlexDock have parallel, serial, or PS2 (mouse) ports?
Microsoft Tablet PC certification requires the system to be completely Grab-
and-Gothat is, to be able to dock with and undock from all accessories without putting the system into suspend or shutting it down. Connection through legacy ports (serial, parallel, PS2) often requires suspending or restarting the system, which prevents you from moving between desktop mode and mobile mode seamlessly in one docking/undocking step. How do I adjust the Tablet PC for left-handed use?
Double-tap on the Tablet and Pen Settings icon in the system tray, located in the lower-right corner of the display window, which opens the Settings window. You can change it for left- or right-handed use as well as change the location of the menus. Then, make sure you recalibrate the pen. Standard and Extended Warranty and Insurance Programs Motion Computing currently provides limited warranties on Motion products and accessories. See the Warranty packaged with your Motion product or accessory or visit our website at www.motioncomputing.com. In addition, Motion Computing offers extended warranties along with various screen and configuration insurance programs. Visit our website at www.motioncomputing.com/support. MOTION WARRANTIES MOTION COMPUTING SUPPORT If you need assistance or answers to frequently asked questions about your Motion Tablet PC, visit www.motioncomputing.com/support. We also offer a Knowledge Base of additional information that may help with your problem. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 82 Appendix B Motion Tablet PC Specifications Appendix B Motion Tablet PC Specifications Refer to the Motion Computing website at www.motioncomputing.com for the latest information and specifications for your Tablet PC. Motion Computing LE1600 Tablet PC User Guide 83 Motion Computing - Support Motion recommends Microsoft Windows XP Tablet PC Edition 2005. MOTION SUPPORT 2005 Motion Computing, Inc | Legal Terms | Privacy | Site Map http://www.motioncomputing.com/support/2/21/2005 9:51:45 AM
| 1 2 | Users manual WLAN | Users Manual | 1.42 MiB | / January 08 2005 |
chapter 1 getting to know the basics C H A P T E R O N E GETTING TO KNOW THE BASICS This chapter introduces the features and components of the computer. 1-1 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Performance Features
High Performance Processor The notebook PC is equipped with a powerful Intel processor of the latest sub-micron process, processor technologies, and high bus bandwidths.
Large LCD Display The computer is equipped with a large 16-inch TFT high-resolution display panel for clear text and brilliant colors.
Expandability The system offers upgradeable hard disk drive and 2 DDR SDRAM sockets for expansion, allowing the user to easily increase the storage and system capacities as the need arises.
Swappable Device Bay The swappable device bay allows user to add an additional hard disk drive module for increased storage capacity. 1-2 chapter 1 getting to know the basics
Built-in Multifunction Card Reader (Optional) Some system may come with a multiple card reader, which supports SD, MS, MMC Card formats. This allows user to access a wide array of portable memory devices available today.
Communication Features The system provides built-in Ethernet network adapter for local network and 56K modem.
Firewire (IEEE1394 / 1394a) and USB2.0 ports In addition to a full array of built-in I/O ports, the computer offers IEEE1394 for ultra high-speed connection to high bandwidth digital video devices and USB2.0 ports to connect to any USB-based peripheral devices.
Wireless LAN (Optional) or Bluetooth (Optional) The optional internal Wireless LAN module allows your notebook to connect wirelessly to other 802.11-enabled systems, devices, or network. Alternatively, the system may come with an optional Bluetooth module.
TV Tuner (Optional) The optional TV Tuner module allows user to watch TV or cable programs, record TV, and capture analog video signals to the hard drive or to the recordable optical drive
(optional device). 1-3 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Bottom View 1. Ventilation Grill The fan grill is where air is exchanged to dissipate the internal heat. Do not block this airway completely. 2. Swappable Device Bay and Latch Push the latch and pull on the drive hard case to remove the swappable device. Note: The optical drive resides in the Swappable Device Bay. Additionally, you may also purchase an optional hard drive module to be used in this bay. 1-12 chapter 1 getting to know the basics 3. Hard Disk Drive This is the systems hard drive module. The hard disk drive stores all the system data. The hard disk drive can be upgraded to a larger capacity. (See Chapter 4 for instructions on a hard drive upgrade.) 4. Battery Pack and Battery Latch The battery pack is a built-in power source for the notebook. Slide the battery latch to release the battery pack. 1-13 chapter 1 getting to know the basics AC Adapter 1. DC-out Connector The DC-out connector docks to the power jack (DC-in) on the computer. 2. LED Lamp The LED lamp appears green when the unit is plugged into a valid AC source. 3. Adapter The adapter converts alternating current into constant DC voltage for the computer. 4. AC Plug The AC plug plugs to the AC wall outlet. Warning: Make sure you are using a standard 3-prong AC wall socket with a ground pin. If not, you may feel a slight tingling sensation on any of the computers metal parts such as the I/O ports. This is caused by leakage current when the AC adapter is not properly grounded (via the ground pin). However, the amount of leakage current is within the safety regulation and is not harmful to human body. 1-14 chapter 1 getting to know the basics TV Tuner / Video Capturing Module and Video / Audio Input Breakout Cable (Optional Device) Your system may a video-capturing module built-in. To record or watch TV programs, connect the external TV Tuner Module to the TV Tuner port on the notebook. If the device driver and application have not been installed to your system, you may need to do so via the factory CD-ROM disc when you first power up the notebook. To Notebook External TV Tuner Module Cable in /
Antenna S-Video in Video in Audio Right in Audio Left in Alternatively, you may also use the Video / Audio Input Breakout Cable to connect to external video sources, such as a camcorder, DVD, or VCR. To Notebook S-Video in Video in (Yellow) Audio Left in (White) Audio Right in (Red) 1-15 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Remote Control (Optional Device) If your system comes with a TV Tuner / Video Capturing module, the remote control can be used to play or record TV programs. You may need to install the device driver and recording application before the remote control can be used. See the following illustration for a general description of the keys. See section elsewhere in this chapter for TV playback or record functions or see the devices CD-ROM or help screen in the application for detailed instructions. Note: Your system may come with a different remote control. Please consult the user manual in the factory CD-ROM disc. 1-16 chapter 1 getting to know the basics How to Use the Romote, Watch TV and Record Video Clips The following is a brief guide.
You need to install the cards driver and recording application from PixelViews installation CD-ROM disk.
You need to install a utility program called TV Card or PixelView in order to use the cards function.
Connect a video source, cable, or antenna to the TV Tuner Module.
The TV Tuner Module is either NTSC or PAL compliant.
The recorded video clip is in .AVI format.
For more detail description of the TV functions, please consult the programs built-in on-line Help manual.
When the remote control driver is properly, the Remote Master icon will reside on the task bar. See below.
You may program the keys on the Remote by double-click the Remote Master icon. See below. 1-17 chapter 1 getting to know the basics
You may need to make sure that the TV Card is set to the correct region for it to tune-in accurately. Go to [Start >
Programs > TV Card > SW Configuration]. See below.
Press TV button on the remote and the PixelView TV Card application will start. Or, simply go to [Start >
Programs > TV Card > TV Card] to launch the application. See below. 1-18 chapter 1 getting to know the basics
If you are running TV Card application the first time, press TV setup button on the PixelView video panel to scan all available channels. Note: For additional information regarding the TV viewing, recording, and remote control operations, please consult the Help Menu in the application and/or additional literature. 1-19 chapter 1 getting to know the basics LED Status Indicator The LED Status Indicator displays the operating status of your notebook. When a certain function is enabled, an LED will light up. The following section describes its indication. System Status Indicator LED Graphic Symbol Indication Green light indicates the hard drive is being accessed. Green light indicates the optical drive is being accessed. Green light indicates the numeric keypad is activated. Green light indicates the cap-lock is activated. Green light indicates the scroll-lock is activated. 1-20 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Power Indicator LED Graphic Symbol Indication Persistent green light indicates Power On. Light-off indicates the notebook is in Power Off mode. Blinking green light indicates the battery power is currently low. Blinking orange light indicates the battery is being charged (the system is OFF.) Blinking orange light indicates the battery is being charged (the system is ON.) Persistent green light indicates the notebook is neither in Power Saving mode nor in suspend mode. Blinking green light indicates the notebook is in suspend mode. Light-off indicates the notebook is in Power Saving mode. 1-21 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Keyboard Features Function Keys (Quick Keys) Graphic Symbol Action System Control Fn + F1 Enters Suspend Mode. Fn + F3 Fn + F4 Turns Battery Warning Beep on or off. Changes Display Mode:
LCD-only, CRT-only and LCD&CRT. Turns Speaker Volume up. Fn + F5 Turns Speaker Volume down. Fn + F6 Increases Display Brightness. Fn + F7 Fn + F8 Decreases Display Brightness. Num Lock Enables the embedded keypad to work in numeric mode. The keys act like numeric keypads in a calculator. Use this mode when you need to do a lot of numeric data entry. An alternative would be to connect an external numeric keypad. Scroll Lock Press the Scroll Lock key and to move one then press or line up or down. Note: For various system controls, press the Fn (Function) key and the Fx key simultaneously. 1-22 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Windows Keys Your keyboard also has two Windows keys:
1. Start Key This key allows you to pull up the Windows Start Menu at the bottom of the taskbar. 2. Application Menu Key This key brings up the popup menu for the application, similar to a click of the right mouse button. Embedded Numeric Keypad Press Num Lock to enable the embedded numeric keypad. The numbers are printed in upper right corner of a key, in a color different from the alphabets. This key pad is complete with arithmetic operators (+, -, * , /). Press Num Lock to revert to normal character keys. 7 8 9
*
4 5 6 1 2 3
-
+
0
.
/
Num Lock Enter 1-23 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Touch Pad with Page Up / Page Down Function The built-in touch pad, which is a PS/2-compatible pointing device, senses movement on its surface. As you move your fingertip on the surface of the pad, the cursor responds accordingly. The following items teach you how to use the touch pad:
1. Move your finger across the touch pad to move the cursor. 2. Press buttons to select or execute functions. These two buttons are similar to the left and right buttons on a mouse. Tapping on the touch pad twice produces is similar to clicking the left button of a mouse. 3. Press Page Up / Down button to move up or down a page. Function Left Button Right Button Page Up /
Down Button Equivalent Tapping Action Tap twice (at the same speed as double-clicking the mouse button) Tap once Tap twice quickly and on the second tap hold finger to the touch pad to drag the cursor Execution Click twice quickly Selection Click once Drag Click and hold to drag the cursor Access Context Menu Move One Page Up or Down Click once Click upper portion to move up a page Click lower portion to move down Tips on Using the Touch Pad:
1. The double-click speed is timed. If you double-click too slowly, your notebook responds as if you single-clicked twice. 2. Keep your fingers dry and clean when using the touch pad. Also keep the surface of touch pad clean and dry to prolong its life. 3. The touch pad is sensitive to finger movements. Hence, the lighter the touch, the better the response. Heavy touch does not produce better response. 1-24 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Graphic Subsystem Your computer uses a high performance 16-inch active matrix TFT panel with high resolution and multi-million colors for comfortable viewing. The nVidia GeForce FX Go5600 or ATI Mobility Radeon 9?00 video graphics accelerator, which is Microsoft DirectX 9 compatible, performs graphic rendering at a lighting-fast speed. Adjusting the Display Brightness The notebook uses special key combinations, called hot keys, to control brightness. Press Fn+F7 to increase the brightness. Press Fn+F8 to decrease the brightness. Note: To maximize your battery operating time, set the brightness to the lowest comfortable setting, so that the internal backlight uses less power. Extending the Life of the TFT Display Device Observe the following guidelines to maximize the life of the backlight in the display. 1. Set the brightness to the lowest comfortable setting
(Fn+F8). 2. When working at your desk, connect your notebook to an external monitor and disable the internal display Fn+ F4. 3. Do not disable the suspend time-outs. 4. attached, change to suspend mode when not in use. If you are using AC power and have no external monitor 1-25 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Opening and Closing the Display Panel To open the display, slide the LCD latch to the right and lift up the lid. Then tilt it to a comfortable viewing position. To close the display cover, fold it down gently until the LCD latches click into place. Warning: To avoid damaging the display, do not slam it when closing. Do not place any object on top of the computer when the display is closed 1-26 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Audio Subsystem Your computers audio subsystem is Sound Blaster Pro-compatible. Adjusting the Volume Manually To increase the volume, press Fn+ F5. To decrease the volume, press Fn+F6. Adjusting the Audio Volume in Windows 1. Click the speaker symbol in the task tray in Windows. 2. Drag the volume control bar up or down to adjust the volume. 3. To temporarily silence the speaker without changing the volume setting, click Mute. Adjusting the Audio Volume Using the Volume Dial Rotate the Volume Dial (located on the right edge of the notebook) to adjust the speaker volume. Voice Recording A built-in microphone allows you to record sound. You will need to use audio processing software to enable the built-in microphone. For example, you may use Microsoft Sound Recorder. 1-27 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Modem Your computer comes with a 56K V.90 internal fax/modem and a phone jack (RJ-11), which is located on the right rear side of your computer. Use a telephone cable to connect the computer to the telephone wall outlet. Connecting the Modem 1. Plug one end of the phone line into the modem port located on the rear side of the computer. (For EMI compliance, you need to clip the included EMI CORE to the phone line.) 2. Plug the other end of the line into the analog phone wall outlet. Depending on where your computer is used, you may need to change settings in the modem. Correct setting will allow you to maintain a stable connection in a country where its telecommunication system may be different to others. To change the modem setting, do the following:
1. Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel] and double-click on Modem Settings icon. You will see a similar dialog box. 2. Click on the pull-down menu and select the country where it is applicable. Click on OK to exit. 1-28 chapter 1 getting to know the basics Ethernet Your computer is equipped with a 10/100Base-TX Fast Ethernet network adapter. Connect the active LAN cable to the RJ-45 LAN port located on the left rear side of the computer. This allows you to access and transmit data in the local area network. Connecting to the Network Use Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Ethernet cable only. 1. Insert one end of the UTP cable into the network connector until the connector snaps securely into the receptacle. 2. Either connect the other end of the cable to an RJ-45 jack wall outlet or to an RJ-45 port on a UTP concentrator or hub in the network. Cabling Restriction for Networks The following restrictions should be observed for 100BASE-TX networks:
The maximum cable run length is 100 meters(m) (328 feet[ft]).
For 100-Mbps operations, use Category 5 wiring and connections. Note: Consult Windows manual and / or Novell Netware users guide for the software installation, configuration, operation of the network. 1-29 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature C H A P T E R T W O BIOS SETUP AND SECURITY FEATURE In this chapter, you will learn how to enter the BIOS Setup Menu and manipulate various hardware control settings. You will also learn how to use the built-in security features. 2-1 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature The Setup Utility is a hardware configuration program built into your computers BIOS (Basic Input/Output System). It runs and maintains a variety of hardware functions. It is a menu-driven software, which allows you to easily configure and change the settings. The BIOS contains manufactures default settings for the computers standard operations. However, there are occasions when you may be required to modify the default settings in the BIOS. For example, you may need to configure the BIOS power management (APM) settings if you are using DOS, Windows 3.1, or non-Windows operating system. The BIOS allows you to set up passwords to limit access to users. This is an important feature because a great deal of vital information is carried within the computer nowadays. Unauthorized access can be prevented. Later in this chapter, you will learn how to use this security feature. 2-2 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature Entering the BIOS Setup Screen First turn on the power. When the BIOS performs the POST
(Power-On Self Test), press Del key quickly to activate the AMI BIOS Setup Utility. Note: You may need to press F2 key fairly quickly. Once the system begins to load Windows, you may have to retry by cycle-power on again Leaving the BIOS Setup Screen When you have finished modifying the BIOS settings, exit the BIOS. It takes a few seconds to record changes in the CMOS. BIOS Action Keys Function Key Command Exit General Help Save and Exit Select a field Select an item Select an item Lower value Higher value ESC F1 F10
<Tab>
-
+
Description Leaves a sub-menu to return to the previous menu OR exits the BIOS setup while saving changes. Shows the Help Screen Saves changes and reboots the computer. Selects the next field. Selects the next upper item. Selects the next lower item. Selects the next value within a field. Selects the next value within a field. 2-3 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature Modifying the BIOS Settings The AMIBIOS setup main menu is subdivided into sub-menus. Each menu item is described in this section. Main Setup Under this menu, you may change time/date and view basic processor and system memory information. Item Date Selections /
Sub-menu N/A Time N/A Description Type in the current date, in MM/DD/YY format. Type in the current date, in HH:MM:SS format. Advanced Setup Description Choose LCD+CRT for TFT screen output and VGA display output. Enable or disable the built-in touchpad. Description Item Display Type Touch Pad Support Selections /
Sub-menu LCD CRT LCD+CRT Disabled Enabled IDE Configuration Item Selections /
Sub-menu 2-4 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature Auto ARMD ATAPI CDROM Not Installed Primary IDE Master Secondary IDE Master Primary Master is where BIOS tries to boot from first. The primary master controls the hard drive. Normally, Auto is selected. The secondary master controls the ATAPI CD-ROM drive. Normally, Auto is selected. Super IO Configuration (Port Address) Item Description Selections /
Sub-menu IR Mode SIR FIR Disabled 378 / IRQ7 278 / IRQ5 On Board Parallel Port Parallel Port Mode Normal ECP+EPP EPP ECP Choose Fast IR for greater data bandwidth.
[Disabled]:
The port is disabled. Or you may choose a value for the parallel port. You may choose any one of these settings. ECP offers the best performance. About Hard Disk Drive Setting Select Auto to let BIOS configure the drive parameters automatically. Only for certain old types of hard disk drive will you need to modify the settings. After pressing Enter on [Hard Disk], BIOS display the drive parameters. If the detected drive parameters are not correct or if youre trying to enable the enhanced IDE feature, you may still change the value manually.
32 Bit Mode:
PIO Mode:
Select On to allow data transmission in 32-bit format. 2-5 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature Normally use Auto To let BIOS decide the PIO mode setting. If the selected PIO mode is not supported by the IDE drive, the hard disk drive may not work properly.
S.M.A.R.T. Mode:
DMA Mode:
Self-diagnostic and self-monitoring features are built into newer type hard drive. Select Auto to enable S.M.A.R.T. The hard drive in your computer support Ultra DMA mode.
Block Multi-Sector Transfer:
The hard drive in your computer support Multi-sector data Transfer. Note: AMIBIOS automatically sets IDE drive parameters. Select Auto whenever possible. An incorrect setting make cause the computer to malfunction. Boot Setup Boot Device Priority Item 1st Boot Device 2nd Boot Device 3rd Boot Device 2-6 Selections /
Sub-menu ATAPI CDROM Hard Drive
??NSC DP83815/6 MacPhyter??
Disabled Removable Dev. Description Set the type of device for the 1st drive BIOS attempts to boot from. If NSC MacPhyter is selected, system will attempt to load boot sector from the Ethernet port. Set the type of device for the 2nd drive BIOS attempts to boot from. Set the type of device for the 3rd drive BIOS attempts to boot from. chapter 2 bios setup and security feature Note: If you select NSC DP83815/83816MacPhyter, the system will attempt to boot from the network. Note: When the BIOS performs POST, you may also press F8 Key to enable the Boot Device selection menu. You may choose ATAPI CDROM, Hard Drive, or NSC MacPhyter as the first storage device to boot from. If you have already connected a USB Floppy Disk Drive before powering up, it will appear as a Removable Device in the Boot Device selection menu. Security Setup Boot Settings Configuration Item Selections /
Sub-menu N/A N/A N/A Disabled Enabled Change Supervisor Password Change User Password Clear User Password Boot Sector Virus Protection Description Install or Change the Password Install or Change the Password Install or Change the Password To enable or disable the boot sector protection. When Enabled, BIOS gives a warning when any program attempts to rewrite or delete the boot sector. 2-7 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature Note: About Boot Sector Virus Protection:
If enabled, the following warning message appears when a program attempts to alter the boot sector. You may have to enter N several times to prevent the boot sector write. Boot Sector Write!!!
Possible VIRUS: Continue (Y/N)? _ The following warning message appears when a program attempts to format the hard disk drive. Format!!!
Possible VIRUS: Continue (Y/N)? _ Using Password Protection Two Levels of Password Protection are available. The BIOS provides both a Supervisor and a User password. If you try to activate both passwords, the Supervisor password must be set first. The passwords activate two different levels of protection:
1. System always asks for password every time it is powered on. 2. System asks for password only when you attempt to enter BIOS utility. The passwords are encrypted and stored in NVRAM. Make sure you write them down or memorize them. If you lost the passwords, the computer may need to be sent back to the factory or to an authorized service dealer to reset the passwords. Power Setup Item Power Button Mode Selections /
Sub-menu On/Off Suspend Description
[On/Off]: When the power button is pressed, the system is turned off.
[Suspend]: When the power button is pressed, the system enters the suspend mode. 2-8 chapter 2 bios setup and security feature Note: The Suspend Mode selection in BIOS only applies to older Windows version
(such as Windows 3.1 or Windows 95 or NT4) or non-Windows operating system. In Windows ME / 98SE / 2000 / XP, suspend mode and settings are determined by settings in the Power Options Properties (Start > Control Panel > Power Options). Exit Setup Item Saves Changes and Exit Selections /
Sub-menu N/A Discard Changes and Exit Discard Changes Load Optimal Defaults N/A N/A N/A Description After you have completed the BIOS settings, select this item to save all settings, exit BIOS Setup utility, and reboot. New system settings will take effect on next power-up. Select this item if you intend to exit the BIOS Setup utility without making any changes to the current settings. Discards changes done so far to any of the setup questions. Load Optimal Default value for all the setup questions. F9 key can be used for this operation. 2-9 chapter 3 battery power & power management C H A P T E R T H R E E BATTERY POWER & POWER MANAGEMENT In this chapter, you will learn the fundamentals of power management and how to use it to achieve longer battery life. 3-1 chapter 3 battery power & power management In this chapter, you will learn how to operate your notebook on battery power, how to handle and maintain the battery pack, and learn about the systems power saving features. TFT display, central processor, hard disk drive are the major hardware subsystems that consume the most power. Power management deals how these key components should behave to conserve power. For example, you can have the system turn off its display after 2 minutes of inactivity to save power. Efficient power management can help you work longer sessions before having to recharge the battery. The Battery Pack Lithium-Ion Battery Your notebook uses a twelve-cell Lithium-Ion battery pack that provides power when you dont have access to an AC outlet. Note: It is necessary that you charge the battery pack for at least 10 hours before using it for the first time. Note: In the Standby Suspend mode, a fully charged battery loses its power in roughly 1/2 day or less. When not being used, the batterys power will deplete in 1-2 month. 3-2 chapter 3 battery power & power management Battery Low-Power Warning 1. Low Battery Warning Low battery condition occurs when battery power is reduced to 6%. The green power LED indicator blinks and the system beeps once every 16 seconds or so. 2. Very Low Battery Warning Very Low battery condition occurs at 3 % power remaining. The power LED indicator blinks and the system beeps at 4-second interval. When the notebook warns you of its low battery condition, you will have about 3-5 minutes to save your current work. Warning: Do not expose battery packs to temperatures below 0 degree Celsius (32 degree F) or above 60 degree C (140F). This may adversely affect the battery pack. Note: You may use Fn+F3 function keys to disable battery-warning
(low power) beeps. 3-3 chapter 3 battery power & power management Installing and Removing the Battery Pack Note: The system is not designed for frequent battery pack removal. When you need to remove the battery pack, please observe the following steps. To Remove the Battery Pack:
1. Place the notebook bottom-side up on a flat and secured surface. 2. Push the latch and pull the batterys hard case away from the notebook. 1 2 3-4 chapter 3 battery power & power management To Install the Battery Pack:
1. Place the notebook bottom-side up on a flat and secured surface. 2. Carefully insert the battery pack into the battery compartment of the notebook. Charging the Battery and Charging Time To charge the battery, while the battery pack is in the notebook, plug the AC adapter into the notebook and an electrical outlet. The charging time is approximately 3~4.5 hours when the notebook is turned off and approximately 8-10 hours when the notebook is turned on. When the battery is fully charged, the battery charge indicator becomes dark (off). Note: If system runs at heavy loading or in a high temperature environment, the battery may not be fully charged. You need to continue to charge it with the AC adapter plugged in until the charging LED turns off. 3-5 chapter 3 battery power & power management Checking the Battery Level You can check the remaining battery power in the Windows battery status indicator, which is located at the lower right-hand corner of the task bar. (If you do not see a battery or AC-in icon on the task tray, go to Power Options Properties box and click on the Advanced tab. Check off ``Always show icon on the task bar``.) Alternatively, you can access the power meter by clicking the Power Options icon in the Windows Control Panel. Prolonging the Batterys Life and Usage Cycles The life expectancy of the battery is approximately 300 Make good use of the power management function. Save Use the AC adapter wherever AC wall outlet is available. Purchase additional battery pack. Store the battery pack in room temperature. Higher There are ways you can do to prolong the use of battery.
This will ensure uninterrupted computing.
temperature tends to deplete the batterys power faster.
To Disk (Hibernate) saves the most energy by storing current system contents in a hard disk space reserved for this function.
recharges.
manual on how to care for the battery pack. Note: Read Section Protecting Your Notebook in the beginning of this manual for tips about how to maintain the battery pack. Note: To achieve optimal battery performance, you may need to do a battery calibration at a 3-month interval. To do this:
1. Fully charge the battery. 2. Then discharge the battery by entering the BIOS setup screen. (Press F2 key as soon as you turn on the computer. And let it remain at the setup screen until the battery runs out. 3. Fully charge the battery again. See the notices section in the beginning of the user 3-6 chapter 3 battery power & power management Using Windows Power Options Windows Power Management provides basic power saving features. In the Windows Power Options Properties [Start >
Settings > Control Panel > Power Options] dialogue box, you may enter time-out values for display and hard disk drive. Windows power manager saves power by turning off hard drive after 1 minute of inactivity, for example. Windows Power Schemes The power management control panel in Windows XP, known as Power Schemes, is designed to provide the user with an easy-to-use interface. The Power Schemes tab can be found in the Power Options Properties panel that is accessible via the control panel window. Schemes are easy to understand, based on notebook usage scenarios, and control not only processor power usage but other system peripherals as well. Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel] and double-click the Power Options icon. Always on mode puts the processor into maximum performance mode, which provides no power saving. The other schemes control processor performance based on demand. For example, Max Battery mode lowers the processors speed and voltage to conserve power as much as possible. 3-7 chapter 3 battery power & power management In this dialog box, you can manually set the LCD and hard drives time-out values in the Plugged in column and in the Running on batteries column. Lower time-out values will save more battery power. Note: Also consult Windows user guide for more information on how to use Windows power management functions. Note: Actual dialogue box shown above may appear slightly different. 3-8 chapter 3 battery power & power management Suspend Mode Standby Suspend The system automatically enters this mode after a period of inactivity, which is set in the Power Schemes dialog box. In Standby mode, hardware devices, such as display panel and hard disk, are turned off to conserve energy. Hibernate Suspend In this mode, all system data are saved in the hard disk before powering down. When this mode is activated, all system state and contents are saved to the hard disk drive after a period of inactivity defined by the user. No power or very little power is drawn from the battery module under this mode. However, depending on how much RAM that have been installed on your computer, the amount of time the system requires to restore all its previous contents can range from 5 to 20 seconds. For Windows ME / 2000 / XP users, hibernation is handled by the operating system; therefore, no special disk partition or disk file is necessary. If you wish to activate Hibernate mode, you need enable Hibernate Support in the Hibernate tab of the Power Options menu. 3-9 chapter 3 battery power & power management Note: Do not install or remove the memory module when the system is in the suspend mode. Note: Actual dialogue box shown above may appear slightly different. 3-10 chapter 3 battery power & power management Power Button Action The notebook PCs power button can be set to turn off the system or activate the suspend mode. Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel > Power Options]
and click on the Advanced tab. In the pull-down menu, select how you wish the power button to work as. Note: Actual dialogue box shown above may appear slightly different. Warning: In the When I close the lid of my portable computer pull-down menu, DO NOT select Do nothing otherwise the system will still run at high speed while the processors fan grill is fully blocked by the closed LCD panel. The heat will damage the LCD panel. 3-11 chapter 3 battery power & power management Low Battery Warning You can define when and how the system warns you of its battery-low condition. Go to the Alarms tab in the Power Options Properties box. If you wish to hear audible beeps, click on the Alarm Action button and put a check on Sound Alarm. Note: Consult Windows user guide for more information on how to use Windows power management functions. Note: Actual dialogue box shown above may appear slightly different. 3-12 chapter 3 battery power & power management Power Manu Quick Access Instead of making specific selections in the Power Options Properties box, you can quickly and easily specify which pre-set power saving function you desire by clicking on the Battery icon at the lower right-hand corner of the task bar. (If you do not see a battery or AC-in icon, go to Power Options Properties box and click on the Advanced tab. Check off ``Always show icon on the task bar``.) Select Max Battery if you want the system to enter suspend mode more often. Or, select Always On if your notebook PC is plugged into an AC power source. Note: Actual dialogue box shown above may appear slightly different. 3-13 chapter 4 upgrading your computer C H A P T E R F O U R UPGRADING YOUR COMPUTER In this chapter, you will learn how to upgrade the DRAM, hard disk drive, and to install the optional wireless LAN mini PCI card. 4-1 chapter 4 upgrading your computer Upgrading the Hard Disk Drive Replacing the original drive with one of larger capacity can increase the hard drive capacity of your computer. The computer uses a 9.5 mm (height), 2.5-inch Ultra ATA-66 / 100 / 133 type hard disk. Be sure to make a backup copy of all your data before attempting this operation. Warning: Hard drive upgrade is a delicate process. Please observe the following instructions carefully or have a qualified technician install it for you. Damages due to mishandling of this procedure are NOT covered by the manufactures warranty. Warning: Apply care when handling the hard disk.
Mishandling of the hard drive can result in permanent loss of data. Make a backup copy of the drive s content before you remove it. Do not drop or apply any shock. Do not press on the cover. Do not touch the connector with your fingertips. Note: Certain models that come with the IBM-brand hard drive emit a clattering sound when it is being rattled. This is a normal condition. 4-2 chapter 4 upgrading your computer Upgrading the Hard Disk Drive Turn OFF the computer. Unhook the AC cord and all To replace the hard disk drive, do the following:
1. cables/devices attached to the notebook. 2. discharge any static electricity. 3. Locate and remove 2 Screw As on the Metal Cover. Place your hand on a large metal object momentarily to Screw A x2 Metal Cover 4. Remove the Metal Cover. 5. Locate and remove 4 Screw Bs. Gently remove the HDD module from the HDD cable connector. Screw B x2 Hard Drive Module Screw B x2 Remove HDD module from connector 4-3 chapter 4 upgrading your computer Locate and remove 4 Screw Cs from the HDD module. 6. Remove the metal case. Screw C x2 Metal Cover Screw C x2 Re-attach the metal cover to the new hard drive and 7. tighten 4 Screw Cs. Note the green PC board of the hard disk drive is facing against the metal case. 8. Re-attach the HDD Cable Connector to the HDD module. 9. Re-attach and tighten 4 Screw Bs. (If the HDD assembly is not fully inserted into the bay, the screw and its hole will not line up.) 10. Replace the System Device Cover and 2 Screw As. Congratulations! You have now completed the hard drive upgrade. When you boot up the PC, you may need to create a primary HDD partition and reformat the new drive and re-install O/S, drivers, and all the necessary applications. 4-4 chapter 4 upgrading your computer Upgrading the System Memory Many applications will generally run faster when the computers dynamic memory capacity is increased. The computer provides one DDR memory socket, located underneath the System Device Cover. You can increase the amount of memory by replacing the existing one with a dual inline memory module (commonly known as DIMM) of a higher capacity. The DIMM can be 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, or 1024MB in capacity. The DIMM is of type DDR SDRAM, has 200 pins and runs on 2.5V. The DIMM should be PC1600, PC2100, or PC2700 compliant. Warning: Memory upgrade is a delicate process. Please observe the following instructions carefully or have a qualified technician install it for you. Damages due to mishandling of this procedure are NOT covered by the manufactures warranty. Warning: Changing memory while your computer is in suspend or power-saving mode may cause permanent damage to the hardware. Make sure you turn off the power and unplug the AC cord before proceeding with a memory upgrade. Warning: You should only use the DIMM module that is approved by the reseller or the manufacturer; otherwise the system may become unstable. 4-5 chapter 4 upgrading your computer Installing a memory module (DIMM) into the system Power OFF the notebook. Unplug the AC cord and all To install the DIMM, do the following:
1. cables/devices attached to the notebook. 2. discharge any static electricity. Place the notebook on a flat surface and fully open the LCD lid. 3. keyboard. Find the keyboard latches near the upper edge of the Place your hand on a large metal object momentarily to Latch A Latch A 4. The latch is spring-loaded. It will retract when pressed and revert back to its original position when released. Using a small blade to press the latch inward. The keyboard tray should pop up slightly over the latch. If the keyboard tray does not pop up, try to gently lift it up just over the latch. Repeat the step for the other keyboard latches. 5. Carefully lift up the bottom edge and position the keyboard out of the way and the following is revealed. 4-6 chapter 4 upgrading your computer Metal Cover Metal Cover Screw A x3 Remove 3 Screw As and remove the DIMM Metal Cover. 6. The DIMM socket is now seen as shown below. DIMM Socket x2 If you need to remove an old DIMM from the socket, 7. press out on the latches located on both edges of the socket at the same time. The DIMM should pop up to an angle of 30 degree (see diagram below.). Pull the DIMM module out of the memory socket. Store away the DIMM for the future use. 4-7 chapter 4 upgrading your computer 8. Install the new DIMM module into the memory socket. The DIMM will only fit in one orientation. Insert the DIMM at an angle of approximately 30 degrees into the empty memory socket. Then press it firmly so that the contact edge is driven into the receiving socket. Notch Pivot the DIMM until the latches on both sides of the 9. socket snap into place. Note: Notice the notch on the DIMM. The notches should fit nicely with the socket. 10. Replace DIMM Metal Cover and 3 Screw As. Put the keyboard back to its position. Make sure the upper edge of the keyboard now resides under the spring-loaded latches. Congratulations! You have just completed the memory upgrade. When you boot up the computer, you should expect to see an increase in DRAM capacity. Note: Your computer has been tested with a wide range of DIMM on the market. However, not all memory modules are compatible. Check with your system vendor for a list of compatible DIMM for your computer. 4-8 chapter 5 trouble shooting C H A P T E R F I V E TROUBLE SHOOTING In this chapter, you will learn how to solve common hardware and software problems. 5-1 chapter 5 trouble shooting Your computer has been fully tested and complies with the system specifications before shipping. However, incorrect operations and/or mishandling may cause problems. This chapter provides a reference for identifying and correcting common hardware and software problems that you may encounter. When you encounter a problem, you should first try to go through the recommendations in this chapter. Instead of returning the computer and waiting for repair, you may easily solve the problems by considering the following scenarios and possible solutions. If the error continues, contact your reseller for service information. Before taking further actions, consider the following suggestions:
Check to see if the problem persists when all the external devices are removed.
Check to see that the green light indicator on the AC adapter is lit.
Check to see the power cord is properly plugged to the wall outlet and to the computer.
Check to see the power indicator of the computer is on.
Check to see if your keyboard is operational by pressing and holding any key.
Check for any incorrect or loose cable connections. Make sure the latches on the connectors latch securely on to the receptor end.
Be sure you have not performed an incorrect setting on the 5-2 chapter 5 trouble shooting hardware devices in the BIOS Setup utility. A faulty setting may cause the system to misbehave. If you are not sure of the changes you made, try to restore all the settings to factory defaults.
Be sure all the device drivers are installed properly. For example, without the audio driver properly installed, the speakers and microphone will not work.
If external devices such as USB camera, scanner, printer do not function correctly when connected to the system, it is usually the devices own problem. Consult the devices manufacturer first.
Some software programs, which have not gone through rigorous coding and testing, may cause problems during your routine use. Consult the software vendor for problem solving.
Legacy peripheral are not plug-and-play capable. You need to restart the system with these devices powered up and connected first.
Be sure to go to BIOS SETUP and load DEFAULT SETTING after BIOS re-flash.
Be sure the Quick Key Lockout Switch on the bottom of the computer is not engaged; otherwise the quick keys will not work. 5-3 chapter 5 trouble shooting Audio Problems No speaker output -
Turn up the volume dial located at the right edge of the computer. See Chapter 1 for its location.
Software volume control is turned down in Microsoft Sound System or is muted. Double-click the speaker icon on the lower right corner of the taskbar to see if the speaker has been muted or turned down all the way.
Most audio problems are software-related. If your computer worked before, chances are software may have been set incorrectly.
Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel] and double-click the Sounds and Audio Devices icon. In the Audio page, make sure that C-Media Wave Device is the default playback device. Sound cannot be recorded -
Double-click the speaker icon on the lower right corner of the taskbar to see if the microphone has been muted. 1. Click Options and select Properties. 2. Select Recording and click the OK button. 3. After Click OK button, the recording volume control panel will appear.
Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel] and double-click the Multimedia icon (or Sounds and Audio Devices icon). In the Volume or Audio page, make sure that C-Media Wave Device is the default recording device. 5-4 chapter 5 trouble shooting Hard Disk Problems The hard disk drive does not work or is not recognizable -
If you had just performed a hard disk upgrade, make sure the hard drive connector is not loose and the hard disk drive is also correctly seated. Remove it and reinsert it firmly, and restart your PC. (Refer to Chapter 4 for details.)
The new HDD may need to be partitioned and reformatted. O/S and drivers will need to be re-installed as well.
Check the hard disk indicator LED. When you access a file, the LED lamp should light up momentarily.
The new HDD may be defective or is not compatible.
If your computer has been subjected to static electricity or physical shock, you may have damaged the disk drive. The hard drive is making abnormal whining noises -
You should back up your files as soon as possible.
Make sure the source of noise is indeed from the hard drive and not the fan or other devices. The hard disk drive has reached its capacity -
Run Disk Cleanup utility in Windows. [Start > All Programs > Accessories > System Tools > Disk Cleanup] The system will prompt you for what to do.
Archive files or programs that you had no longer used by moving them to an alternative storage medium (floppy disk, optical record-able disk, etc.) or uninstall programs that no longer use.
Many browsers store files in the hard drive as a cache to speed up the performance. Check the programs Online Help 5-5 chapter 5 trouble shooting for instructions on decreasing the cache size or on removing temporary Internet files.
Empty the Recycle Bin to create more disk space. When you delete files, Windows saves them to the Recycle Bin. The hard disk takes longer to read a file -
If you have been using the drive for a period, the files may be fragmented. Go to [Start > Programs > Accessories >
System Tools > Disk Defragmenter] to perform a disk defragmentation. This operation may take a while.
Interrupt requests or problems with other hardware devices may have occupied the CPU and therefore slows down the system performance. The files are corrupted -
Run the Error-checking utility in Windows to check the HDD. Double-click My Computer. Right-click C: and select Properties. Click Check Now in Error-checking in Tools. 5-6 chapter 5 trouble shooting CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, CD-RW, or Combo Drive Problems The CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, or Combo drive does not work -
Try rebooting the system.
The disk is damaged or files are not readable.
After you have inserted a CD-ROM disk, it may take a moment before you can access its content. The drive dose not read any disks -
The CD may not be properly seated in the tray. Make sure the disk is firmly seated onto the spindle.
The disk is damaged or not readable. The disk cannot be ejected -
Normally, it takes a few seconds to eject the disk.
If the disk cannot be ejected, it may be mechanically jammed. Straighten out a paper clip and insert it to a tiny hole next to the eject button. This should reject the disk tray. If not, return the unit for repair. Do not forcefully pull on the disk tray. The CD-RW drive (optional device) cannot record -
You need to purchase and install a burner utility program to record files to a blank media. 5-7 chapter 5 trouble shooting Display Problems The display panel is blank when the system is turned on -
Make sure the computer is not in the Standby or Hibernate suspend modes. The display is turned off to conserve energy in these modes. The screen is difficult to read -
The display resolution should at least be set to at least1024x768 for optimal viewing. 1. the Display icon. 2. 1024x768 and choose at least 256 colors. The screen flickers -
It is normal if the display flickers a few times during shutting down or powering up. Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel] and double-click Under the Settings page, set screen resolution to at least 5-8 chapter 5 trouble shooting Keyboard and Mouse Problems The built-in touch pad performs erratically -
Make sure there is no excess perspiration or humidity on your hand when using the touch pad. Keep the surface of the touch pad clean and dry.
Do not rest your palm or wrist on the surface of the touch pad while typing or using the touch pad. The built-in keyboard accepts no input -
If you are connecting an external keyboard to the system, the built-in keyboard may not work.
Try restarting the system. The characters on the screen repeat while I type.
You may be holding the keys down too long while youre typing.
Keep the keyboard clean. Dust and dirt under the keys could cause them to stick.
Configure the keyboard to wait longer before the auto repeat feature starts. To adjust this feature, Go to [Start >
Settings > Control Panel], and double-click the Keyboard icon. A dialogue box shows up with the adjustable settings for the keyboard. 5-9 chapter 5 trouble shooting CMOS Battery Problem A message CMOS Checksum Failure displays during the booting process or the time (clock) resets when booting -
Try to reboot the system.
If the message CMOS Checksum Failure appears during the booting procedure even after rebooting, it may indicate failure of the CMOS battery. If so, you need to replace the battery. This battery normally lasts two to five years. The battery is of type CR2032 (3V). You may replace it by yourself. The battery is located next to the DDR DRAM socket. See Chapter 4 on how to access the DDR DRAM socket. If you are not sure how this is done, return the notebook to the dealer. 5-10 chapter 5 trouble shooting Memory Problems The POST does not show an increased memory capacity when you have already installed additional memory -
Certain brands of memory module may not be compatible with your system. You should ask your vendor for a list of compatible DIMM.
The memory module may not be installed properly. Go back to Chapter 4 to review the details of this operation.
The memory module may be defective. The O/S issues an insufficient memory error message during operation -
This is often a software or Windows-related problem. A program is draining the memory resources.
Close the application programs youre not using and restart the system.
You need to install additional memory module. For instructions, go to Chapter 4 Upgrading Your Computer. 5-11 chapter 5 trouble shooting Modem Problems The built-in modem does not respond -
Make sure the modem driver is loaded properly.
Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel > Phone and Modem Options] and go to Modems tab. Make sure SmartLink 56K Voice Modem or Uniwill V.90 Modem is listed. Otherwise, click the Add button to add the modem drive, which is located in the factory CD-ROM (or floppy diskette).
Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel > System] and click Device Manager button in the Hardware page to check for possible resource or driver conflict. See Windows on-line help or manual for how to handle such problems.
Make sure the phone line, which the computer is connected to, is working. Connection difficulties -
Be sure to disable Call Waiting on the phone line.
Be sure to have the correct country setting where your computer is used. [Start > Settings > Control Panel > Modem Settings > Configuration] In the Country/Area pull-down menu, select the appropriate country setting.
Excessive line noise might cause the connection to be dropped. To check this, put the regular phone handset on the line and placing a phone call. If you do hear abnormal noise, try to make the modem connection with a different line or contact your local telephony company for service.
Make sure the cable connection is firm.
Try a different receiver number and see if the problem persists. 5-12 chapter 5 trouble shooting Network Adapter / Ethernet Problems The Ethernet adapter does not work -
Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel > System >
Hardware > Device Manager]. Double-click on Network Adapters and check if SiS 900-Based PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter appears as one of the adapters. If it does not exist, Windows has not detected the National Semiconductor Fast Ethernet adapter or the device driver has not been installed properly. If there is a yellow mark or red-cross on the network adapter, it may be a device or resource conflict. Replace or update the device driver from the factory CD-ROM disk or consult Windows manual on how to solve the resource conflict problem.
Make sure the physical connections on both ends of the cable are good.
The hub or concentrator may not be working properly. Check to see if other workstations connected to the same hub or concentrator is working. The Ethernet adapter does not appear to operate in the 100Mbps transmission mode -
Make sure the hub you are using supports 100Mbps operation.
Make sure that your RJ-45 cable meets the 100Base-TX requirements.
Make sure the Ethernet cable is connected to the hub @
socket that supports 100Base-TX mode. The hub may have both 100Base-TX and 100Base-T sockets. 5-13 chapter 5 trouble shooting PC Card / PCMCIA Problems Note: Some system may not have the PC Card Slot option. PC Cards do not function-
Make sure you have properly installed the driver for the card.
Consult the cards manual or contact the vendor for trouble-shooting. The PC card cannot be recognized -
Windows NT4.0 does not support PCMCIA (PC Card) function. You may need an external program for this.
Make sure the card is fully inserted; the outer end of the card should be even with the edge of the computer.
Remove and insert the PC card again.
Make sure there is no IRQ conflict with the card. See Windows on-line help for solving IRQ conflicts.
Reboot the computer and see if the problem persists.
The card may be defective. Try the card on another system, if possible. Windows crashes or freezes when you remove the PC card-
Make sure you have <Stop> the PC card before removing it. Double-click the Safely Remove Hardware icon at the lower right corner of the task bar and select the card you wish to stop. When you click <Close>, in few seconds Windows will prompt you to remove the card. 5-14 chapter 5 trouble shooting Performance Problems The computer becomes hot -
In a 35oC environment, the certain areas of the computers back case are expected to reach 50 degrees.
Make sure the air vents are not blocked.
If the fan does not seem to be working at high temperature (50 degrees Celsius and up), contact the service center.
Certain programs that are processor-intensive may increase the computer temperature to a degree where the computer automatically slows down its CPU clock to protect itself from thermal damage. The program appears stopped or runs very slowly -
Press CTRL+ALT+DEL to see if an application is still responding.
Restart the computer.
This may be normal for Windows when it is processing other CPU-intensive programs in the background or when the system is accessing slow-speed devices such the floppy disk drive.
You may be running too many applications. Try to close some applications or increase system memory for higher performance.
The processor may have been overheated due to the systems inability to regulate its internal heat. Make sure the computers ventilation grills are not blocked. 5-15 chapter 5 trouble shooting Printer Problems The printer does not print -
Make sure the cable connection is secured and the printer is powered up, if the printer is connected via the parallel port.
Run the printer self-test to see if it reports any problem.
Check if the printer displays any error messages. A paper jam may have occurred.
Make sure you have already installed the printer driver.
Try rebooting the system with the printer powered up and connected first. The printer does not print whats on the screen -
The information displayed on the screen may not exactly be the same as what is printed.
If the printer prints extra and strange symbols, it is the result of the cache (garbage) in the printer memory buffer. Cancel all the printer tasks and toggle off the printer power switch to clear up the memory buffer. Then, turn the printer back online and print again.
Make sure you install the correct printer driver. The printer does not respond to infrared communication -
See Infrared Problems listed elsewhere in this chapter. 5-16 chapter 5 trouble shooting Firewire (IEEE1394) and USB2.0 Problems The USB device does not work -
Windows NT 4.0 does not support USB protocols
Check the settings in the Windows Control Panel.
Make sure you have installed the necessary device drivers.
Contact the device vendor for additional support. The IEEE1394 port does not work -
Go to [Start > Settings > Control Panel > System >
Hardware > Device Manager]. You should see an entry which reads IEEE 1394 Bus host controllers. If it does not exist, Windows has not detected the host controller or the device driver has not been installed properly. If there is a yellow mark or red-cross on the 1394 host controller, it may be a device or resource conflict. Replace or update the device driver from the factory CD-ROM disk or consult Windows manual on how to solve the resource conflict problem.
Make sure the cable is fully connected.
Make sure you have installed the necessary device drivers.
Contact the device vendor for additional support. 5-17 appendix A product specification A P P E N D I X A PRODUCT SPECIFICATION A-1 appendix A product specification Processor and Core Logic Intel P4 ( 3. 06 GHz), 478 Pins FC-PGA2 Type, 400/533/800 MHz FSB, 512 KB L2 with Error Correction Code SiS 846FX + SiS SB963 chipset with audio, modem LAN, and USB2.0 controllers integrated 400/533/800 MHz Front Side Bus 266/333 MHz DDR interface System Memory DDR SDRAM, 333/266 MHz, PC2700 / PC2100 /
PC1600 compatible 0 / 128 / 256 / 512 / 1024MB, 2.5-Volt 64-bit bus Two 200-pin DIMM sockets, Max 2 GB Display
16-inch (1600x1200 UXGA or 1400x1050 SXGA+) active-matrix TFT display with up to 16M colors or
15.4-inch (1680x1050 WSXGA+ or 1280x800 WXGA) active-matrix TFT display with up to 16M colors
nVidia GeForce FX Go5600 256-bit 2D / 3D graphics accelerator or
ATI Mobility Radeon 9?00 256-bit 2D / 3D graphics accelerator 8X AGP architecture graphics capability Hardware Motion Compensation and IDCT Supported for MPEG1/2 Playback 64MB or 128MB DDR DRAM Direct3D compatible, DirectX compatible
Processor
Core Logic
Memory Type
Default
Memory Expansion
LCD Panel options
Graphic Accelerator Options
AGP Bus
Motion Playback
Frame Buffer
Other Features A-2 appendix A product specification
Chipset
Audio Codec
Sound Capabilities
Chipset
Transmission Rate
Chipset
MAC
PnP Function
Flow Control
Speed Selection
Other Features Audio SiS SB963 integrated audio controller Realtek 8110S DirectSound 3D accelerator SoundBlaster Pro compatible AC97 V2.2 compatible 2 or 4 Stereo Speakers (1 Watt each) Modem SiS SB963 integrated Modem Controller with MDC card, AC97 V2.2 Modem support V.90 / K56flex for download data speed up to 56Kbps. V.34, V.17, V.29 protocol supported LAN / Ethernet SiS SB963 integrated Ethernet function for 10/100Base-TX network standards Realtek 8169S Windows 95 / 98 / ME / 2000 / XP Plug and Play compatible Automatic Jam and auto-negotiation for flow control Auto Negotiation and Parallel detection for automatic speed selection (IEEE 802.3u) High performance 32-bit PCI bus master architecture with integrated DMA controller for low CPU and bus utilization Remote Wake-up Scheme supported Hot Insertion supported A-3 appendix A product specification Firewire IEEE1394(a) SiS SB963 IEEE1394 OHCI Host Controller and Up to 400 Mbps FW802 Expandable up to 63 devices in chains Storage 2.5-inch format hard disk drive 5.25-inch format (12.7mm height) fixed module with 24X speed 5.25-inch format (12.7mm height) fixed module
(Optional Purchase) 5.25-inch format (12.7mm height) fixed module
(Optional Purchase) 5.25-inch format (12.7mm height) fixed module
(Optional Purchase) 5.25-inch format (12.7mm height) fixed module
(Optional Purchase) Keyboard & Touch pad 88/90-key QWERTY keyboard with embedded numeric keypad and Windows keys, 19mm Pitch Built-in Touch Pad with PageUp / PageDown Buttons and Scroll Bar 19.05mm Pitch
Chipset
PHY Layer
Capabilities
Hard Drive
CD-ROM
DVD-ROM
CD-RW
Combo Drive
DVDR/RW
Keyboard
Touch pad A-4 appendix A product specification
Audio-In Port
Audio-Out / SPDIF
Volume Pot
Firewire
USB2.0 Port
Ethernet
Modem
S-Video
Power-In
Parallel
VGA Port
Consumer IR
FIR/SIR
Card Reader
PC Card Slot
Multimedia Input Port
Battery Pack
Feature
Adapter AC-Input /
DC-Output Ports and Connectors One Microphone-in jack One Headphone / SPDIF jack One VR Dial for audio volume control One Firewire (IEEE1394) host connector Three USB2.0-compliant connectors One standard network Ethernet connector (RJ-45) One modem / phone connector (RJ11) One S-video (TV-out) output connector One DC-in connector One 25-pin parallel port connector One 15-pin VGA connector One Consumer IR Receiver lens for Remote (Optional) One SIR/FIR Port One Card Reader slot (MMC/MS/SD supported) One PC Card Slot (type II) One TV Tuner Module connector (Coaxial cable, RCA Audio Input Jacks, RCA Video Input Jack supported) Battery Pack / AC Adapter
Li-ion Rechargeable Battery Model: BATEDX A-5 appendix A product specification BIOS AMI PnP BIOS Power On Self Test DRAM auto-detection, auto-sizing L2 Cache auto-detection Hard disk type auto-detection APM 1.2 (Advanced Power Management) &
ACPI 2.0 (Advanced Configuration Power Interface) Smart Power Two Level Password Protections 32bit access, Ultra DMA, PIO5 Mode support Multi-boot capability Support: Microsoft Windows 2000 / XP Compatible: Microsoft Windows 95/ 98/ 98SE/ ME/
NT4.0 Physical Specification For 16-LCD model: 350 (W) x 290 (D) x 40.5 (H) mm For 15.4-LCD model: 350 (W) x 290 (D) x 38.5 (H) mm For 16-LCD model: 7.5 lbs / 3.4 KG (with CD-ROM) For 15.4-LCD model: 7.3 lbs / 3.3 KG (with CD-ROM) Operating Temperature: 5 to 35oC (41 to 95oF) Operating Humidity: 20 to 90 percent RH (5 to 35oC) Storage Temperature: -20 to 50oC (-4 to 122oF)
PnP Function
Self Test
Auto Detection
Power Management
Security
Other Features
O/S
Dimension
Weight
Environmental Limits A-6 appendix B agency regulatory notices A P P E N D I X B AGENCY REGULATORY NOTICES B-1 appendix B agency regulatory notices Federal Communications Commission Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help. Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by the Manufacture may void the users authority to operate the equipment. Connections to Peripheral Devices Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations. Declaration of Conformity This device complies with Part 15/68 the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. European Notice Products with the CE Marking comply with both the EMC Directive
(89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) and R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC) issued by the Commission of the European B-2 appendix B agency regulatory notices Community. Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European Norms:
EN55022 (CISPR 22) Radio Frquency Interference
EN50082 (IEC801-2, IEC801-3, IEC801-4) Electro-magnetic Immunity
EN 300 328-2 (ETS 300 328) Radio Spectrum Matter.
TBR21 (ETS TBR21) Terminal Equipment.
EN60950 (IEC950) I.T.E. Product Safety Canadian Notice This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. Le present appareil numerique nemet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de Classe B prescrites dans le reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le Ministere des Communications du Canada. Power Cord Requirement The power cord supplied with the AC adapter should match the plug and voltage requirements for your local area. Regulatory approval for the AC adapter has been obtained using the power cord for the local area. However, if you travel to a different area and need to connect to a different outlet or voltage, you should use one of the power cords listed below. To purchase a power cord (including one for a country not listed below) or a replacement ac adapter, contact your local dealer. U.S. and Canada
The cord set must be UL-Listed and CSA-Certified or C-UL Listed.
The minimum specifications for the flexible cord are (1) No. 18 AWG,
(2) Type SJ, and (3) 3-conductor.
The cord set must have a rated current capacity of at least 10 A.
The attachment plug must be an earth-grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15A, 125V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250V) configuration. Japan
All components of the cord set (cord, connector, and plug) must bear a `PSE` mark and registration number in accordance with the B-3 appendix B agency regulatory notices Japanese Dentori Law.
The minimum specification for the flexible cord are: (1) 0.75 mm2 conductors, (2) Type VCT or VCTF, and (3) 3-conductor.
The cord set must have minimum rated current capacity of 7 A.
The attachment plug must be a two-pole, grounded type with a Japanese Industrial Standard C8303 (15 A, 125 VAC) configuration. Other Countries
The cord set fittings must bear the certification mark of the agency responsible for evaluation in a specific country. Acceptable agencies are:
BSI (UK) OVE (Australia) CEBEC (Belgium) SEMKO (Sweden) FIMKO (Finland) DEMKO (Denmark) NEMKO (Norway) SETI (Finland) EANSW (Australia) SEV (Switzerland) IMQ (Italy) UTE (France) CCC (China) PSB (Singapore) PSE (Japan) BSMI (Taiwan) B (Polish)
The flexible cord must be of a HAR (harmonized) type HO5VV-F 3-conductor cord with a minimum conductor size of 0.03 square inches.
The cord set must have a current capacity of at least 10 A and a nominal voltage rating of 125 / 250 VAC. CAUTION: MODEL 766NSx IS DESIGNED TO USE WITH THE FOLLOWING AC ADAPTER MODEL ONLY Manufacture: LITE-ON ELECTRONICS, INC. Model: PA-1161-02 (160W) B-4 appendix B agency regulatory notices Telephone lines requirement
The appropriate utilization of 26AWG telephone line cord on unit. CAUTION: Always disconnect all telephone lines from the wall outlet before servicing or disassembling this equipment. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26AWG or larger telecommunication line cord. Battery Pack Safety
The battery pack is intended to use only with this notebook. Do not disassemble the pack. Do not dispose of the battery pack in fire or water. To avoid risk of fire, burns, or damage to your battery pack, do not allow a metal object to touch the battery contacts. Handle a damaged or leaking battery with extreme care. If you come in contact with the electrolyte, wash the exposed area with soap and water. If it contacts the eye, flush the eye with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Do not charge the battery pack if the ambient temperature exceeds 45J (113K). To obtain a replacement battery, contact your local dealer. Do not expose the battery pack to high storage temperatures (above 60J, 140K).
When discarding a battery pack, contact your local waste disposal provider regarding local restrictions on the disposal or recycling of batteries.
Use only supplied AC Adapter for charging. CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer`s instructions or local laws. VORSICHT! Explisionsgefahr bei unsachgernazen Austausch der Batterie. Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einem vom Hersteller empfohlenem ahnlichen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien navh Angaben des Herstellers. B-5 appendix B agency regulatory notices Laser Safety The optical drive used with this computer is certified as a Class 1 laser device according to the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services
(DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard and International Standards IEC 825 / IEC 825-1 (EN60825 / EN60825-1). The device is not considered harmful, but the following precautions are recommended:
Do not open the unit.
Avoid direct exposure to the laser beam.
If the unit requires service, contact an authorized service center.
Ensure proper use by reading and following the instructions carefully.
Do not attempt to make any adjustment of the unit. Warning!
Do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet containing the laser. The laser beam used in this product is harmful to the eyes. The use of optical instruments, such as magnifying lenses, with this product increase the potential hazard to your eyes. For your safety, have this equipment serviced only by an authorized service provider. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE 1 LASERSCHUTZKLASSE 1 PRODUKT LED (Infrared) Safety The infrared port located on the left side of this computer is classified as a Class 1 LED (light-emitting diode) device according to International Standard IEC 825-1 (EN60825-1). This device is not considered harmful, but the following precautions are recommended:
Do not attempt to view the infrared LED beam with any type of optical device.
Do not attempt to make any adjustment of the unit.
If the unit requires service, contact an authorized service center.
Avoid direct eye exposure to the infrared LED beam. Be aware that the beam is invisible light and cannot be seen. CLASS 1 LED PRODUCT LEDSCHUTZKLASSE 1 PRODUKT B-6 appendix B agency regulatory notices Lithium battery warning This computer contains a lithium battery to power the clock and calendar circuitry. CAUTION: Danger of explosion if battery is replaced incorrectly. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions. ATTENTION: Il y a danger dxplosion sil y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avcc unc batterie du meme type ou dun type recommande par le constructer. Mettre au rebut les batteries usagees conformement aux instructions du fabricant. VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemBen Austausch der Batterie Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einem vom Hersteller empfohlenem ahnlichen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. Der Arbeitsplatzbezogene Schalldruckpegel nach DIN 45 635 betragt 70dB
(A) oder weniger. Zum Netzanschlua dieses Gerates ist eine geprufte Leitung zu verwenden. Fur einen Nennstrom bis 6A und einem Gerategewicht groBer 3kg ist eine Leitung nicht leichter als H05VV-F, 3G, 0.75mm2 einzusetzen. Die Steckdose muB nahe dem Gerat angebracht und leicht zuganglich sein. B-7 Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. For operation within 5.15 ~ 5.25GHz frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. IMPORTANT NOTE:
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device complies with FCC RF Exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment, under 47 CFR 2.1093 paragraph (d)(2). This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2005-08-01 | 5725 ~ 5850 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
| 2 | 5150 ~ 5350 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 | Effective |
2005-08-01
|
||||
| 1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Gemtek Technology Co., Ltd.
|
||||
| 1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0005801899
|
||||
| 1 2 | Physical Address |
No.15-1 Zhonghua Road Hsinchu Industrial Park
|
||||
| 1 2 |
No.15-1 Zhonghua Road
|
|||||
| 1 2 |
Hukou Hsinchu, N/A
|
|||||
| 1 2 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| n/a | ||||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 2 | Grantee Code |
MXF
|
||||
| 1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
M940103AG47
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 2 | Name |
A**** W********
|
||||
| 1 2 | Title |
Manager
|
||||
| 1 2 | Telephone Number |
886 3******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 2 | Fax Number |
886 3********
|
||||
| 1 2 |
A******@gemteks.com
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 2 | Firm Name |
Advance Data Technology Corporation
|
||||
| 1 2 | Name |
C******** C********
|
||||
| 1 2 | Physical Address |
No. 19, Hwa Ya 2nd Rd., Kwei Shan Hsiang
|
||||
| 1 2 |
Taoyuan Hsien, 333
|
|||||
| 1 2 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
| 1 2 | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 2 | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
| 1 2 |
C******@adt.com.tw
|
|||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 2 | Firm Name |
Advance Data Technology Corporation
|
||||
| 1 2 | Name |
S****** H********
|
||||
| 1 2 | Physical Address |
No. 19, Hwa Ya 2nd Rd., Kwei Shan Hsiang
|
||||
| 1 2 |
Taoyuan Hsien, 333
|
|||||
| 1 2 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
| 1 2 | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 2 | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
| 1 2 |
s******@adt.com.tw
|
|||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
| 1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
| 1 2 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |||||
| 1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Motion Computing LE1600 with 11a/b/g WLAN | ||||
| 1 2 | Motion Computing LE1600 with 11a/b/g WLAN | |||||
| 1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
| 1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
| 1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
| 1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 | Grant Comments | Output power is conducted. Device is restricted to indoor use only for 5.15-5.25 GHz. SAR data in this filing is applicable to demonstrate compliance only for final host product configurations as shown in this filing. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter within a host device, except as described in this filing (Bluetooth). End users must be provided with operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance requirements. Highest reported body SAR values per band for this FCC ID are: 2.4 GHz 1.5 W/kg; 5.3 GHz 0.69 W/kg; 5.8 GHz 0.87 W/kg. | ||||
| 1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 2 | Firm Name |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd. Taoyuan Branch
|
||||
| 1 2 | Name |
R******** C******
|
||||
| 1 2 | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 2 | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
| 1 2 |
r******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 15C | 2412 | 2462 | 0.081 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 2 | 15C | 5725 | 5850 | 0.04 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 3 | 15C | 2402 | 2480 | 0.0006 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 1 | 15E | 5150.00000000 | 5350.00000000 | 0.0390000 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC